INSTRUCTION

FOR FIELD .

PREPARED BY A

BOARD OF ARTILLERY OFFICERS,

CONSISTING OF

CAPTAIN WM:. H. FRENCH, 1ST ARTILLERY, CAPTAIN WM:. F. BARRY,~~ ARTILLERY, CAPTAIN H. J. HUNT, 2D ARTILLERY.

TO WHICH IS ADDED

THE EVOLUTIONS OF BATTERIES,

TRANSLATED FROM THE FRENCH BY BRIGADIER GENERAL R. ANDERSON, ARMY.

,V ASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 1867. DEPARTMENT, Washing~on, D. C., March 1, 1863. This sys,tem of Instruction for Field Artillery, prepared under direction of the War Department, having been approved by the President, is adopted for the instruction of troops when acting as field artillery. Accordingly, instruction in the sume will be given after the method pointed out therein j and all additions to or departures from the exercise and manceuvres laid down in the system are positively forbidden. EDWIN M. STANTON, Secretary of War. TABLE OF OONTENTS.

PART I.

ORGANIZATION, MATERIEL, AND SERVICE. Page. ARTICLE L-ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES...... •...... •...... 1 1 2 2 :~~ET~~::::/H~:HTnH(2 ~£~~~7~~tI~rff~~~.. 2 Number of horses required for each carriage .•.•....•...... '" .....•...... 3 Personnel ...... •.••• 3 Proportion of field artillery to other arms ••.•..•"'" •••••.••••••...... •..•. :~ ARTICLE H.-ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENTOF FIELD nATTERIES . 4 Organization for iU8tructioll , 4 Organization for the march ...... •...... ••••...... •.. 4 Organization for war ...... •..••. 4 Composition and equipment of battery for war . 5 l<'ield.pieces. Description ...... ••...... •...... 5 6 A~~~~i~~~~: ~~~;;;w~e~~mCn~:::;~sft~;n'~~!~~::::: : : :::::: : ::: : : : : : : : : : : :: : : : 6 Density ..•...... •...... 7 l'roof. ...•....•...... •..•••.....•...... •....•.•.•••.•••...... 7 Charges ...... ••..•.•.•...... •...... 7 bags ...... ••"" •.•.•...... •...... •. ". 8 . Kinds of...•..•...... •...•...... •...... •.•...... 8 Solid shot .....•..•••••..•••...... •.•.••....•..••....•.....•...... •...... 8 Canisters .••.•....•...•••••••••••.....•.•.•..••..•••.••...... 8 Shells ...... •••.•••.•••.•••....•.....•.....•...... •..•.. 8 Charges of shells ...... ••.•••.••...... " ••...•..•...." ...... ••.•• 8 8 !) 9 F~~::i~i~J~;~:~:0;~~i::~::::::::::~:::::::~::::~~~:~:::::::::~::::: 9 Primer ...... ••.....••••.••...•...... 10 Description ..•...... " " ...... •....•.••.•...... •.. 10 Issues of to batteries _ . 10 Care and preservation of ammunition ...... ••...•...... •••••• 10 10 ~~i~t:t~S ~Fg:;~i~~~~~R~C;.i~l.~ ~.o.~~~::: : : : : : : : : : : :::: :: : : ::: : : : :::: : :: : ::: U FIELD CARRIAGES. Number and kinds of .carriages . 11 Caissons _ ..•••...... _ .....•...... •..••.•••...... •. 11 11 11 11 ~~S~if~,¥~:~~~~~~:::::::~~:~::::~~~~~~::~~::~::~~:::::~:::::.::::::::11 Ammunition chests ...._ .••...... •....•..•...•...•••..••....•.•. "" _... 12 Ammunition carried in each chest ...... •...... L3 Method of packing ammunition chests ...... •..•...... 14 Implements and equipments for a gun.carriage .•.••..•••...••...... 14 Implements and equipments for a caisson ...... •.•..•...... •...... 14 Weights of gun.carriages and caissons equipped .•....••.••.••..•....•.•.•.... 15 EqUipment of the travelling forge ..•••..•.•••.•.•.•••••••...... •••...... 15 EqUipment of the battery wagon ••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••. 18 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Ammunition clusts-Continued. Supply of spare parts ...... •. ; .•.•••..•..••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••.•. 22 Composition and preparation of paints ...•••.•...•..••.•.•.•.•.•••••••••.•••. ~2 Quantity of paint required for a carriage .....••...•.•.••.••.•••••.•.••.•••••• 23 !'aint for tarpanlins .. , , ...... •....•.....••.•••.••.. , 23 Weights of forges and battery wagons equipped ...... •...•...•.....••. 24 ROHSES. Number required for a field battery .....•.•...... •.••....•...••.. 04 Spare horses for prairie service ...... •....•..•...•....••.•••...••...•..• 25 For cannoneers of ...... ••...•.••••••••..•• 25 Horse equipments. Number of sets required .....••..•..•...••..•...•••.••...•.. 25 Artillery lwrness. DescripHon and llcculiarities .•...... •...•...... •.• 25 Harness required for each horse ...... •....••.•.•.....•.•••••..•.. 25

2() ARTb~~i~)i~f;~;.~~~~~I~~.~.~~.~~~.~~~::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::: ::::::: ::: 26 26 ~~l~~i{U~ b~~~~i~~,..' .-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 27 Seat for pendlllUln hG,usse...... •..•...•.....•....••..•••••••..••...••..... 27 :l\Iuzzle sight .. , , .....•....•..... , ...... •..•. , , •...... • 27 Practical hints on pointing , , , ...... •.....••..••...•..• 28 Canses which distnrb ~e true flight of projectiles .....•..•...••...•. , ••..•..•• 28 Rapidity of fire at advancing bodies .....•...... ••..•~ ....••..•...•..•...••• , 28 'rable of ranges for field service .....•...... •...•.•...... •. 29 'rable of ap proxin::.ate ranges for rifled ....•••...•.•..•. , •••.•••••••.•... 31

ARTICJ~E IY.-INTERIOR ECONOMY OF A BATTERy ..••••.•••••.•••••••••••••••. 33 A1.tillery horse",. Description " ...... •...... •••.••..•.. 3:3 'Yorking power ...... ••••...... ~...... •..•••...•.•...••...•••..• 33 Forage , .. , ...... •.••..•...... •...••....•..•••..••..••.... 33 Necessity of grain ration ...••...... •...•. , ....••..••....••.••••..•. 34 'yater ...... •...... •....•..•....••.•••..•....• 34 34 g~~~~~~~U.I~~.f:o.r.~:~~~~~~~~.~~rr:.e.~t.-.-.-...- .-.- .-.-.-.-:.-.-.-.-.-:::: :::::::::: 35

aRTIcLE Y.-FIELD SERVICE..••...... ••.•••.•••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 37 Marches __ , ...... ••••••....•...•...•.• 37 Ascents, ' ' .....•...... " ..•.....••.....••••..••....•.• 39 Descents , ..•..•.•...•...... •..•..••...•••.••.••...•.•. 39 39 ~f,~~:.~~~s~~~~~~p.~ .~r.o.~~~::::::::::::: :::::::::::: ::::::::: :::::: ::::::::: ::: 40 Crossing fords ...... •...•••.....•.....•...•••..•..•...•••...•••.•...•.••• 40 Passage of bridges , ...... •.•.....•••...•.••••..••. 40 Passage on ice ..' , ...... ••.....•....•...... •.••.••..••••..••••.••...•• 41 Ileversing a battery in a narrow road . 41 Instruction for the preservation of harness ...... •....•....••....•...••.. 41 42 ~;:~~~~~~~~~~l~f~~~~::~~~o~rs~~~::: : : : : :: : : : : : : : :: : :: : ::: :::::: ::::::::::::::: :: 42 '1'0 embark the horses ...... ••..••..•••.•..... 42 43 :f:~~~~~~~l~~~.~~~:~l:~:::~:::::~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 43 43 ~~~;f;~~o~Sll~J;;:ig~~~~~~C~~l~~~: :~: : :: : : :: :: :: :: :::::::::: :::::::::::::::: 44 Order of encumpment ...•...... •...... •.•.•••.•••••.••••••••••••••••••• 44 PART II. TACTICAL INSTRUCTION. Basis of instruction ...... •...... •...... ••••••••••.•••••••••••••• 46 46 ~~~~g(~t~~:~~fo:~~h~oC~~~:? ::::: :: : : : : : : : :: :: : : :: ::: :: : ::::: : ::: :::::: ::::::::: 47 Posts of the officers, non. commissioned officers, &c ...... •.....•.....••.••.••..•.• 47 The battery . 48 General principles , ...... •...... •.•...•....•• 49 50 ~~fi~(~~~~li.~~'.~~~~~~~'~:..~~.rr:~.O~~:i~.~~::::::::::::: ::::: :::::: :::::: ::::::::: 51 Elememary movements and their objects ...... •..•••••.•••••.••..•.•.• 51 Method of giving commands ...... •...•....••.•.•.•.•...•.••••••••.•••..••••.•••. 52 :Bugle or trumpet signals and calls •••..••••.•...••••••••••••••••••••••••.••.•••.. 5j,! TABLE OF CONTENTS. vii

PART III.

SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. No. Page. ARTICLE I.-METHOD OF I~STRUCTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1 53 'l'he cannoneer dismounted ...... •.....•..•.....•.•••..•....•••.•••• 2 53 Elementary instruction. _._ ...... ••...... •.•.•••• 2 53 l)osition of the cannoneer dismounted .._ ...... •.•...... •••...... 3 53 4 54 ~~~i~1~~~1~::-:-~:.c.s.~~f:~~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~:::~ 5 54 8 54 ~~~\~;\\~~:::~:::::::::::: ::::::::::::: :::::::: ::::::::::: :::::: ::::::: Y 55 To march backwards_ ...... •••••.. " .•.... 10 55 11 55 12 55 13 55 >Il~.~~;SI~g~;;~i~~::~~~g:::::::~:::::~::~::~~~~~~~~~::~~::~::~~:~ 18 5G Inspection of sabre_ . .__...... •..•...... •••...••..... _ 23 57 Parade rest _ ....•...... '" ...•...• 26 57

ARTICI.E H.-THE GU~ DETACHMENT .••••••.••••••••.••..••••••.•••.••. 28 58 Porming and telling off the detachment. _ _ """""" _... :30 ;;8 '1'0 form in one rank------_ . .. __ .. _ _.. _ . . . . .•...... :l2 ;;8 Alignments ...- ... -- -'" .- ...... ••...•...... """"" .... :';:3 ;;9 36 Direct mareh in single file - ...... •..•. _ _ .. _"'__ ",, .. 59 Change of direction in tile ..-----_ ...... •....._ ...... • .. . 39 GO Obli'lue march in tilc - -""""'" _"'"_ .....•..• "" 40 60 Direct march in line .. - - .•.. -...... • ...... 41 liO '1'0 halt the detachment" ...... •...- . . . . .•. •. .. •• ...... ,1:2 GO "\Vheelings. --- '" - "" ...•...... " '" " _. 4:3 GO Do. In circle -- ...... •.•...... •...... _ ...... 44 61 Do. '1'0 the right or left- ...... 45 G1 The reverSe " --.....•...... •...... _...... •... . . 46 To move forward.... . 47 61 61 '1'0 form the detachme~t'i'~ t~~;'l:;l;k~::::: ::::::::: :::: :::::::::::::::: 48 62 G2 6:3 ~~~~~}~t~[~.t~~~~~~t~~~~~~ ~l~~~~~:~::~::::::~::::::::::::::::::::::::g~ 6:3 '1'0 march to the rear .. - "" .....•..••..~ •....•..... , . . . 55 63 '1'0 march backwards -. - _"" _ 56 64 To open and close the ranks _ '" . _ _., ••.• 57,58 li4 Execution of the movements at double.quick...... ••....•...... 61 65 '1'he platoon _.. _ .. _ __ __. . . . . 62 G5 Sabre exercise -- __ _ _ : _ _ _...... 63 G;) To opell fles .. _ _ ._ .__ .....•••..... , . •.. •• . •. . 65 GG '1'0 close files _....•.•...•...... •...... , ...... 92 72

ARTICLE HI.-lIIAXUAL OF THE PIECE._ ..•••.•••.•.•••..••••.••••••..••• ~l3 73 :Method of instruction __ ...•...... _...•....•.. 93 7:J Posts of the cannoneers, piece unlimbered._ ...... • 95 73 Loading and firill g. _ , ••..... , ••. 96 73 Loading by detail. _ _ _ . no 79 l\[oving the piece by hand, piece unlimbered ....•...... ' . III 7!J Changing posts , , _ '" . 113 79 114 SO 115 80 P~fu~~~~:~I~J:~:l~l;~~~~;.~,:;~~~~:li~;~~;~~:::~::::::::::~~::::::::::::::::::118 81 To fonn the detachment .. _ __ __" _ , . 119 81 1>08tsof the detachment __ , ...... ••...• 120 81 121 82 'I'~~~~tgfJl~fc~~~lt~n~~l~e~~~~~n~~~~~-lil;~b;;';d::::::::::::::::: :::::::::: :: 123 82 Movillg the piece by hand, piece limbered ...... •...... •.•••••••.••. 124 83 Unlimbering and coming into action_ ..•._•...•...... ••.••.••..... 126 83 Service of the gUll with diminished numbers .._ ...... •.•...•...••..••.•••• 129 84 Supply of ammunition in actioll ...•.....••••••••••••••.•••.•••••..•.•••• 131 84 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS.

No. Page. ARTICLE IV.-l\1ECHANICAL MAN The carriage ...... •.....•...... ; ...... • 132 85 The limber ...... ••...... 0.. 1:32 86 The caisson 0.. 0 0 0...• 0...... •...... 0...... 1:32 86 Changing ammunition chests .••...... 0 0...... •...... 134 &7 Changing wheels...... 13:3 Be

DlSIllounting pieces 00 ••••••••••••••••••••••• , 1:3G 8!J l\lollntiug piCCllS 0 0...... 1:37 90 Carrying pieces...... 1:J8 !)O Dismounting carriages 0...... 1:)!J 91 i\lounting carriages...... 140 91 LUghtingcarriages that have been overturned...... 141 !)l I:lpiking and unspiking , and rendering them unserviceable...... 14::! 92

ARTICLE V.-THE CANNONEER MOUNTED .•••...••..••....•.•.•••••.....•.•.•.• D~J Gelwral remarks...... 14:J 93 Elementary instruction , .....•...... '" ...... •. 146 93 To brillle the horse...... •...... 147 93 To saddle , ....•... 148 94 To lead out , 14G 94 Position before mounting...... 150 95 To mount 0...... 151 95 Exercise at a halt...... •...... 153 95 Position of a cannoneer mounted " 153 95 96 ¥~1~~~1~:~-;W~~~:le;;ti~'l:~i;;::::::::: :::::: ::::::::::::: :::::: ::::::::: i~~ 96 '1'0 shorten the snaffle rein ...... • 156 96 '1'0 cross the u.'ius in one hand...... };")7 !16

'1'0 take the reins in both hands 0. • ••• ••••••• •• ••••• • •••• • • 158 96 1Jse of the bridlu reins and legs 0...... 15!) 97

Effect of the reins and legs 00. •••• •••••• •••• • • •••••• 1GO 97 '1'0 march 0...... 161 97 To halt...... •...... 1G2 97 To turn to the right or left. . . .. ••...... 163 98 '1'0 reversu to the right or left...... 164 98 To oblique ...... • 0....•...• 0...•..•••.••.•••..• 0...... IG5 98

To renl back ...•...••...... •..... 0 ••••••••• , ••••••••••••• ••••••• ••••• 1GG 98 '1'0 dismount 0...... 169 !J9 '1'0 file oft. .•...... •. . • . . • ••.•• • •• • • •••..• . . • • • . .•. • • • . • . .. • • . . •• . . . 170 99

'1'0 unsaddle ...... •.....•.. 0 • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 171 100 '1'0 unbridle ,...... •...... 172 100 Vaulting, the horse unsaddled. ..•...... • 173 IOU l\Iarching ...... •...... •.... 100 Riding.house drill ...... •...... •...... •. , .. 0..... 174 101 '1'0 march to the right or lcfi,hand .••..•.....•.•.•••••...... , .•...... 175 101

'1'0 halt and to move off , 0 •• • 176 101 '1'0 trot, and t<:>rosUlnethe walk...... •....•... 177 101 Chauges of hand...... •... •.. . . 178 10~

'1'0 cross reins in marching 0" • ••• ••••• •••••• 179 10~ To tunl4y cannoneer in marchiug. 180 10;.J Marching on the same line, to reverse by cannoneer'" ...... 181 103 Marching in column, to reverse by caunoneer...... 182 103 '1'0 rest...... • ...... •...... 184 1W '1'0 rest in marching '" ...... 185 10:> Vaulting, the horse saddled...... 186 ]0;) '1'he spur...... 187 104 '1'0 mount in two ranks , ...... •...... •• 00.... 188 104 '1'0 cOllllllCtthe cannoneers to the riding.house...... •.• HiD 104 Change of direction in tbe length of the riding.house...... 1!l4 105 Change of direction obliquely by cannoneer ...... •.... 0...... • 195 105 '1'0 march in a circle...... • .. .. . • ... . . •...... • •. 1!l7 106 '1'0 change hand on the circle ...•.....•..•. 0...... 198 lOG '1'0 rennite the cannoneers ...•.....•...••..• 0...... 199 107 '1'0 form the cannoneers in line .. 0'" ..••••.•••••...•.•• 0••••.• 0.0.. . •• 200 107 '1'0 dismount in two ranks.... •••. .•• .•. •••. •••. ••...•.. •••. ••...•..... 201 107

Exercise with the ....•....• 0" •••• •••• ••• ••• •••• •••• ••• ••••••• 202 107 '1'0 turn to the right or left by cannoneer...... •••••••••••••••. 203 101 TABLE OF CONTENTS.

No. Page. RidinJf.house drill-Continued. '1'he reverse by cannoneer...... • .• .•...••••••• •••••••••••• •••••••• 204 lOe '1'0pass from the head to the rear of the column.. •..••.. .•...• •••••.••• 205 108 From a halt to move at a trot...... • •...• ...•. .••. •..• ••... ••• •••.••••• 206 108 '1'0pass from the trot to the trot out, and.to resume the trot...... 207 108 '1'0pass from the trot to the gallop...... • . . . .••. • . .. .•.. ••.••• .. •• .• ••• 208 109 109 ~~t~~~.~g~ri~l~~~~.~~~~.~r.~~:t.:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~~~ 110 Position of the bridle hand...... 213 110 l\Iovements of the bridle hand...... ••...... • ..•••• •••.•••.• ••.. 214 110 III 111 ~~~lf~~:;~t~~~~~~~I~~:~~~:~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::iH 112 Sabre exercise...... 227 113 '1'0leap the ditch and the bar.. •...••.. .••••• .•••••••••••.•• •.•... •••. 228 114

ARTICLE VI.-THE DETACHMENT.-Horse artillery .•••••.••••••••..••.•••..••..• 115 }'orming and telling off the detachment...... ••••• ••••.. •••••• .•••..•.•• 231 115 '1'0 mount and dismount in two ranks .••••••...... •••..•••••••.••••••••• ~ 232 115 To fonn in one rank ...•...... •... .••••. .•••.• .•••••.••.•••••••••.•.•••• 234 115 Alignments_ ...... •...•...... •.••...••..••. , ••.• ••.•••.• ••.•••••••.. 235 116 '1'0form in two ranks. ...•. ..••••. •.•.•.• ••..•••• .••••• .••.•.• ••.. ••..•• 241 117 To open and to close the ranks...... •...• •.•••• ..••••. ••.•••. ••. ••.•••. 242 117 '1'0rein back the detachment."'" .•••.. .••••• .••• •••••••••.• ••••••••••• 244 118 To march the detachment by file""" .•••••••••••"""" ••••• .•••.•••• 245 118 119 119 119 ~rft~11ri~~:~~~~i;~:~~~~:~:~~~~~~:~:::~~::::~:~::~~~:~~:~:~:~~:~~i! 119 'I'o break into single file....•..•...•...... •.....••..••••.....• __.•...•.. 253 120 To form in double files...... • ""'" """'" """ ...•..•••. •....• 255 120 To form the detachment in line ...•..""" ••..•. .•. ••. •••..•. ••..••..... 256 1~0 121 123 ~{~~li~~~~:i~~i~::~i~;il~: :~;~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :~~:: ~~~ 124 'Wheel in circle in two ranks. ••••..•••. .•••... ••.••• ..••••• •••.•. .•••.• 27<) 124 H~~~~~~~~ i~~~'~g::t~~~~~~it"" '" 275 12;) 125 125 125 126 ~@~Ii~t~f.!~::~1:~':~~t:~~~HH~~~~~mH~~~~j~H~HH~~m 126 127 A~~~~~C;;:~~;l;Jr~l~:::~~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::.~~~127 To harness .•...•.•.. ..•.•. ..•... ..•..• ..••.... •..••..• •••... •••..•••... 286 127 To couple...... •... ..•...• .•...•.•. •••....•. ••.•..• •••.•...... 288 128 To mount _...... •••..•.•...•••...••.••• __.• 289 128 128 ¥~el~;l~~~.~~~~~i.~~ ~.~~~.~~~ ~~~~::::::::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~g 129 To turn to the right and to the left...... •.••.••••.••. . 294 129 To reverse ..•...... •...•...... •..••.. ""'" " ". 296 129 '1'0 oblique ...... •..... _.. .•••.. ..•... •••.•••.. ••..•... 297 130 To rein back__ •...... •••• ""'" •••••.•••. .•••.. ••••..•. •.•••.• .•• 298 130 To dismount ...... •...... •..•.....••...... ••.•.•..•... , ••...••.."'" 299 1ao To file off -. __ __...... •...••. __' ....•• .. •...•.. 300 1:}0 '1'0 unharness ...... •...... •....__ ...•.....•.•...... •. ..•... .•.. 301 130 To harness and unharness in two motions 304-5 131 l\Iarchin g...... •. . •• . . •• . . •. . . •. . . . •. • . . . • .•. • . ••••••• . . . . 306 131 '1'0 break into column to the front.. .•.•.•..•. .•••.• ••. •..•.••••••• .•••••• 307 131 Change of direction in column ..••..•••..••••...... ,..... ••.• ••• 308 132 To halt the column...... •..•• ••...... •.••.. ••..•..... ••.•••.•••• 309 132 132 i:~~~\~~i~~~.~~~~~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::::::: gt~ 133 133 133 1:34 134 IH~:~~~~~~i;~~;~,L~\H:~::~~j~~~j:mjjjm~jHm~jW~HIII 134 To pa~s from the r~~r to the head of the column, and the reverse.... •••••• 320 135 TAllLE OF CO~T":'NTS.

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 1'0. Page. Genetal.principles...... ••.••••. ..••. ..•..•. ..•.•.••••••...... ••.••. 322 136

ARTICLE I.-ExERCISE OF SEVERAL Dl:TACHlIIENTS••••••.••.•••••••••.•••.•..• 137 Formation of detachments and po~ts of officers...... •.... ~ . 3~3 137 Alignment ...... •.... 3::!5 1:37 '1'0 open and close the ranks .•...... •...... •...... 326 137 To break into column to the right or left . 327 138 1\'larchin column , ...... •...•..• , ...••.... , . 3:28 138 'I'o halt the column . :330 ]38 Change of direction in column .. 331 138 To march by a flank '''hen in column . 3:l~ 1:39 Oblique march incolnmn . 334 I:J9 3:35 1:39 ~~ifo~.l~:ly~~u~~~~;l~i;~~~~.l~~~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 340 HO To advance in line . :34l 141 Oblique in line '.' ...... •... 342 141 '1'0 change direction in line " . 343 141 To march by a flank wben in line . 344 141 '1'0 change direction when faced by a flank . 347 142 Marcbing by a flank, to form column of detachments . 348 142 'I'o pass from the marcb in column to the march by flank ,. 349 142 :1\farchingby flank, to form line . 350 143 'I'o form the line or column faced in the opposite dircction . 351 143 To march to the rear . 352 143 Posting tIle detachments with their pieces...... •...... • 35:3 143 Execution of the movements at the double.quick , 354 144 }:xercise of the section and of the company ...... •...••. 355 144

ARTICLE n.-EXERCISE OF SEYERAL DETACHMENTs.-Horse artillery ...... •..... 145 Formation of detachments and posts of officcrs...... :3.36 145 To mount and to dismount...... •...... 359 145 Alignments...... 3(iO 145 '1'0 open and close the ranks...... 361 145 To break into colullln , ...... •...... 362 145 :1\1archin column...... 365 146 To halt the column...... 366 146 Change of direction in column...... 3G7 146 Oblique march in column...... 31j8 147 The colullln marching, to face it in the opposite direction...... :Jfj9 147 Being in column, to form line...... 370 147 '1'0 form line advancing , , ...... • 374 148 To advance in linft...... :37;) 149 149 ~~l~fi~;~~~~~~~ti~~'i~ ii;~;::::::~::::.::::.:::~;:::::::::::::::::::::::::g~~ 149 l\larchlllg ii'l"lllle,to march 111 the opposite dn.cchon...... :378 149 '1'0 march by file...... •..•...... :179 150 Change of direetion in file.•.. , ...... :J80 150- '1'0 halt and to movc off. ••..••...... 381 150 Ohlique in file :382 150 Changes of gait ...... •...... , ...... :J83 150 150 i;~~~~~:;~l~~~I~i~f;:.~~~::::::::::'.:::::::~:::::::::::'.:::::::::::::::::: :;~~]50 To form line...... 3SG 150 Marching by a 1Iank, to form column of detachmcnts...... :l88 151 In column of detachments, to march by file , ...... :l89 151 posting the d\1tacluncnts with their pieces...... :J9U 151

ARTICLE III.-EXEltCISE OF SEYERAL PIECES .•• -- .. 15::3 The team...... • ...... • ...... :191 152 Arrangement of the teams...... •...... •...... :192 152 '1'0 break into column. .••..•.. .••.... .•.. :Ja3 153 '1'0 change uirection in column .••.. , .••..•• ~...... •.. 394 153 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xl

No. rage. To halt the column ...•••...•...... •..•..•••.•.•••.•••..••••••••.•••. 395 153 Oblique in column ..••••••••••.••...... •.••...••.•••..••• , ...•.•...••• 396 153 To form line ...... •.. 397 154 To form line advancing ...... •••.....••.•...... ••...... 401 155 '1'0 advance in line ...... ••••••...... ••. "'" . 402 ]55 '1'0 halt ...... •...•...... 403 155 '1'0march by a flank ...... ••....•....•...•...... 405 155 OlJlique in line """ "" .•...... •...•..•...... """"'" . 406 156 To reverse ...... •..• '" ...'" ..."'" ....•.... 407 156 Changes of gait...... •...... •.. ""'" •...•...... ••... 408 156 To rest ...... ••..••...... • '" ...... •...... 409 156 '1'0file off ...... •...... •...... •...... 410 156 '{'he piece horsed ...... •...... """" •.•...•...... """" ••. 411 157 To enter the park _...... ••••.• """"'" .•.....••.•..••.. 412 157 Hitching the teams _ . 413 157 '1'0uupark ...... •.. """ ""'" ...... •...... 415 158 To halt the colullln ...... •...••...... '" 416 159 'I'o wheeL ...... •...... •.•....•..... """" 417 159 To olJlique ....•••...... ••...... •...•...... •••••.•...... •..••.. 418 159 '1'0reverse ..•...... " " ...•...... •..••..••. , ••.•...... '" . 419 159 The about ...... •..••••..••...... ••..••. 420 160 To cbange direction in column .•...... •...... •.... """ """"'" 422 160 'I'he about in column ...... •.••.•..•.•••...... •.•.•... 423 160 Changes of gait. _"""'" '" •...... •.•.... ""_'" '1'0llmrch. by a flank ...... •...... •. """ 424 161 '1'0 rest...... •...... _ . 425 161 428 162 :i:~~~~l~~~ct~~:~~l~C.i~~:~~~~~: ~~~~~: ~~ ~:~::: ~~~:: :~~~:: :: :: : :: ::~::: : : : 429 162 To dismount whilst marching _.....•...•.. 430 IG2 4:31 162 :f~:~~~~~~l~l.s.t.~l.~l~e.I~~l.~:::::::::::::::: ::::: ::::: ::::::::::::: ::::: 432 163 '1'0 unhitch ""'" """ •...•...... 433 163 To leave the park ...... •...... ••..•...•. '" .•....•••.•••• 434 164 435 164 ARTICLE IV.-THE SECTION .••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• '" """ Compositiou of the section ....• "" "" "" .•••••..•.•..••. ...•.•. ...••• 436 165 Column of pieces...... •..• .....•.. •••• ••..••.•.•••. 437 165 165 165 165 ~j~gl;:!~~;~~~~:~::~~~;";i;~;~:;~;;;;::~:~~~~~~:~~:::::~~~::::~:j~ 1136 Posts of the cannoneers during the manamvres...... •.... 444 166 '1'0 mount and dismount the cannoneet.s...... •••..• •.•...... •....•. 445 166 167 To unpark '" ...... •'" ...••" . . .•.• ...... • 449 168 450 '1'0form the section : ...... •••." ..•. , . •. . •. . . •. . . . . •...... IG8 To march and to halt...... •...... •...... •...•...•...... •• 451 ]69 Changes of gait ...... •...... """" ••..•..•.... •.••....•.. 452 169 '1'0change direction '" •'" . . . .•.. . . •. •.• •.. .• . 45:3 169 '1'0march oy a flank...... 454 170 '1'he oblique. "'" ".""" .•.••. ...•...••...... •• 455 171 The reverse "."" " '" . .• •••.. •. .. . . •. •• •.. .• . . .•• 456 171 '1'he abou1...... •• . . .. . • . • .• . . • . ••• • • . •••• •••• •• .••••••••...•••• •••• •• 457 171 '1'be countermarch...... • •..•...••..•...... •.. ..•.. 458 172 Passage of carriages...... 460 172 '1'0break the Hection - ...... •••.....•.....•.•.... """'" 461 173 '1'0form the caissonil on the flank...... 462 174 '1'0replace the caiHsonsin rear. •....••...•.•••.•••..••....•.••••.•••..•.. 463 174 174 ;:~r~~~~~~II~ei1f~~;t~;.y:::::::::: ::: :::: :::: ::::: ::::::: ::: :::: ::::: ::::::: ... ~~~ 175 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front " '" '" 465 175 In line, to form in battery to the front, by throwing the caissons to the rear 4(~6 175 In line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front...... 4ti7 176 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear...... •...••• 468 176 In linc, with eaissons in front. to form in battery to the rear...... 469 177 In battery, to form in line to the front-...... 470 177 In battery, to form in line to the rear...... •.••..•••....• 472 178 179 180 181 F#~,~i::.::;~~~~:~::~;;~~~L~~~:~:~~~::~~~:~~~~~~~~~::~~:~~:::!U 181 TA.BLE OF CONTENTS.

PART V.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. No. Page. ARTICLE I.-GENERAL PRINCIPLES...... •••••• ••••••••••• 183 Formations of the battery ...... ••...... ,. .•....••..•....••.... •••• 479 183 Remarks on the formations ...... ••. ,..... ••••• 479 185 Measures of the elements composing the battery, and of its formations..... 480 186 :l\Ianningthe battery...... •• . .• . •. .•.• .. ••• . . . •••.••• .•••.• ••.••••.• 481 186

ARTICLE Il.-MOVEl'rIENTS IN COLUMN.••••••••.••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••• 187 '1'0 unpark , , ...... ••...... •...••..•...•..... 482 187 Formations into line, and battery from column of pieces .•••.....•.....•.. 483 187 '1'0 halt ...... ••...... •....•..•••.•.....•.•...•.••..•.•...... ••.• , '" 484 188 Change of gait ...... •...... •••.•••.••...... •...... •....•. 485 188 '1'0 forin sections...... •..•...•..•...... ••..•.••.•••.•.•••• 486 188 In column of pieces, to form the caissons on the flank ••••.••.•••.••••.•.. 487 189 '1'0 march in column .... , ...... •..•••..••...... •..•....••.•.•. 488 189 '1'0 halt the column .. , ...... •.....•...••....•..•.•..••...•..••• 489 189 '1'0 chaugc thc gait ...... ••...... ••..•...••.••••.••.....•• 490 189 '1'0 march by a flank .•...... •.•....•...... •..••••..•....••• 491 190 492 190 ~~~~~~~~t~~~I:i~.g~S. i~'~~l~l~~: :: :: :::: : :::: : ::::::::::: : :: ::::::: :::::: 493 191 About in column , .....••..••...... •.....•.••...... 494 191 Countermarch in column ...... ••...... •...... •••••• 495 192 To change direction ill column ...... •.•....•....•....•.• 496 192 '1'0 diminish thc front of a column on the march ...... •...... ••• 497 192 In column, with the caissons on the flank, to replace them in front or rear .. 498 193 '1'0 form the park ...... •...... ••...... 499 193

ARTICLE IlL-TO PASS FROM THE ORDER IN COLUMN TO THE ORDER IN LI.'

ARTICLE IV.~MOVE2\IENTS IN LINE ••••••••••••••••••••••..•••••••..••••••••..• 203 '1'0 advance in linc _., •....•...... _...... 515 203 '1'0 halt the battery and align it ...... ••..•...... •...... , ...... ••.•..•• 516 203 Changes of gait .. : ,...... 517 204 '1'0 march by a flank...... •...•...... •...•..•...... ••..... 5t8 204 Oblique march ...... •.•.....•....• ,. ••...... • •.....•..• 519 204 Passage of carriages in line .••...... •...... •...••.. 520 204

About in line o ••• _.. •••• •••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••• 521 204 Countermarch in line ...... •..•.•....•...... ••. , ••..•. .•••...•..•. 522 204 To change direction in line. ..•....•... •...... •... ••. ...•... ••...•. .••• 523 204 To close intervals in line...... 525 205 About, or countermarch with diminished intervals...... 526 205 To resume intervals...... •...... •.••. ... .•..••.. ••..••. 527 206 Passage of obstacles...... 528 206

ARTICLE V.-FORMATIONS IN BATTERy .•.•••...••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 207 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front ..•....••." .. . . 529 207 In line, to form in battery to the front, by throwing the caissons to the rear. 530 207 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xiii

No. Page. In line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front ..••...... •• 5"3] 208 In line, wit.h piece~ in front, to form in battery to the i'ear ...••..•••••••••• 532 208 In line, With caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear .••..•••••..••. 533 209 In battery, to form in line to the front ..•.••...•••.•...... ••.•...•...... 534 209 In battery, to form in line to the rear ...... •...... • 535 2".;.0 In column, wHh pieces in front, to form in battery to the front ..•...... • i36 211 In column, with eai~sons in front, to form in battery to the front ....•..•••• 5:.17 2U In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear .•..••..•••.. 538 212 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear ..•...••.••• 539 212 In column, with pieces in front, to form in ba~ery to the right or left ..••.• 540 213 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the right or left ...• 541 213 In column, with pieces in front, to fovm in battery on the right or left ..•.•• 542 214 In column, with cuiss ns in front, to form in battery on the right or left .••• 543 215 To deploy the double column into battery to the front or rear .•••••••••.•. 544 215 To deploy the double column into battery to the right or left ..•..•••.•.... 545 216 To pass from the order in battery to the order in column ••••••.••••.•••••• 546 216 To march by a flank ...•••••..•..•••••••.•••.•.•••.••••••••••••••••••••• 547 216

ARTICLE VI.-FIRINGS .•.•...•••••.•••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••• 548 218 To fire by battery, half battery, section, and piece .•••.••••••....•..••..• 548 218 548 218 549 218 550 219 551 219 55'> 220 m!~~~~~~~;r~~;#;;~~ng'~.~HH.~..:...~....j.H..\H 553 221 554 221 l.RTICLE VII.-CHANGES OF FRONT IN BATTERy .••••..•••.•••.••..•••••••••••• Change of front to fire to the right, left wing forward, and the reverse ..'" 555 2-23 Change of front to fire to the left, left Wing forward, and the reverse...... 556 223 Change of front to fire to the left, left Wing to the rear, and the reverse.... 557 224 Change of front to fire to the right, left wing to the rear, and the reverse... 558 225 226 226 i~~~~~:~:~l:i~~~~~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~~~ 227 i>ARA~E FOR REVIEW AND INSPECTION. ~ev~ew of a battery .•...••.••...••..•••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••••• 561 228 eVlew of a battery in connexion with other troops .•.••••••...•••••••••• 562 229 To march in review in line or column of half batteries .•••••••••••••••. '" 563 230 Officers' salute with the sabre ••••.•••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••• 564 230 Inspection .•••••• '" . 565 230

PART VI. EVOLUTIONS OF BATTERIES.

INTRODUCTION •••••••••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2;'31 Object of the evolutions, number and kinds of batteries, &c...... 566 231 Designation of batteries ..•..•...•""" .••..•.• .•.•.. ..•.•. .•••.. .•••••. 567 232 Guides. ..•.• ...•.. .•••.. ..•..• .••. ••.• ••. ••••. ..••.• •••..•••.•. •••. •••• 568 23;:) Alignments .••..•..•... ""'" "'" .••••• ..••.•. .••.• ...•.. .••••. .•...•• 569 232 Commands ...... •...... •..•....•.. 570 233 D~~nitions. an~,principles of the" School of the Battery," applicable to the EvolutIOns ...... •...... •...... •...•• 571 233 Movements described for one flank may be executed by the other.'" ...••• 572 233 Order in column ...... ••...••...... •...••. ""'" ••. 573 233 Orders in line and in battery...... •.• ...•.. ...•.. .•••.•.••••.. ••..••. 574 234

CHAPTER I.-THE lIIARCH IN COLUlIIN•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••... 235 '1'0 march the column to the front. ..••. .•••• ••••.•••. •••••. ••. ••.• . • .. •.. 575 235 '1'0 halt the columll. .•••• .•..•.• •••. .•.•..•• ••.•... ••••.••..• •..••. 576 235 235 236 236 237 I~~~;~~:;~~~~~m~~~~~~i~~~~m~~~~i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~H~~ ~l237 xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS.

No. Page. Countermarch ...... •...... ••...•...... 582 231 Change of direction ...... •..•.•...... •...... •...... 583 231 General remark-the preceding movements may be executed by a close column ...... •...•...... 584 238 To pass from the order in column by section to the order by battery, (close column) ...... •...... 585 2,18 To pass from the order in close column to the column by section . 586 2~~9 Change of direction of the close column by a simultaneous movement ..••. 587 240

CHAPTEll II.-'1'o PASS FRO:lI THE ORDER IN COLU:lIN TO THE ORDER IN LINE, AND THE llEVJ<:l~SE. ••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••.•••••• To pass from the order in column to the order in line...... •.• ...... 588 ~~~ '1'0 form faced to the rear into line...... •. •.. . .. • . . . 589 243 '1'0 form to the left (or right) into line...... •...... •••.. .•...... 590 243 '1'0 form on the right (or left) into line...... 591 243 '1'0 form to the left (or right) and forward into line...... 592 244 '1'0 form to the left (or ['ight,) and faced to the rear, into line...... 593 244 To form forward into line on a line pas;:ed by the head of the column...... 594 245 '1'0 form, faeed to the rear, on a line passed by the head of the column. .•.. 595 245 To deploy the close column forward into line in advance of its front...... 596 246 '1'0 deploy the close column forward into line on one of the batteries which stands fast _ "._. __ 597 247 '1'0 deploy the close column in march without halting it . .. .•.. 598 248 '1'0 dcploy the close column, faced to the rear, into line" .. ,'" ...... 599 248 To dcploy the dose column to the left (01' right) into line_...... 600 248 '1'0 deploy the dose column on the left (or right) into line...... 601 249 1'0 pass from the order in line to the order in colulIm ...... ••....••.... , .•..•• 249 '1'0 form column by section to the right or left_...... •...... 602 249 '1'0 form column by section in front or rear of the line. . .. 603 250 '1'0 break by section to the front, from one wing, to march towards the other _ 604 250 To break by seetiou to the rem', from.one wing, to march towards the other 605 250 '1'0 form close column faced to the :right (or left)...... 606 250 To form close column from a halt without a change of front...... 607 251 To form close column when in march without a change of front...... 608 252

253 C~~:~~~'l~~~.;l\l~~~~.~.~~.~~~~:::::: :::::: ::::::: ::::: ::::::: ::: :::::::: ... 609 253 To halt and to align the batteries .•....'" ••••..• .•. •••.••...... ••...•.. 610 253 Changes of gait...... ••.••• ...•.•.••..• •.. •••..•...•.. 611 253 '1'0 march by a flank...... •... .•..•..••...... •...•...... 612 254 Oblique march...... •.....••...... •...••....•..•. ...•••.•..•••..•....•• 613 2."".>4 P:lssage of carriages...... • . . ••••• ...... ••• .••. . •. .•. . . . .•. . . . 614 254 About ...... •...... ••.....•..••.••••...••...... ••..••..••..••. ,'" 615 255 Countermarch ...••.. ..•.. ..•.•. .•.•.. .••••. .•• ..••.•...•...•..... 616 255 '1'0 close intervals...... ••.. ••..••..•• .•••...... •... 617 255 :Movements with closed intervals...... •...... •...... 618- 256 '1'0 resume intervals...... ••.. . . 619 256 Formation and deployment of two pamllel columns. .•...... 620 256 Formation and deployment of four parallel columns...... 621 251 Passage of obstacles and of defiles ...... •....•.•....•••••...... •.. , 622 258 Change~f front of the line of ...•..•. •..•. .•...... •...... 623 258

CHAPTER IV.-:FORMATIONS IN BATTERy ••••..••••••••••••••••..•••.•••••••••. 25~1 Hemarks on the formations into battery...... • ••... 624 259 1'0 pass from the OJ'derin line to the order in battery, and the reverse .••...... 259 '1'0 form forward into battery 0...... 0...... 625 259 '1'0 form to the rear into battery. 0.. .. .•.••• .•.• •. . •. .. .• . .• . 626 260 In battery, to form forward into line -...... ••.... . 627 2GO

In battery, to form to the rear into line 0 •••• •• • •••••• • • • •••• •• 628 261

To pass from the order in column to the order in batte/.yo .... 0 •••••••••••••••••• O' 261 '1'0 form forward into battery_ .... "'" ...... •...... •..... 0... 629 261 To form, faced to ,the re~r, in!o batte~ , " o. •. . . 6:10 To form to the left (or nght) mto bat,ery...... 631 ~~ To form on the left (or right) into battery-- ...... 632 263 To form to the left (or right) and forward into battery...... 633 203 To form to the right (or left) and faced to the real' into battery...... 634 264 To form forward into batt~ry on a line which has been passed by the head of the column...... •.•.. ••.••. •••••. ••. ••• ••...•.••..••. .••••.. 635 26IJ TABLE OF CONTENTS. xv

)To. Page. To fol'lll, faced to the rear, into battery, on a line passed by the head of cOlumn.....•...... ••..•...••...... _..•. 636 265 To deploy the clos6 column forward into battery, in advance of its front. To deploy the close column, laced to the rear, IltO battery, in advance of 637 266 its front ...•...... •...... _. .. • .•.•.....•...•...... • 638 267 To deploy the elose column, pieces in front, forward into battery, in line with one of the batteries which ,tands fast .._...... ••...... To deploy the close column, cojssons in front, faced to the rear, into bat. 639 267 tery, in line with one of the batteries which stands fast .._ ....••...... '1'0 deploy the close column to the left. (or right) into battery ...•...... • 640 268 To deploy the close column on the left (or right) into battery ..•...... • 641 269 DBployment of' two parallel columns forward, or faced to the rear, into 642 270 battery . Deployment of four parallel columns forward, or faced to the rear, into 643 270 battery "' ...... ••••••..•...... ' . To pass from the order in battery to the order in column .." .....•..•... 644 2il Being in battery, to march by a flank .....•' ..••..••..•••....•...•.•.•. 645 271 646 271 CHAPTER V.-EXECUTION OF THE FIRINGS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 273 273 ~~~~~~E~;~~~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: Ei 273 Note on commands, and on two modes of' limbering ..••.••.' •.•••..•...... 273 '1'0 fire in retreat •.•••...... " ...... • ...... •.. • . .• . . . . •• ...... 650 273 To fire to the real' •••••...... '.' • . . 651 274 Changes of front in battery._ Changes of front on the wings ...... •.•.• 275 Change of front on the right Wing, to "fire to the right, left Wing forward, 275 and the reverse...... 652 Change of front on the right Wing, to fire to the left, left Wing forward, 275 and the reV'.lrse -" -- " _...... • . . . 653 Change of front on the right Wing, to fire to the right, left wing to the 276 rear, and the reverse - '...... 654 Change of' front on the right Wing to fire to the left, left Wing to the rear, 276 antI the reverse " .•...•...• '. . . . 655 Changes of front on a central battery...... • ".' ...••...••..•....••.... 277 Remarks on the central changes of front...... • ..••.... . 656 277 Change of front on the centre to fire to the right, left Wing forward, and 277 the reverSe - " ...... •..•.... ". 657 Change of fron t on the centre to fire to the right, left Wing to the rear, and 278 Pas:~/~TJ;fil~~:::::::::::::::::::: :: :::: ::: :::: :::: ::::::: :::: ::: :: ::... ~~~ 278 To pass a defile in front...... 659 279 Note on positions of batteries after the passage." .....•..••..••...•... "'.". 279 To pass a defile in rear ".'... .•...... •.. ••..••. 660 279 280 A;~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~.a.~~.~e.v.i~~.S.:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::... 66i 280 For reviews ..•.....•.•••..••..••..•• ".' ...•••.• "., •••.•••.•.•..•'" 662 280 280 Extract from the report of the commission of French officers ~ho prepared the "Reglement sur les }Ianoouvres et lea Evolutions des ~atterieB Attelees" •••••• 281 LIST OF PLATES.

No. 1. Sabots. 2. Ammunition chests. 3. 1st plan of encampment for a mounted battery. 4. 2d plan of encampment for a mounted battery. 5. Column of platoons. 6. Field 6-pounder gun, (bronze.) 7. Field 24-pounder , (bronze.) 8 to 17. Field carriages. 18. Nomenclature of the harness. 19 to 21. Cannoneers mounted. 22. To monnt and dismount in two ranks; to march In double fillllit 23. School of the driver. 24. Explanation of the signs in the plates. 25. Passage of carriages. 26. Countermarch; left about. 27. Order in column. 28. Ord~r in line. 29. Order in battery. 30. To form and break sections. 31 and 32. To march to the left flank. 33 and :14. The oblique march. 35. Change of direction to the left. 36. Forward into line. 37. Into line faced to the rear. 38. To the left into line. 39. On the right into line. 40. '1'0 break into column to the front. 41. To break into column to the left~ 42. To break from the right to march to the lait.. 43. To form double column on the centre section. 44. To deploy the double column into line to the front. 45 and 46. To march by a flank. 47 aud 48. Oblique march. 49. '1'0 change direction in line. 50. To close intervals. 51. To resume intervals. 52. In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front. 52. In line, with caissons in front, to form in buttery to the front. 53. In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear.

53. In line, with C8~SSO:lS in front, to form in battery to the rear. ii xviii LIST OF PLATES.

No. 54. In ba~tery, to form forward into line, with pieces or caissons in front, by limberilll to the rear. 55. In battery, to form in line to the rear, with caissons or pieces in front. 56. In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front. 57. In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front. 58. In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear. 59. In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear. h1 60. In column, with pieees in front, to form in battery to the left, gaining ground to the rig 61. In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the left, gaining ground to the le£1 62. In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the right, gaining ground to the lef 63. In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the left, gaining ground to therigh 64. In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the left, gaining ground to the lef 65. In column, with cais'ns in front, to form in battery to the right, gaining ground to the righ 66 and 67. '1'0 march by a flank. 68. '1'0 fire advancing by half battery. 69. '1'0 fire retiring by half battery. 70. Movements for firing in echelon. 71. To fire to the rear. 72. Change of front to fire to the right, left wing forward, and the reverse. 73. Change of front to fire to the left, left wing forward, and the reverse. 74. Change of front to fire to the left, left wing to the rear, and the reverse. 75. Change of front to fire to the right, left wing to the rear, and the reverB&. 76. To pass a defile in front. 77. To pass a defile in rear. 78 and 79. Parade for review and inspection of a battery. 80. Knots.

BUGLE SIGNALS. Plates Nos. 81 to 89- 1. March for review. 21. To horse. 2. Walk. 22. Assembly. 3. Trot. 23. The reveille. 4. Gallop. 24. Stable eall. 25. 'Watering eall. 5. Halt. 6. Forward. 26. Breakfast. Head of column to the right. 27. Assembly of bnglen1., QIJ Head of column to the left. 28. Assembly of guard. 9. Right oblique. 29. Fatigue eall. 10. Left. oblique. 30. Drill call. 11. About. 31. Dinner calL 12. Countermarch. 32. Sick call. 13. Drivers mount. 33. Tattoo. 14. Drivers dismount. 34. Retreat. 15. Cannoneers mount. 35. By the right flank. 16. In battery. 36. By the left flank. 17. Commence firing. 37. Cannoneers dismount. 18. Cease firing. 38. Recall. 19. Boots and saddles. 39. First sergeant's call. ~O. The general. LIST OF PLATES. No. 90. Order In column. 91. Orders in line and in battery. 92. '£0 pass froin the order in column by section to the order by battery, (close column.) 'lQ. To pass from the order in close colum.n to the column by 8ertion.

(J. Change of direction of the close column by a simultaneous movement. 93. To pass from the order in column to the order in line. 94. 'ro form to the left (or right) and forward, into line. 95. To form to the left (or right) and fuced to the rear, into line. 96. To form forward into line, on a line passed by the head of the column. 97. '1'0 form faced to the rear, on a line passed by the head of the column. 98. '1'0 deploy the close column forward into line in advance of its front. 98. To deploy the closc column forward into line on one of the batteries which stands fast. 99. To deploy the close column to the left (or right) into line. 99. '1'0 deploy the close column on the left (or right) into line. 100. TC!form close column from a halt Without a change of front. 100'1'0 form close column when in lllarch without a change of front. 101. To close intervals. 101 To resume intervals. 102. '1'0 form forward into battery. 10::1.To form faced to the rear into battery. 104 and 105. '1'0 form to the left (or right) and forward into battery. lOG and 107. To form to the right (or left) and faced to the rear into battery. 108 and 109. To form forward into battery on a line which has been passed by the head of the column.

and 111. To form, faced to the rear, into battery on a line passed by the head of no colulllll.

11~. To deploy the close column forWllrd into battery in advance of its front. 113. To deploy the close COlumn, faced to the rear, into battery, in advance of its front. 114. 'I'o deploy the closo column, pieces in front, forward into battery, in line with one of the batteries which stands fast. 114. To deploy the close colulllll, caissons in front, faced to the rear, into battery, in line with one of the batteries which stands fast. 115 and lIe. 'I'o deploy the close column to the left (or right) into baHery. ]J 7. Cllange of front on the right Wing to fire to the right, left Wing forward, and the reverse . .8. Change of frout on the right Wing to fire to the left, left wing forward, and the reverse. 119. Change of front ou the right Wing to fire to the right, left Wing to the rear, and the rever8'\.

120. Change of front on the right Wing to fire to the left, left Wing to the rear, and the reverse.

121. Change of front on the centre to fire to the right, left Wing forward, and the reverse. 122, Change of front on the centre to fire to the right, left wing to the rear, and the reverse. FOR FIELD AIlTILLERY.

P-,-~RT I.

ORGANIZATION, MATERIEL, AND SERVICE.

ARTIOLE FIRST.

ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES. LEThe troops of the artillery are divided into two kinds, vi~: POOl' ARTIL- ';V and LIGHT or FIELD AUTILLERY... . an 10 the FOOT ARTILLERY Lelong-s the serVIce of , sea-coast, garnson, 1,lllonnt<,tin artillery, rocket batteries, and the artillery duties of the purk. (!! 0 the FIELD AllTILLERY LclOlWS the service of tlte battcries which mall- lI~vre with the troops on the field :if battle. It is divided into two parts- c' ItSE ARTILLERY, which is generally attached to and mano:;uvres with L~~a~ry, t~e ca.nnoneers being mounted on horsebackj and M.oux:rr:D AItTII,- canl):, WhICh IS g'?nerally atta~llCd to and. ma~amvres WIth mfantry, the InOlno!.leers marchmg at the SIdes of thmr plOces, or, ..,hell necessary, Tlntlllg: the ammunition chests. ill he ARTILLERY HESERVES are composed of horse and mounted batteries {,ueh p~'oportions as t.he nat~ue of the s~rvice requi.re.s., iuf. he SClVIce of battenes assIgned to brwades or dnrlslons of and th ~tll.tryis special, and, to a great extent,'" subordinate to the ~pcrations of i.~c,tIoops to which they are attached as auxiliaries. The artlllcr!) l'CSCITe 1t1'1 cOfJ;lIlanded by a superior officer of artillery, and constitutes a distinct 'i~lof battle, under the immediate orders of the general COmllH1l1ding. 1 Scrvi : e;nploym,ent of: field artillery, a~cording to the v:triolls conditions of to t ,ee, IS a subject of such cxtcnt and Importance as precludes any attoll'pt op ,~el~t of it in this work. It varies with the nature of tho theatro (If fOI:I~t1(\ns, the character of the enemy's defences, the composition or his tltec~~,~':hcther cOllsi~til)g Of, troops of a. si~g'~e m:m or of. combinations o! of th l~e,lent an~s, :.r.(~nC<;Ol:c1mg to, tho (hF~Tl!rt"" rust~'l,lCtlOn, andnumbl ;,s tion e t,IOOpSWIth whIch It IS aSSOCIated. Hum compOSItIOn, and the pn~l'()J S of the different arms. 2 ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES.

FIELD ARTILLERY. Fiela artillery is used to attack and defend the worles of temporary ; to destroy or demolish material obstacles and means of cover, an(~ thus prepare the way for the success of other arms; to act upon the field of battle; to break 9,n cncmy's line or prevent him from forming; to crush his masses; to dismount his batteries; to follow and support in a pursuit, and to cover and protect a retreat. The e.ffcct of field artillery is generally in proportion to the COllcelltrati01l of its fire. It has, therefore, for its object, not to strilw down a few isolated men, and here and there to dismount a gun, but, by a combined and con- centrated fire, to destroy an enemy's cover; to break up his squares and columns; to open his ranks; to arrest his attacks, and to support those which may be directed against him. MOBILITY being a prime consideration, both upon the march and on the field of battle, the /-?;llllS and carriages arc made as light as is compatible with strength and the nature of the service they are required to perform. PIEcEs.-The calibre and description of the pieces now in use in the ser- v:icc of the United States are the 6-poun,1er and 12-pounder gun, the 12--pounder, 24-pounder, and 32-pounder howitzer, and the 12-pounder light gun, or, as it is sometimes called, gun-howitzer. * These are assembled ill batteries of six or eight pieces on the war establishment, of which four or six are guns and two are , and of four pieces on the peace estab- lishment, of whIch three are guns and one a howitzer. t The 12-pounder guns and 24-poumler or 32-pounder howitzers are associated together in the same batteries, which arc called 12-pounder batteries, and the 6-poundef guns and 12-pounder howitzers are associated together in like manner, and called 6-poulld~r batteries. The 12-pounder light guns are assembled in but- teries by themselVes. CARRIAGEs.-Each piece is mounted on a carriage adapted both to the service of the gun ancl its transportation. Other carriages, called caissonS, eonstructed for the transport of the ammunition, are attached to batteries tit the rate of one to each piece in 6-pounder batteries, and two to each piecO in 12-pounder batteries. Besides these carriages, a travelling forge, witb smiths' and armorers' and stores, for shoeing and ordinary repairs, ano a battery wagon for stores, materiel, and the tools of the carriage-make!'" wheelwright, saddler, and harness-maker, form parts of the battery. Othel battery wagons, forges, spare gun-carriages, &c., requirecl fur more extensh'e and rapid repairs, and to replace injured carriages, accompany the gener~l parle. If"tllbre is no park, they should accompany the battery whenever )t takes the field. Th1J'battery of man(J)uvre consists of the pieces belonging to the field but- tery, with an equal number of caissons, all properly equipped, horsed, allo eS manned. Each caisson is permanently attached to a piece, ano. munceuvr with it. ------'" * This gun has now entirely superseded the old l:J-pounder. Rifled field guns of sever~: varieties, but principally the lO-pounder Parrott and 3-inch ordnance gun, are now in 11'<

in the United States service. llt ! j On the war estabUshment it is now deemed preferable for all the guns of each" '11WU [,. batteryI" to be of unilorm calibre. In horse artillery it is occasionally advisable for t II batter ies to be of mixed calibre, since these batteries act more frequently independentlY 0 other batteries. ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES. 3 HORSES -0 th. h carl'iuO' . . n. e war establIshment, or when ordered to mard] , eae On tl°e of the 6-pounder and 12-pounder batteries is drawn by six horses. \Vh{.~el~eace establishment, in garrison, four horses only are required. cais.;on .~poundcr batteries are in the field or on the road, each piece and six 110' of the battery of manamvre requires eio-ht horses, the other carriages p ISCS cach. * '" illCh~U~ONNEL.-The number of men required for the service of a battery, thirty p g ~on.commissioned officers and artificers, varies from tlCCllty to shou'd er PlCce, according to circumstances. The number for field service shouid tev~r be. less than twenty-five, even in 6-pounder batteries. They live feet e lUte!hgent, active, muscular, well-developed, and not less than 'I'he seven lU~hes high; a large proportion should be mechanics. of piec nU?lber ot officers varies horn four to six, depending on the number es In the battery.

PROPORTION OF FIELD ARTILLERY TO OTHER AR:lIS. 'rhe prop t' the liUl't trIon of field artillery to other arms varies generally between 0 the chu 1.•S. 1 ~nd 4 pieces to ], OUO men, according to the torce of the army, of the Iacter of the troops of which it is composed, the force and character emy war arc:t , the nature of the country which is to be the theatre of the l'eO'~Iat1 t~Ie character and object of tIle war. Similar considerations lIlust (litlere~ }..e selection of the kinds of ordnance, and the proportions of the 'rh .n \.lI1ds. e value l' f' '11' . f as the t. . an~ Importance a an efficzent arb cry Increases III propor IOn lo11oWi~~oP~w~th which it serves are ~mdiscipline(! and uni~structed. '1'1:e nary c.. o PllncIples may be observed In the Amencan serVIce, under on11- ncumstanc{Js:

P' jl f h' I~ :}are 12-pounders. leces to 1,000 m i "guns, 0 W Ie 1._ ...... { tare (i.pounders. en...... ~ t arc 24-pounders or 32.p'ders.

------"'l'hls retl of 1857. era to 12.pounders of the old model, and not to the light 12.pounder, (mode ORGANIZATION OF FIELD UATTElUES.

ARTICLE SECOND.

ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENT OF FIELD DATTERJES_

There are three distinct organizations for field batteries: 1. The peace organization, or that FOR INSTRUCTION simply. 2. That for the march, or of PREPARATION FOR SERVICE • . 3. 'fLat of WAR. The first organization-that for instruction-requires that the bat tery of mallCEItVre only, consisting of four pieces, with their caissons, should be horsed. As tLe moYements are executed with empty ammunition chests. the- number of horses, and especial1y in the 6-pounder lH1tteries, may be limited to four for each carriage. The battery wagon and forge, although not horsed, should be at all times .with the battery, and provided with the stores and tools for service. The additional guns and caissons, with their equipmcnts and harness, to complete tlle battery to the war establishment, should be kept with it, or in store ready for issue. The second organization-that of preparation for service-requires that the battery of mana.mvre, and also the forge and battery .wagon, should bo l;.ept fully horsed, manned, and equipped. As the ammunition and stores must be transported, the carriages require six honws each, and the artificers, . as well as the chiefs of pieces and buglers, shoulll be mounted. On the in- land frontiers, or at interior stations, where batteries, when put in motion. mllst take the road, they should be kept on this organization. The third organization requires that the full battery of six or eight pieces should be equipped in all respects for Wtw. vVhen there is no reserye park with tho troops, the additional hattery wagon, forge, and other carriage'S which usually accompany it, with their stores and supplies, and the full campaign allowance of ammunition, should accompany the battery, nnllor charge of its commanders.

ORGANIZATION OF A SIX-POUNDER l\WUNTED BATTERY.

I:'o'STIWCTION. I'REI'ATtATIO". 'VATt. 4 pieecs. 4 pieces. G pieces. ----,---1 I Iii J! ~ \8~. ~ ~o ~II~~ ~o ~ ~ Captain 1 , .••. ~=II 1 ...... •. Lientenants 3~~ ~~ .... ~ ..... ~. "~_" 4 ... , .. '."1 Commanding section .• ., __ :!., and caisHons. Staffscrgeants.. .••. .... 2 2 Fir8tsel'!~ellntandquar terl111lstersergeaut.

Scrgeants...... 4 \ 4 .••.1 4 4 G 6 ChiefsofpiPces. Corporais , 8 1 8 ••.. 12 Gunners and chiefs () 1 caissons. Artificers...... 2...... 4 4 \.... 6 6 lluglcrs _ ~. 2 2 () \ 0 0 'l 60 Drivers , ...... 24 32 ....I 40 '1 .... 52 84 ~~:::!;n'''~:::1~I..:;I:: .::. ~:l~:~I" ~;~. \,':~~'.

J ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERlES. 5

In ba,ttoTies of horse artillery, two men and hvelve horses per picce (oue horse spare) are required in addition to the numbers given in the table. When batteries are ordered on service on the plains, the number of spare draught horses should be increased to one pair for each carriage.

COMPOSITION AND EQUIPMENT OF A BATTERY FOR WAn. , The llAT'l'ERY is supposed to consist of six pieces. In batteries of eight plCC?S there are two additional guns. \\'ith the materiel required for their servIce.

12.ptlr. jl:3'Pelr.I 6.pel!'. battery. (light.)i uattery. - J, , t _

r ~12.pounder, mounted...... 41 1 . ,,j IGuns. . 12.pounder, (light,) mounted - 6 1- . ~ a.pounder, mounted _.. _ :_ _ ::: How't i24.pounder, mounted...... 2 I __ i •••••••• !J ' ::t:l~~m::::;:~::~mo.uut'.:::::::::. _~;i ; : ::~

fl \ Caisso~ for gnns , 1 . 8 I 1;) I 4 ::;:I ns ( for howitzers " 4 - 2 .~ TotalnumlYer of caissons...... 12 1= 12 i= ~

A; TRAVELLING FOIWE .. _...... 1 I 1I.' 1 llATTEIlY W AGOl' . • •• 1 1 1 l Whole number of carriages __ :20 "I . 20 !~-=14

~ jr Guns {~~f~-ri~;i~~~~ :.~~ :::: :::~:::::: gg~,- ~~1-'~~g Z .•...... Shells .. _ _ 1118 ;:; Canisters -- _ 112 I 168 80 ~I {SPhericalcase __ 112 ]60 .E3 HOWitzers. Shells...... 168 " 120 ~ Canisters __ 42 ~~I_ 32 ~ Total number of rounds with a battery ..•-" 1,218 I 1,344 I J, 112

:For ~wo 32-pounrler howitzer carriages, and four~ SPhe.,ricalcase _...... 8~ eiLIgsons,the number of rounds of ammunition Shells _ _...... 112 WOuldbe-- - - _.. .. . Cunioters _ _...... 14

Total. _...... 210 'rhe number of fi-iction primers is fifty per cent. greater than the number Of rOl~nds furnished the battBry. To provide for contillgeneies, a small sup- p y ot port-fires and slow-match is also furnished with the ammunition . .1'he, campaign allowance of ammunition is double what has beon here P~escl'lbed, or about 400 rounds per piece, of which about 200 rounds per PIece Uceompany the battery, the remainder being with the reSClTe parks.

FIELD-PIECES. b ~he pieces are cast in bronze or gun-metal, and are much less liable to III st than those made of iron. P .~RO:NZE for cannon (commonly called llHASS) consists of 90 parts of cop- 1 el aU,d 10 of tin, allowing' a variation of 1 part of tin, more or less. It is ~,ore ,fusible than copper-much less so ~han tin; is harder, less susceptible ~) 0:c~dation, and much less ductile than either of its components. The I celtic gravity of bronze is about 8.70, being greater than the n1C'unof the ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. 6 specific grn:vitics of copper and tin; th.a~of iron is about 7.25. The TENACITY of bronze IS also greater than that of Iron. The external forms of the pieces, and their nomenclature, are shown in plates 6 and 7. The howitzers only are chambered; the 6-pounder gun and 12-pounder howitzer have no handles. The PREPONDERANCE is the excess of the weight of the piece in rear of the trunnions over that in front; it is measured by the lifting power, in pounds, ,,-Inch must be applied at the rear of the base ring, to balance the gun when suspended freely on the axis of the trunnions. The TRUE WINDAGE is the difference between the diameters of the bore and of the hall. * PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS OF FIELD-PIECES.

GUNS. HOWITZERS.

. \ Light 12-pdI. 12-pdr. 6-pdr. 32'Pdr.\24'Pdr. 12'pdr.

Inelles. Inelles. Inches. Iuehes. Inches. Inches. 5.82 4.62 Diameter of ihe bore .....•...... 4.62 4.62 3.67 6.4 0.10 0.10 0.09 0.15 0.14 0.10 True windage ..••...... - ..... 46.25 74 6:J.G 57.5 G4 56.25 Length of bore, (exclusive of chamber) 9.61j 10 in diameters ...... 16 13.76 15. G7 10 I ..englh of bore ...... 4. G2 4.62 3. G7 Diameter of the chamber ...... 4.75 4.25 Length of thc chamber ....._ ...... 7 Length from rear of ba~e ring to facc 7;3 65 53 of llluzzl e .... - . - ...... 78 66 GO 85 n15 65.6 82 71. 2 58.6 'Vhole length of the piece .. -" ... -' 6 5 Semidiameter of the base ring ...- .. 6.5 5.5 5.15 6.9 swell of the Semidiameter of the 4.875 4.1 muzzle ...- .- ...... -.- .... -" 5.17 4.25 4.125 5.6 Distance between these two semi. 76.3 6.3 58.7 74.75 64.8 52.85 diameters ..- ...... 1° Natural angle of sight ...... 1° 1e6' 1° 1° 1° Distance from rear of base ring to 30.7 25.4 23.25 30.7 27.5 23.25 real' of trunnions ...... _. --._ .. , 1:J.8 12 Diameter of the base ring .. - .... - .. ]9 11 10.3 13.8 11. 5 9.5 12. 11. 5 9.5 Distance between the rim bases .... 12 2.8 3.5 3.25 2.8 3.5 3.25 Length of the trunnions ..._ ....-_ .. 4.2 3.67 Diameter of the trunnions.--_ ...... 4.62 4.2 3.67 4.62 Distance from axis of trunnions to 38.5 34.91 41.99 35.4 27.91 face of muzzle- ...._ ...... 44.99 7St; ...... _ ... pounds .. 1,757 1,227 884 1,920 1,318 .Weight ... , -- 112 M Preponderance ..._ ...... pounds. - 60 123.5 33 125

A)-IMUNITION.

GUNPOWDER. is composed of nitre, (saltpetre,) charcoal, and sulphur, tho proportion of the ingredients and the size of the grain yaryino- with the useS

for whieh it is destined. t> P~wder for the military s~rvice is composed of 75 or 76 parts, by weig-ht, of mtre, to 15 or 14 parts of charcoal, and 10 of sulphur. It is blazed, ill order to enab~ it to resist the effects of shaldng in transportation, and of

* The diameter of bore of the 10-pounder Parrott is 2.9 inches, and of the ordnance gun, 3 inches. 'I'he weight of these guns is about 900 pounds each. Tile former is of eust iron. with a wrought reinforce; tile latter is of wrought iron. ORGANIZATION 01" FIELlJ UATTEIUI~S. 7 exposure to the moisture of the air. For sporting purposes there arc twc lJl1l:tsIllOre of nitre, and two parts less of charcoal. Gunpowder Imrns at a temperature of hom 57;j0 to 6000 }'ahrenhoit. If 1llade of pure materials, well g'lazed, and kept in proper casks in 11 dry lllagazine, it absorLs less than 1 per cent. of moisture in from ten to tifteen years. If ti'eely exposed to air saturated with moisture, it will absorb :2 per cent. or more in twenty-four hours.

DENSITY OF GUNPOWDER.

Specific , No. of grains I'weight of 1 cuoic foot. )'Cuoicillches Size of grain. gTavity. of pow

PROOF OF GUNPOWDER. The FORCE of gunpowder is ascertained by means of the c~mnonpendulzun and the pendulum. The apparatus shows the ini- tUtl yclocity of a ball fired fi'om a cannon or a musket with the ordinary serVIce ehargc. ~N PROVING CANNON POWDER, the initial velocity of a ball of medium WOIght and windage, with a charge of one.fourth its woight of powder, should be: Prom a 24-ponnder garrison gun, not less than ],600 feet. Prom a 12-poundcr field gun, not less than 1,550 feet. Prom a 6-pounder field gun, not less than 1,500 feet . .IN PROVING SMALL-ARM POWDER, the initial velocity of a musket ball, WIth a charge of 120 grains, should be: \Vith musket powder, not less than 1,500 feet. \Vith powder, not less than ],6UO feet. \Vith fine sporting powder, not less than 1,800 feet.

* CHARGES 't>F POWDER.

}o'Olt GUNS. I FOn. HOWITZEItS. KIND. ------.-----~------______12.pdrs. 6-pdrs.. 32'Pdrs.!.-:4'Pdrs.12'Pdrs. 1 l' Pounds. Pounds. Pounds. Pounds. i Pounds. ;:: m:rfi~:i~;::~;;,:d~L~~~:~Iy} ~g -~ f I !TI.: ~-: or shells 5 J:lrge c!w,rge "";":'-- - 3.25 I 2.5 1 -- . { ilxed ...... ~. J_ _. .. _...... •...... 1 ------_.:...... _----_--!'---_--!~------_ The same ammunition is Doeufor the 12'poulHler and light J;:.pounder gUl\~. th" ~'he charge of powder for the 10.pounder Parrott and 3-inch gnn is one pounu; fOI e ~O'pouDder Parrott, two pounds. 8 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES.

The charges are contained in CARTRIDGE BAGS, made of woollen material free from allY mixture of cotton, and of sufficiently close texture to prevent the powder hOUl sifting through.

PROJECTILES. (Plate 1.) There are four kinds of llrojectiles used in field service, viz: the SOLID SlIOT, the CANISTElt, the , and the CASE SIlO'l'. The projectile is attached to a block of wood called a SABOT. For the guus and the l:!-pounder howitzer, the cartridge and the projectile are attaehed to the same sabot, making together a 1'OUII([ of fixed ammunition. 1.'or :32-pounder amI 24-pollnder lJOwitzers, the projectile is separate from the charge, and the cartridge is attaclwd to a block of wood caJletI a cartridge bloc!.:.;; . The SOLID SHOT is spherical, and its ,,'eight 'in ponntIs is used to designate the calibre of the gun to whicll it belongs. . The CASISTER consists of a tin cylimler, attached to It sabot and filled with cast-iron shot. These shot vary in diameter, autI of course ill weight, with the calibre and description of the piece. Canisters for gnns contain '27 shots each; those for howit;t,cn; contain 48 shots cacll. They are pac-h.ed in sawdust ill fom tiers; the lower tier rests on a rolled iron plate, \yhich is IJlaced on the sabot, and the callister is closed with a sheet-iron cover. The canister takes its lksigllation from that of the piece for which it is prepared. The SHELL is [l, holluw shot, with such thickness of metal as cnables it to pelletrate earthworks, \yooden buildings, &c., without breaking-. For service it is charo'ed with powder, and bursts with gTeat force. Fire is COlll- b lllunicated to the charge by means of a FUZE, inserted in the holo through ",hid1 the powder is introduced, the til1le of tIle explosion being reg-ulatmi by the preparation of the fu;t,~. The shell is desigl1uted by the weight of the solid sLot of the sallie diameter.

CIIA RGlNG SHELLS.

I 12-pOllUdcr. Charges .. 32-pdr. 24-pdr. 1----,---- GUll. Howitzer. ------.------.I--lb-.-o-:.-I~I~~I Powtlcr reqniretl {~'~/~~l~~~~~b~ll~l:gl;::::::::i g ~ 19 g ~ g ~ ------!title or musket powder is used in preference to cannon powuer.

The srmAPXELL or CASE SHOT is a hollow cast-iron shot forming a case which i:; filled with musket balls. Melted sulphur or resiu is poured ill to fill IIp tllC interstice:> amI secure the balls in their positions. After this is sulidified, a portioll of the contents is bored out and the vacant cylindrical space filleli with powder, the amount of the charge beil1g only sufficient to rupture the case, ,Yhich has less thiclmess of metal than the shell, amI to disperse the cOlltellts. Fire is cOllllllunicated to the charge by the llle~HlS elllploycli tor exploding the shell. The shmpllell shot, so called frOIll tho llllllle of its inventor, an ofricer of tllC British artillery, produces the sallie effect as the canister, amI can be used for much greater distances. It takes i[s desigl1al iOll hom that of the piece.

• The ammunition for rifled guns is not" fixed," and the projectiles do not have a sabot. ORGA:NIZATlO:N OF FIELD BATTERIES. 9

CHARGES FOR SPHERICAL CASE SHOT.

32-pdr. 24-pdr.

FUZE. *

(Plate 1.) The BORIHAUN FUZE (so called from the name of its inventor, ~n offic~r of the I.3elgia~ ~rti.rlery) is .the only kinc~ at present nsed_ir~ tho l~ld artJIlery serVIce. '1Ills fuze IS a CIrcular metallIc dISC, auout. 1 u mch ~lHtll1eter,and~ an inch thick. On tllG extorior are several turns of [I, stout ,1J:ead, which enaules the disc to ue screwed into the shell. Tho composition fillIng. (mealed powder) is compressed into a eircu1ar groove near to QlHl

ConCentricI1IU with the circumference of the disc. The end of the composition ;? lUnicates Uj' a canal with a smullmugazine in the centre of the l1isc. lhe magazine is filleu 'with powder, anu sJightiy closed on the lower side so as to yield in that direction to the explosion. The composition is securely protected fi'om moisture or accidental ignition uy a covering of soft melal, On WLich is leo-iuIy marked the time graduations in seconds and parts of a Second. COl11I~encing at the entrance to the magazine, on the loft end of tho cOmposition, the first mark, a short one, is for!t of a second; tllO next, °lle dot, or the figure 1, is for 1secondj the next, a short mark, for It sec- °lnd j the next, it long mark, 1~- secollll j the next, [I, short mark, J1 second; Llo next, two dots, 0]' the figure 2, is for 2 secollds, and so on in succession structed.up to 5t sec.onds, which is the longest time for which these fuzes are COll-

As the fuze exposes considerable surface to the shock of movement, it is SUstained within the shelluy a thick iron plate, perforated throngh the centre ~fas to permit the passage of the flame fi'om the fuze into the interior of the s I:!l .when the magazine explodes. ns t li plate is screwed into an orifice prepared for its reception, and closes .he lOwer part of the fuze-hole. The metallic fUlle is theu screwed firmly In~~its place, and the pr~jectile is ready for service. 1e 11 operation of the fuze in service is as follows: the thin eoveriu/! of Illetal above the composition is cut at the desiret1 point so as to lav bare ~the uI,1perSurface and expose it to the flame of the discharge. The combustion ?f. the Composition occupies the assigned time, and thell, through the cunal ~l.l.eady mentioned, cOllllllunicates fire to t~l? 11l.agallin? The e~plosiou . lIVes the flame downward through the onflce III the 11'011 plato mto the Ill~~rior of tho projeetile, wllCre it oncounters tho charge of .the latter. 11 1he l~UZE-GOliGE, a small g-onge with a wooden handle, IS required to cut L Ie metallic Cover and expose the composition. '1\vo fuze-ganges should o SUpplied to each piece. ------_._------_._------ill~ Since the introduction of rifler} gnns, percus~i()n fuzes of severnl varieties have come "c ge~I(!l'aluse for sltcll,~. Por case-sltot of rifle guns the paper. case "time f/(ze," and a A. .um/lI,II,arion fuze, ,. combining the principles of time mill concu~sion, are !lOW u ..,cd, l'es~;~s~ltJeu "ilormaun fuze," giving a rauge of I:!", is on trial, and promi~es goo" 10 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES.

l<'UICTION PRIMERS.

The primer is a small tube filled with rifle powder, and inserted in HIe vent at the momont of firing. It is ignited by the friction produced in drawing a rough wire briskly through a friction composition, consisting of ] part of chlorate of potassa and 2 parts of sUlphnret of antimony, moistened with a weak solution of gum arabic, and mixed together in a wet state. This composition is contained in n slIlaller tube, which is inserted at right angles in the priming tube near the top and soldered to it. A lanyard, with a hook attached, is used to pull out the wire. Ammunition is issued to batteries from the arsenals, prepared for imme- diate use. It is packed in boxes made for the pnrpose j these are painted olive color on the outside, and the kind of ammunition contained in ea<:h is marked on both ends in whitc letters. The date and place of fabrication aro marked on the inside of the cover, \Vhen fresh ammunition is received, it should at once be gauged to the pieces, and its condition examined. It should he frequently aired, and every care taken to keep it in good order. The primers should be l\Cpt in a dry place, and exposed to the sun before being used. In rainy weather, especially when long continued, and an actionlllay be expected, they should be <.Iriedcarefully, in small separate parcels, before 11 fire.

CON'l'ENTS AND WEIGHTS OF PACKING BOXES.

WEIGHT. No. of AlIDIUNITION. Remarks. KISD OF rounds. Empty. Packed. ---

FOlt lbs. lbs. GV,". I Shot .: .....•.•...•.. 8 :1:1 148 I"ipherICal case .....••. 8 23 H2 12-pounder .•••. { Shells_ ...... •...•. 8 :13 121 Each box contains Canister_ ...... __ .•. 8 24 1Gl the port-fire and ~ iShot ._-- ..-- .... "'- 14 :15 1:3:1 yard slow-match. 6-pounder ..••. Spherical case .•...... 14 25 125 Cillli~ter ..•...... _. 14 26 146

FOIl HOWITZEIlS. { f;hell~ ...... _-•...••. 4 23 13r; 32-pounder ..•.. Spherical case .._ .... _ 4 2:1 IllS Friction primers are Canistm' ._ ...••..••.. 4 ~5 1;-;8 fllrliiHlled in till 1Slll'lls: ...... •. 6 25 155 boxes, containing 2-1.pounder_ .••. Sphencnl case .••..... 6 ~5 ]!JO 100 each. Canister ..._ ...... •.. 6 26 170 {SllClIS ..._ ...... W ~7 1:13 1~.pouuder" .•. Spherical ease ...... 10 27.5 ]G5 Canister ..-- ...... •.• 10 28.5 148 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. 11

WEIGHTS OF FIXED AMMUNITION.

FOR GU~S. FOR HOWITZERS. 12-pdr. 6-pdr. 32-pdr. 24-pdr. 12.pdr. C lbs. --- artridge, includingl1arge nharge.__• _...... lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. Cartridge box._ .. small charge .•_ •...... 2.56 1.3 3.88 2.7 F; 2.06 1.3 hot, strapped ...._ ...... __..... 1.05 3.1 2. J4 1.05 S 12.75 6.28 ... _-- .. Shell, strapped and charged.,_...... _.. _ ...... ph?rical case, strapped and charged. _.__. " 9.52 ...... 24.6 18.8 C 12.17 9.35 anlstel'. with sabot.'" ...._ .._ .. _.__...... 5.72 32.72 24.64 12.2 14.8 7,32 28.5 21.25 R Shot .... _- ...... _- ... 15.4 10.8 Shell.. .__.. _____. _.... 7.6 - ...... _"_e ..... --- .... - ~~~~ ~:_~~.~~~~i:~ 12.17 27.7 21.15 Spherical case .....__.. 14,7 lO.5 Canister ...____ . __'____ 35.82 27 16,91 13.65 "t~"131. 6 23.6 11.85

FIELD CARRIAGES. A~l field carriages consist of two parts-the body, or main portion of the carnage, and t110 limber, or fi'ont part, to which the horses are nttached. eachThese other. parts are so connected as to be readily detached and separated from GUN-CARRLWES, (Plates 8 and 9.)-There are three gun-carriages for field artillery, viz: One for the 6-pounder gun and the 12-pounder howitzer.;; One for the 24-pounder 11Owitzcr. One for the 12-pounder gun and the 32-pounder howitzer. t '1'he 12-pounder light gun is for the present mounted on the 24-poun

AMMUNITION CHESTS. (Plate 2. )-The same ammunition chest is adapted to the limber and to the caisson. The interior arrangement varies with the calibre and description of tho piece and the ammunition to be used. The principal divisions are designated as the right Ita(f and the lrft Italf to a person facing the front or locli;side of the chest. The smaller divisions in each half perpendicular to the sides are designated as thejirst, second, third, etc., from the principal partition each way j tho divisions parallel to the sides are designated as the front, middle, and rear divisions. Chest for G-pollnder gUIl.-Eight partitions, fom in each half, perpen- dicular to the sides of the chest, and sliding in grooves made for the purpose. All the divisions of the right half, except the fifth, are provided with two bolsters each, for spherical case shot. The bolsters are attached to tllG par- titions by screws; the wooden strips which form the grooves, the linings, and the props for shells and spherical case, are seemed with copper 1utils. Olle tray, for holding oquipments, rests on the partitions in tho left halt of the chest. Three finger holes are bored on the inside of the ends to }ift it by, and a hole is bored through the middle of the bottom to let the air pass when the tray is lifted out. Chest for light 12-pozuu!er gZlIl.-Six partitions, thrw in each half, per- pendicular to the sides. Four of the divisions are provided with bolsters for shells and spherical case shot, and one division is separated hall! the rest bv partitions of sufficient height to suit that of the canisters. One tray t"J'r equipments in the left half, as in the G-ponnder chest. Chest for 12-pozlIlder glln.-Sil; partitions, three in each half, perpendicular to the sides. Four bolsters for spherical case shot. One division is prepared for canisters, as in the light 12-pounder gun. One tray for equipmonts in the left half. Chest for 12-pozl1lder lwwitzcr.-Six partitions, three in each half, perpen- dicular to the sides. Twenty-one bolsters for the lower tier of shells and spherical case shot. They are cupped to receive the balls, and lmve holes bored throug-h the bottom for the fnses to lie in. They are placed in the bottom of the chest, three in each division, except the division prep1Lred for the canisters. Twenty-eight props, for the upper tier of shells and sphGrieal case, four in each division, except that for the canisters. Six props for can- isters in the first division, right half. Chest for ;2A-poullder Iwwitzer.-Eight linings, two in ('ach of the front and rear divisions, fiLstened to the ends of the chest and to the principal par- titions. Fonr long partitions, two in each half, parallel to the sides of the chest. Two short partitions fllr can isters in the rear division of the right half. Seven short partitions for shells and spherical case shotj two in each of the front divisions, two in the rear division of the left halt~ and one in the middle division of the rig'ht half. Each of these partitions is forllled of two piec(~s, which slip into grooves, one o':er the other. Thirty-three holsters for shells and spherical case in the two front divisions-the left rear division and the right middle division; they arc so placed as to support two tiers of shot and shell. Chest for 32-pozlnder Itowit:er.-Six long pal.titious, three in each half; one parallel to the ends, and two parallel to the sides of the chest. Pour short partitions, one in the front and rear divisions of each half~ made in two pieces, and tiLstened as in the 24-pounder howitzer chest. 'l'zCcllty-onc bolsters for shells and shrapnell shot in the ii.ont amI rear divisions, left lllLlf: tIle rear division, right huH; and on the right of the front division, riglJt half. They are arranged as in the 24-pounder howitzer chest, so as to support two tiers of shot and1hells. ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. 13

A~IMUKITION CARRIED IX EACH CHEST. *

___ -,..._K_in_d_.____ No. weight.! Place.

FOR 6'POUNDER GUN. lbs. ~hot, fixed . CPherical case, fixed . 23 I]90 In the left half. is anisters, fixed . 20 140 In ht, 2d, 3d, and 4th diVisions, right half. i.'p'ar~cartridges U lb .. 5 42 In 5th division, right half. S[ICtlon priIners . 21 :!.5 au the spherical case. P oW.match yanls .. 75 .6 In tUbe-pouches, or bundles in the tray. ort.fires . 5' 5 -ilJ On the ammunition in right half. :376.1 I ====.:1 FOR LIGHT 12'POUNDER GUN. ~hot, fixed __ 12 Siherical case, fixed . 184.8 In the 2d, 3d, and 4th divisions, left half. 12 170.•1 In 1st, 2eI,and 3d diVisions, right half. 4 48.7 In 1st division, left half. ~~~:~~'cl~~~~~ed~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 4 cartridgcs lbs .. 67.6 In 4th diVision, right half. 'l~~'~ ~n 2 5 On the spherical case. 811lclIonprimers '" . 48 I> ow.match yards .. . 4 In tUbe-pouches, or in the tray. ort'fires . " .7. 5 } On the ammunition in right half. 484.1 FOIlI2.POUNDER GUN. ~hot, fixed .. 20 308 UPL?rical case, fixed ..•..... In left half, and 4th division, right halt: 8 117.6 In first and 2d divisions, right half. Saillsters, fixed ,__. ,. 4 07.6 :pP.&r?Cartridges 2t lbs .. In 3d diVision, right half. 2 5 On the spherical case. sCCtlon primers ....•.... , .. 48 .4 In tube pouches, or in the tray. 1)ow.match :>'ards.. / 2 . 5 ort.fires """ .7 J On the ammunition in right half •

4D£).8 FOn 12'POUNDER HOWITZER, ~hblls! fixed __ .. P ]5 157.5 c ~tJcal case, fixcd .•...... 20 27:l In 2d, 3d, and 4th divisions, right half. 1,~~~~~ers, ~xe~: ..•... , •.•.. In left half. 4 47.4 In 1st, diVision, right half. 81. npnmCl" . 60 .5 1> oW'match- yards .. In tUbe.pouc's, or in bundles on canisters, &c. Ort.fires . l. 5 .4 3 . (j } On the canisters.

479 .. 1 FOIl24'POUNDER HOWITZER = Shells atr d Sph ( appe . 12 225.6 In left half. C' ~rlcal case, strapped . 8 UIIIsters.... _"""__ . __'" In 1 In front and middle divisions, right half. 3 0:3.8 In rear dh'isions of right half. Cartridges small charge . 23 5 54 12 in middle division, left half; 9 in middle Pl" t. llarge charge . division, right half; 2 on canisters. 2 5.4 On canisters. I:;l~~v~~~rrimers"" _ '.:" . " 36 .3 Port'fil'es c.~'.: ~:'.'.: :'.: ~~~:~~~ 2 .5 } As for 12-pounder howitzer. 4 .7 547.4 - p;?he IO,pounder Parrott and 3.inch gun each carry 50rounds perchcst. T;le 20.pounder ing :~}tca!'ries 25 rounds. '.rhe proper assortment of ammunition, and the method of pack l Orrifle guns, being still on experiment, they are all yet undetermined. 14 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES.

Ammltnition can-icd in eaclt chest-Continued.

_____ K._in_d_,1 ~iWeight. . .__ p_la_c_e_. _

Fon32,poUSDER HOWITZER. lbs. Shells, strapped ... _.__ ...• __ 8 l(J6.8 Front and rear divisions of left half. Spherical case, strupped._ .•. 6 1D6.3 Rear divs., and right front div, of right half. Canisters .....__ ..__ ._ .__... 1 28.5 Left front division, right half. 15 4(i.5 Cartridges~ small charge_ •• _ } 1st division in each half. t large charge . 1 3.9 I~riction primers _ __. 24 .2 In tube-ponches, or in middle division. Slow.match.__ ...__' yards_. 2 . 5 } In middle ~ivisions . Port-fires__ . __•...... __ 4 .7 473.4

In packing ammunition in the ehests, eare must be taken to place tho rounds in their proper position, and then to secure them from movement by filling all the void spaecs closely with packing tow. The tow should be inserted in small portions, amI pa.eked down with a straight, smooth stick, prepared for the purpose. 'Vhcn ammunition is not firmly secured, the shaking of the carriage soon injures the powder, and renders the firing uncertain. HfPLElIfENTS AND EQUIP.:\fENTS FOR FIELD-PIECES.

Kind. No. Weight. Place. ------_._------FOR A GUN-CAmUAGE. lbs, Sponges and rammcrs._. . 2 11.6 ) For 6 poundCl-9 pounds. S ponge.covers ....------. .. . <) .28 \Yorm and stafI'. _.__ . 3.6 I-Iandspikes .. ..__ ~ 14.5 ~ On the carriage. Sponge bucket .. 1 10 I'rolonge ._ ._ ..• . 1 18 J '1'ar bucket ....._ .._ __ ._ . 1 7 \Vater buckets, leather _ __ 2 16 1On the limber. Gunner's haversaeks__ __ . 2 :3.72 '1'ube-pouches .. 2 1.90 }'uze-gouges_ .._ _ ..__. 1 .5 }'uze.wrelleh . _ _ . 1 Vent. .... -.-.-- .. . 1 .08 fIn th, implem,nt t"y', 0' in th, oth" va, Gunner's ._•. _ ,__ . 1 .85 cant spaces in the ammunition chest. 'l'ow.!look ---- . 1 .60 Pendulum huuilse ..__. ._. 1 .50 'l'humbstulls .._ ...__ ...... <) .02 Priming wires_ ..•...•.. _._. 1 • 08 Lanyards. .. _ 2 .10 } In the tube. pouches . Gunner's ...•__ . ., 1 ,08 '1'arpaulin, large_ ..__ ... _ ._ . 1 54 Strapped on the ammunition ehest.

FOR A CAISSO~. Felling axe ...... _ .... _ 1 6 Shovel, long hundle .._ .. _. _. 1 4.75 I'iekaxe ..__ ... .._ ..__ . 1 6.50 Jrn th, pi""" p,"vid'd fo' th,m on th, Spare . "" __ _. 1 7.25 eaisson body. Spare Jlole"" _' . 1 25.30 Spare wheeL .. 1 180 }'nze.gonge - . 1 .5 In limber chest. 'l'ow.hooks __"" _ . <) 1.2 One in limboI' chest, one in rear chest. 'l'ar bucket.. -'" .. _" . , . 7 1 } On the limber. 'Yatering buckets, leather .. 2 16 Tarpaulin, large .._ ....•._ .. 54 Strapped on limber chest. EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. 15

'WEIGHTS OF GUN-CARRIAGES AND CAISSONS EQUIPPED FOR FIELD SERVICE.

FOR GUNS. --- FOR HOWITZERS. DE~IG~ATIO~~ .. .. 12'pdr. 12'Pdr'l' . ~.6-Pdl. 3~-Pdr.124'Pdr. 1~-pdr.

GUN'CARRIAGE. -'-- Ibs. lbs. -- lbs. lbs. lbs. lbl'...... 1,757 1, 2~7 884 age without wheels ...... 1,890 1,318 788 783 736 5<10 783 els ...... •...... •... '" 392 736 5<10 ody without wheels .....•. 392 360 392 392 3!}5 3:35 360 .els .....••.•.••..•.•••.•.. 335 3:35 3:35 3UO 360 3:35 ion ehest. . ••.••...•...•.. 360 360 360 360 ]82 182 185 ion, packed.'" .•..•...... 192 ]98 206 505 490 381 480 ts and equipments .••..•.. 89 5;j4 485 ...... _- .. 89 86 89 54 54 89 86 54 5<1 54 54 Tot al weight.'" .•.••••••.••. --- 4,457 -;:-8651~ -- :NU1ll.ber 0 ~575T~036 3,214 f rOunds on each limber ... 32 ======32 50 ======15 = =.=I I 23 39 CAISSON. ======---

hout Wheels ..•••••.••.•••. 432 els ...... •...•. 432 432 432 432 3UO 360 360 432 lunition chests .....•••..•. 360 360 360 364 364 :370 384 ion packed in chests ...... 1,010 396 412 980 762 960 ],108 3:15 3:1.5 970 i~:::::::::::::::::::::::: 335 335 :J:l5 335 360 360 360 360 ion chest ...... 182 360 360 ion packed in chest ..•.. '" 182 185 192 198 505 490 206 ts aud spare parts ..•..••. 381 480 554 254 254 485 I ...... 254 25,1 254 54 54 254 ---- 54 54 54 54 I weight .•.•••.••••••.•••. 3,856 --- 3;8ll1~ 3, 811 I_~051 3,868 ~l!1ll.ber 0 -- Itsli1ll.b f rounds on caisson aud cr •.••••..•.••..••••.••••. 96 - ,,) 15

INTERIOR ARRANGEMENT OF THE UMBER CHEST. he i chest is marked: FORGE A. for01. ~elre are jive boxes for tools and stores, one_ shoeing box, aud one ca" 16 EQUlPl\IE~T OF FIELD BATTERIES.

The boxes are marl;:cd: A Nos. 1,2, 3, 4, 8. 'fhey are made of white l)ine, .75 inch thicl;:, with loose covers of the samo tbiclmess; the covers have three i-inch holes bored in each encl, to lift them by. Two handles of double leather 'are nailed on the inside of the ends of the boxes, so as not to interfere with the covers. The sides und ends of all the boxes for the foro-es and battery wagons are dovetailed together, and fastened with 8-pcnny 1~lils' the covers are made

\yitll damps on the ends. I

EXTERIOR DIl\IE~SIO~S OF THE BOXES FOR FORGE A.

__ D_e_S_ig_n_u_ti,o_n_.\._L_cn_g_t_h'lWiuth'I_D_e_p_t_h_'l,_\_~_C_ig_h_t"\,,__ --I-t,-cl-n-U-rl-i.S-. _

in. in. l in. lbs. A Nos. 1 and :3.••. 17.8 1:3.25 7.5 8.25 A partition at 4.5 in. from one end. 9.75 A :\0. 2 . 17.8 1:3.25 7.5 A partition for oil.can, at 5.25 in. A No.4 . 2:3.5 8 G.5 8 from one cnu. A No.5...... • • . :39. 8 9.8 6.5 14.5 Shoeing box ...•__ \ 16.5 8 6.5 4.7

The oil-can is made of tin, to hold 1 quart; it is 5 inche~ squa~'e and 4 inches high, with a, neck for a cork, 1 inch diameter and .f) mch 11lgh, near

one corner. 'Veight.9 pound. It is marked: A, ~l'ERM OlL. T • Boxes Nos. 1,2, and 3 are placed in the bottom of the che:;t: No.1 agamst the left hand; No.2 in the middle. . N o.~ is placed on the top of Nos. 1 and 2, against the left end and tho back at the chest; the divi~ion for the oil-can on the left hane1. No.5 is placee1 on top of Nos. I, 2, and 3, against tllC front oftlle chest. The sllOeing box is placed on No.3, against the right end aUll the buck of the chest. ns The tools and stores in a1l the boxes, and in the forges and battery \Vago , are securely packed with tow.

CONTENTS OP TIlE LumER CHEST OF FORGE A.

Place. Smith's tools uuu stores. No. \ 'Weight. ------,--- --,-- lbs. Horseshocs, Nos. 2 and 3 _.__ . .lhs .. 100 100. Oel Box A 1. 100.00 130x A 3. Horsesllocs, Nos. 2 UllU 3 __ .lhs .. 100 l\ox A 2, large division. 50 50.00 30 5.25 10 :3.20 4 2.15 1 1. 00 1 1. 00 20 5.00 \ fl!!:li[I;~fl[ffii!T~(.(:T:;;~;\ 5 1.80 \ In boX A 2, 91. llib. 8 7. :\0 12 8. :37 Chains, Nos. 1and 2 .. _._._ ...... •. fect_. 2 1.54 Cold.shut S links, No.3 -- _ - 50 2.50 Co1l1.s1mt S links, No.5 . 12 2. 00 Hauu colu.chisels ....• _ -_ ,.-- - _ 2 2,00 Haruie--- .. .. ---- .. 1 0.75 Filcs, assorted, with handles_ ....•. _. 12 10.00 \}In box A 4,28. 52lb. Buttress .- - ..• ~ ------...... •. •..... 1 1.50 Hand-punches, round und square ..•- •.••. 2 2.00 EQUIPMEXT OF FIELD DATTEnIES. 17

Contents of the limber chest of forage A-Con.tinued.

Smith's tools and stores. I No. Iwei~ht. Place.

I Lbs.

1 ~;\~~~~~;:l:i~;;~/-::-::: I HI r In box A 4, 28.52 lbs. }>airsdies._ }D;os.l, _, 3, und4 -_...... 4 1.8:l ~oollscrews, I-in., No. 14...... gross.. i 2.10 I )

3 I ~f.~~e1~~~g/;-;~~uyuu! if! I '1" bands, developcd - 4 l~:~~J Si,"bmu'-', dmeloped ------: ~:;~ II

!fIo~n;s~q;tu.,1a;re;.::\..::.~.~:.):.i•.:.:.!.i.;:..:.~•...••.!.:.~-_:!. ::. ':. :.:.:i.:i.:..i 11 I[In ,hooin" hox, l' 75 lb••

iC) i00 Fastencll on inRidcofthe chest 5 p _. I cov('rwith two copperclump8 . •/dlock I I 0.50 On the chest.

!lS}:~!:t;fg!:::!!!:: ,!'!:!!!!!!!!!•••••i.114~~I On iB hook ____ I

CONTENTS OF THE I~onGE DODY A. ¥ox: A 6, of the same dimensions as A ], is carried in the iron-room. rea 0 !?ut this box in, or take it out, loosen the thumb-nuts and raise the r ot the bellows an inch. 1"\ EQ[jIP~Ir:X1' OF FIELD UAT'i'ERIES.

'1'0015 unu stores. \ Ko. \'Veif;ht.j Place. ______' _-_I I Lbs. I "':\tcrhm:k<'t, wood...... \ 1 10.00 On its hook . .\lIvil . _ _ 1 1 100.00 On the tireplncc. \'h.t-, .. _._ .._ .. , _ 1 ~\).00 l<'ixe,lon the stoek of the carri'e. \\'at('rin~ lJllckd, leather...... 1 8. 00 On the vice. l:itllll\ill"n~ coaL .Ibs.. 2.jO 230.00 \ (I tI I b ; ::~~~\,~~~.\:~l:.-.-.....-.-.-.-:: : : : : :::: : :: : : :: : : :Ii ~:~8 50'~eo:~.~o~:: ox. j[,'r"',,hne:!. XO".2an,I:I. lIlS .. \ 100 100.00 lloxAG, iu iron.room. ~'lllareiron.;in.an,lilll _ lll:!.. \ IOU lOO'OO} Flat iro~l: l~}'l.X ~ in., 1 in. X ,~in., In the iron.room. 'fhe bnr~ • an'll: Ill. .,' Ill __.. 1\.,.;.. fj() fjO.OO not more than 3 feet long, ~;~:~~n~:t~::;'.I\ i2,'ql~;l;'~::::::::::::::~:;::: ;,~ 3g: gg the s'1narc iron in 2 bunule:!. l:nJ,:li"h Illbterstcd .lbs.. ;, ;).00 J: 'x , ..--- .. , _ ...... 1 8. 23 Tow _..... 2.00

.'on:.--100 Ills. ,of hor~(,5h()e", assorted, contain !l0 shoes. 1 Ill. horseshoe nails, No.3, contains 140 lIail~. 1 Ill. hor:!eshoe unils, :No.2, contains 112 nails. To 711lt the bellows in its plllce.-Hemove the carLl-box from the back of tbe he\low~-bo\lse; take out the two fitay-phlteR at the lower eudR of tl~c mbucts in the uralles; put the projecting ends of the upper uellows' an~l 11l the rabbets, and slide them up until the ends of the luwer ann come lllto theil places; Pllt on the stay-plates, ,and fasten them down with the thumu- lI11tS. ::)cn'w the hrass elhuw pipe into its place, thlough the hole in the l'bee!.irun frunt uf tbe hclluws-bullse.; put ill the cup per pipe, u,1ll1 screw up the cullar which l'OnBects it with the.clbow Ilipe. EQUIP~lE."r OF A lL\.TTEUY WAGON Fon. A FIELD BATTERY.

l."l'EIUOR Alm.\.'GE~m~'l' Ox' LDmElt CHEST.

The ('llPst is marl,ctl: H.\TTEItY WAGO~ c: The tools finu stur~~ are w.rried illfvnl' !Jo;et:s. marked C Nos. 1, 2, 3, and , rc,:p(-din.I:,', filllllll olle Od'fllli. Th!) ho.rt:s are malle of white pine .7;) inch tllick, with leather handles insid(~, awl luose ('o\'ers, like those of the limher che~t of :Forge A. The ('o\,er,.; of ,L' os. 1 and~ u,re .7;) inch thick; those of Nos.~ and 4 arc .;, inch thiclc

EX'l'EltIOR Dnm~SlONS OX'TIlE nOXES.

Dc~ignatioll. Length. Width. Depth. Weight. ---- I II/cites. Incites. Incites. Lbs. o. 1 ...... 17.8 1:1.25 7.5 8.25 .)...... ~(i. rl ... 17.8 7. rl 17. fj 0. :I!),8 :1...... !).8 Ii. 25 12. ;, 0. oj ••-- ...... _ ...... ' ..... - :I!). 8 8 6.25 11

1 '0. :3 has a partition, at G.~;-)from ()\\()c'nd fur the oil-can. Ko. ,I has two partitions perpendicular to the sides, makin ....t1'fec clivi 6ions IG.8 inches, lU inche,.;, ami II im:hcs long, respectiYely. ~ EQUIPlUEXT OF FIELD BATTERIES. 19

~ The oil-can is like that for the limber chest of Forgo A, and is marked: C, I0I'ERl\I OIL.

~~OX0S Nos. 1 and 2 occupy the bottom of tho chestj No.1 ngnimt the Ieft end. ,

.Nos. :3 und 4 are placed on top of Nos. 1 and 2j No.3 against the rear of the chest. .

COXTENTS OF LDIllER CHEST FOR BATTERY WAGON C.

- '1'001s and storcs. I 1'\0. I 'Vcight. Place. -- Carriage'7Ilaker's tools. /-----;;::-

lTnndsaw. 2 4.00 Fastened to the inside of 1 1. 50 } chest cover. 1 4.15 1 1. 80 1 4.35 1 0.:30 1 O.:10 I " 1.05 1 0.25 1 0.14 ~ In box C I, 17."Jlb' 12 I O. !15 1 0.18 1 0.10 2 0.17 I 1 0.]5 12 0.87 2 1.12 1 0.40 I 1 O. GO 1 0.32 J ] 1. 50 1 G.OO 1 5.00 ] 2.00 1 I 1.50 I 1.0G I 3.80 lIn box C 2, 32. 23 lbs. )',11'1l1l'l' ~h;Sl'~~18,:,(11l1: and 7. ~n.)...... 2 3.00 l'I':lIl1ill '018 Ctll1: .nHl]. 11~.)...... 2 1.00 All!,:l" gg 19c8,(I.IlJ.ilIll1HIIl.)...... 2 2. GO ~"I'<:'~~~~~~~~l~11alld1e8,(tin.,tin., alllH in.). 3 2.35 l,l'lliU .1...... I 2.42 ,\

I 1.7;; I 5.00 1 O. G;,) 1 0.09 1 0.28 11 1 0.47 II I 1.54 I 0.14 IOO 0.08 I r In box C 4, '0. 66 II,. 12 0.75 2 0"" 1 0.7;) 1 0.22 1 0.12 1 0.15 IJ 20 EQUIP:'oIEXT OF FIELD nATTEIUES.

LimlJcr chest of battery wagon C-Continued.

Tools and storcs. No. I \Veight. Place. --i\--L-b-S.-:------Saddler's tools and stores.

Thi1lJulps .'" ...... •...... O.OG Strap awl. __ __ . O.Ol Ilceswax __ __ Ihs .. ~. 00 Illack wax ""'" _ Ills .. ilal a.oo 1hist It's oz .. O. ;-'0 :-5hoe thre:lll. Ih,\.. 3.00 Patent tllrpa'1. lhs .. 2.0() I\ I" b"x C 4, 0066Ib, Dnek\ps, (as:;ortetl, .7;) in. to 1.3 ill.) .. doz .. 1. 00 Tacks - 1\1 __ ~I:l 0.7;') (;nIlIlPr's caliper,; _ . 1 0.30 Shoe I)ni\'cs .. O. )8 Scis:lOr:l - pairs .. O. :?O J 1'1ll110ek ...... •.•...••.•....• _ .•.•_ .•••. 0.50 Tar lmcket _ ...• ' . 7.00 Ou its hook. lloxcs ...... 4 4\). ::!5 Tow for packing _ . 7.00 Total...... • . . • ...... IG;l. :m

I~TERIOR AIWANGEi\'IENT OF THE WAGON BODY C. A TILL, a inches wide and a.5 inches deep, is placed at the back or right side of the wagon body. An AXE-lUCK extends along the whole length of the llOdy, on the left side, ] I inches from the bottom; it is 2 inches deep and J.5 inch wide, and is lilstened to the side hy the middle rivets of the side stnds, and bv 5 ,,'ood scre\\';;. The rack has llotches to hold three axes, a hatchet and threo hUlH.lbills. ' FUI/r !Ju:rcs, fur stores, llwrl;ed: C, Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8. Ulle box, murketl: C, CAXDLES.

EXTERIOR DDIEXSIOXS Of<' nOXES FOR WAGON nODY C.

De';ign:~ Length. "'illth.\ Depth. '_V_e_'ig_l_lt_.1 R_ c_'I_Il_ur_k_s_. _

II/rites. II/des. Inches. Lbs. e X08.;) all,1 G .••• :!;l lB. Ii J 1.:!3 J7.3 No covers ... } Of Imr

:\(;/'('11 till CllIIS; 2 markCtl: C, ?{l~AT'S-FOOT OlL; Imarketl: C, LINSEED OJL; J: C, TUIU'E;\;TlXE; :2: (), OLlVE PAIXT; J: C, BLACK PAINT.

DDlEXSIOXS 0\<' CANS FOR WAGON 110DY C.

1~ 1 Capacity. DialIl. llCight'I,_,_re_ig_l_lt_. r I_tc_nn_I_I.r_k_s. _

In. In. I Lbs. For ura t's.foot oil...... 2 gal~. 8 11.5 :? 2 { Rounded tops & nccks Ful' !insee,l oil anll turpentine.I 1 bOll. G III 1.:37 5 fol' corks. Flat tops; opening COy. FOrO!inPUint. ..•.•...... •. 12;ilhS. I !1.75 lO.:?;) 3 ered with IL piece of Fell' black paint ...... --..... 511.>s. 7 8.5 5 I 1. ~ tin sohlercd on. EQUIPMEN'f OF FIELD B"\T'fERIES. 21

TIM kegs, for grease; ext0rior dimensions: Diameter at the llilg'e .'" _.""" ._.. _.. _ . Diameter ut the heads.'" .. _"" .._.... _ __. _ . 10. 5 inches. Height_.. _'" _"'" _" _" _" _" _.__ .. _'"__" _" 9.75 inehe \Veight ""'" """ """ .. _._ . 12.5 inche. 5lbs.

CONTE:VTS OF THE WAGON BODY C.

Box C, No.5, is placed on tho bottom of the ,vagOll, next to the pile of harness which occupies the rear part of tbe body. Box No. G is on the top of No.5; No.7 on the bottom of the wagon, in ii-ont of No. G; No.8 on top of No.7. Tho candlo box in No.6.

Tools ana stores. No. Weight. Place.

Lbs. Linseeaoil. gal. 1 D.17 Inl tin can .. ) Spirits turpentine gal. 1 8.77 Olive paint """"" .lbs. 50 .--.--dO'--'-'/I b . 0" 80441bs 56 In 2 tin cans. n ox J,. • lllaek paint_ lbs. 5 Paint llrushes._.. __ _.. _ G.5 In 1 tin can .. 12 a Sperm 0\' wax cD,nales.lbs. 5 7.85 heads _. _. 4 2. !JO In ,",nU, "ox. 4 :1.20 I 12 3.00 ;) ~~i~~i!~~~:':~::-'~'~~~~~:~~~~~ 0.2'1 (In llox 0 C, 28.73Ibs. Gunner's gimlets__ . ;) 0.24 l:,ilnyards f?r frieti.on tu bes. 4 0.40 (j O.ao ~:~~::~~~n~~:.I~~S:::::::::::: 3 3 (;01l1monlallterns_ . 4 4. GO lIieat's-foot oil.. ...__ .gals. 4 32.80 1 (; rease .'" ...-- ...... llls. 50 Go In 2 tin cans. {In box 0 7 92.801bs. l\ails, (4d, 6<1,8d,LOd,).lbs. In 2 keg,;.... S ' 20 20 Box C 8. ~'el1iug axcs . "" " . n ]2 w hatchet . ?Ia 2 } In the axe-rack. 4 (;I~~~~~~:l~~~~k-:::: :: : : : : 35 Untler the till, against the side and rear of the 1~alhlhcrs and sponges . ,vag-oll. 13.5 On the caisson stock, against rear end. pokes_ _.. _ . 72 On the bottom, piled lengthwise against the front cud. 160 On the spokes, crosswise. 50 } On the fellies, against the left siue of the G.5 wagon. . 75 On the fellies, against the frout and the till. 47.5 ) .57.5 27.5 In a pile Occupying 30 inches at the rear end 11 of the wagon, between the left ~ide and the 8 caisson stock, and up to the top of the till; ]8 I the collars piled on each other, from the 21 llOttOlll. 15.5 4.5 J 1:1.5 ]() } On the harness. 6 On box Ko. 7, to the left of Ko. 8. ];>-75 ]2.25 10n the pilc of harness. ~;) ~ Un

COllte1lts of tlu; wa.!fon bod!1 C-Contillue

Tool~ allli stores, .~ Weight, I Place.

Pjt'kax,.~ and handles..... ~ Lb,~. 1:1 Corn ha('k"' .." ." .'" '" ~4 Between the Bpalle hanules. ~u On the scythes. TarpaUlin". ;, fe,~t HIlllar",. " ]8 I:eaj,illg huok,;." .. , .." .. On tho eoi'n saek,;, a:;ainst. front cnd. :.I.8:i .Fastened to the ridge. pole with a woollen Seytl!p ,;naths"".,., ..... aull a leather strap, I Fastelled to the ridge. pole with two leather Spare -toek for bary wagon !)o straps and lmekles. l'atllo('k , ..... " '..... 1 O,.J In the spare stock . 'ynlering buckct. '" 1 8 'l'ied to the forage rack .. ~'l~~:~~: : :: : : : : : : : : : : :: : :: '" 4" '. (i!)' '" Iu the forage rack.

°j'U\\'" " .. " 0_ •••••••• '" •••• _. 2"1.5

Total, '" ' 1,288. 8;! Excillsi\'e of forage.

::;pa:'(' g'n:l-l':ll'l'iage stol:ks, splinter hal'S, axlctrees, etc., form parts of tllC cC[uip!lIt'nts o!' battery wag'un D. ,Vhen ordered on service oeyond ~he l\:n(']\ of the fiL'~dpark, these artieles, together with other square parts wlllch llIay he Ilcedell and caunot ue readily made f'nllll ordinary material, snc!l, for instancl', as ,;pare hounds, forks, middle and sil1e rails, and cross-uars for c lis~un:;, a:-:s('lllblillg hal''', spare luck-chain, etc., should accompany the Illltter,Y.-(~ee OrdllllJlce MIl'IIIWi.) Fur ul hL;r i IJ:Ul urdillary repair", resort mnst gCllemlly be Imc1 to the field pari" F"rt hu.;,~lll','asiu!Il)t! by Lattle, wllieh lIlay Le extensive, such res~rt is gCIlt'rally in!lH'rati\'(" as' the ballery lIlust he pnt in illlmeL1iatc orL1er fur :>er\'iel' eidlPr ill pnr:-:uit of au ellenlY, or to eover a retreat. \VllUJ1scparatetl. frum the ]la,", it i" therpforc lH;t'es:mry that the l:aptain shoultl see not only that his hatIP)'." i" l'l'Ovidcd with these parts, Imt that they arc 'ironeu amI Htted, sn tlJat 110 tillle \l'illlJe lost ill cumpleting his rcpairi'J.

('(),\IPUSI'l'!U;X .Ai\"D I'llgPAHATJON OF PAINTS.

Paillt is go, !.l':':~Il,\' fn1'llishetl to l>ath:rics, mixc(1 tm.L1really for use. 'Vhen Ilot :-:upplied, aa,l the IllalNiaI:; l:an 00 procured, paltlts may ue prepllrell as fullt.\I':>:

The proporl it)tl~ ll.rl' g'ivt'l\ f"r j 00 parts by weight of preparell colors, etc., '.\'Ilen not uther",'i-e de,;igllated .

•\ I.:allon of 'in- ,l oil \,""iohK .. "'piri!. of tnl'pUllilll' _. _ •... " "" " 7.;' IUK. .1 a 1'.\11 varu::;:!. , "_ 7.23 " 7 ~~~:;l;~~\~}(~t',;;i.,..' ' -.' ~~' ~~ ~' ~~ '.-.-.-... ~~ 7.]2 " 7. G:.I " Black paint. Lampblal'k, _. _" ..'" 28 Lilharo'- "- "" 1 .Iopall \'aru:"h '..... 1 LiIlHf'etloil. boilcd 7a 'pirits turpl'llliuo...... 1 EQUIPiiIEXT OF FIELD BATTERIES • 23

. Grint1 tllC lamlJlaek in oil j mix it with the (,iI, tllCn griml the litharge in oJ! and atILIit, stirring' it well into the mixture. The varnish and turpentine are added last. The paint is used for the iron-work of curriages.

Olir;e paste.

(i8 11 ~~~r:i~~r~~~~~':~~l:l;'~;'~~~~l::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::37. Spirits turpentine._ _ .. __~ _ _. _ __ . 0.4

Make a tLick paste with the ochre and oil, in a paint-pot, and with the IlalllpLlack and oil in another; grind them together ill small portions, and coep the mixture in 11 tin vessel.

Liquid olive COIOT.

61. 5 2!J.5 ;"j.5 3.5 2 Stirred together in a paint-pot.

QUANTITY OJ<'PAINT REQuIRED FOIl A CARHIAGR

--- Kind of cnrringe. I Lend color. Oliye.' mnek.' -- , --- Pit-I(l "II . 1 1'" '(1' I t Lbs. Lb.~. Lbo<. (' .. ," n'cnrl'lnge nll( lmvCI', WI I Imp emens_. -.__ . __. _j (j JO 0.7.; ]~'lI:'S."II, with limhcr and implemclIt,;, &c._ ..__ . _.__ .._ .._ .,' 8 ];') 0.8 1 ~:~~~~;:Y'~~[~~~~:~~~;:'til-Ji;l;t~;.::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~ ri 0.9 ]~:l~ellla(ecalTiage aml elmssis, with implements .._ .._ __ , I 14 0.75 >.It liette carriage and chassis, with implements - . (j 11 i 1 ------A priminO' of lead color and 2 coat.~ of oljye color are applied to new ',"ood- '\'ork, and

Paint faT tarpaulins . .A.. square yard takos 2 pounds for 3 coats. ::~Oli'C-~:f:i;;'~~:~:;;;:::.:.-:••::.:.:.:.:::••••••:::••:.::.:.. '1 '\':~l':~~olvethe uceswax in the spirits of turpentine, with a gentle heat., and mix the paint

,h~'~Adtl yo! on!1ecs.of ueeswax to 1 gallon ~f linseed oil, ::lllil \)~)iIit h,:o .hours; pr!llJ6 Civ. th \\lth tillS mlxtlll'e, anu use the same, III place of balled all, for IllIXlllgthe palllt. e two Coats of paint. £QCIP:\1E~T OF FIELD llATTERIES.

WEIGHTS 010' For:'GES AXD BATTEny WAGONS EQUIPPED FOR FIELD SERVICE.

De~ignatioll. :1"01' the :For ~hc battery. park.

l'OltGE. Lb.~. Lbs. !J!J7 007 3liO :1G:J 11S 118 320 .135 255 ~55 3:15 3:35 aGO 3GO ]58 ]58 480 a:~~ Total weil;ht. - ...... •.. )_ :1,:18:3_I :1,:no

I\XrTEllY \VAGO~. \

'no,ly cOUlpl('fp,,,'ithont whl'e1~ _ _ "'" _ 010 !1JO Two whl',.I~ --_ -. __ __ ._ ..__ _._ ..__ . __ :1(jO :1(jO ?,\:),l;~.,:.I~I:)~~.i;~O~~.;~\\',,)ll~t.~\:il~;,i:i".'.:: : :: ::: : :'. :'. -.:::::: :::: -.'.:::: :: 1,~~R ~,f;~}, '1'\\'0 \\'h,.,.l- _ .._ .._ __ ..•.. _._ _.__ :3(i() :l(j() ~:::::.~~I;I~.:,'{;:;O~.~I~::\il~-{i;;I;)~;':::":::-.:::::::::::::::::::::::::: i~~ t~~ Tntal weight, (exclll~i\'c of fora;:;,,,)._--- .•.. -. -:.1 4, !Jl;j

1I0nSES.

'1'11\' lI\1ll\l)('r of horses required in [t lmltery varies with the lIescription of nil' hattery ala1 the !lature of it:; serviu~. U!lder on1iwtry circllIllslances, wll\'ll l\t1r~(,s ('all he prol'llred froll! the cmllltry in which the operations are cundIH.ted, or sllppl ied froll! the depots, no g-reatcr lllllllLcr shonkl l~e lLt~a~hcl1 :'.'IhI' lJa,ttery Ihall (,xpericllce has proved to be neC'es3.ary to keep It ~ftic1Cnt . .II~(..('aITlag-('~ s~I()\Ild he k\'pt l'lllly aml \Y\'!'l ]lOr:;c\lj lor whell olle or a .team h 111.\\11'\"\ ~ll' llllcriur ia ~trcllgth, aLl\litiulllLl hLoor is throWll on the renmmdcr \llll,,>,s be IS at Ollce r\'[l\aced.

HOW;;::; l~EQCI1~En VOlt A :\lOUXTlm BATTERY OF SIX rIECES.

1".~ P\ l"11~-p'lr. -. (hl;ht.) \ 6-1)(lr. ------

For balkr)' of 1ll11111!'.l1Vre,1:J carriages ... f)G ';'2 " Ii :J(i 3(; a,lditillllaleaiH"ollz; (j lJrau;;;ht h(ll':-ihi.... r u 1 hat tt.ry ,vagon . _. ~: ~:::::::::::::: G ...... i; G G !j l::~1~,~:.~~';'~ii~\~'lt;;'il~r.~I;li:::::::::::::::::]::! ]() 7 " 6 H,'rg-"aJ,IH ... -"- ••••• -- - •••••••••. 8 8 8 .'a.hllchor"l'~ .. r " (;artili!o •.rH ..••...•••••••..••.•••.. Ii Ii I; . ..l I' ~ l)lIg-lers -_. _ . '1 2I () It ~ l'il)tll'u .•••••_ ..•.• _._ •••.••• _0 _ .. 3 J :1 Totallllllllh,'r of horses ~\l:w-\--]-l() EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. 25

For service Oll the plains, at least one pair of spare draught horses to euch carriage should be provided. In horse artillery, the lllunber of saddle llOrses required for the gun detach' 1l1ent, including spare ones, is U for each detachment, or 72 for a six-gun battery.

HORSE EQUlPl\IENTS.

f The number of sets of horse equipments will corresp'ond with the number o nlounted men in the battery, exclusive of drivers.

ARTILLERY HARNESS •

. (Plate 18. )-1'he construction of the field carriages requi:'es a 1111l'ness

HARNESS REQUIRED FOR EACH HOnSE.

- WHEEL. LEAD 2G l'O[~T[~G AND RA~GES

AR'rrCLE THIRD.

POINTING AND RANGES.

To PO[~T A l'lEel'. is to place it in such a position that the shot, may reach the ubject it is intemled to strike. To do this, the axis of the trunnions being" horizulltal, the lille of Illetal (called also the natumlline of sio'ht) must be so directed as to pass throllgh the object, l\ml then the clevati~n given to the pil'l'e to throw the shot the ri/luired distance. The dircction is given from the trail, alllI the elc'cation from the breech j the tmil beiuO' traversed by a hamlspike, amI the breech mised or (1cpres~;e(lby all clevati~1O' screw. The .\XI:S 01' TIlE PIECE coincides with that of the cylinde~ of the bore. The LIXE OF SIGHT in pointillg is the line of direction from the eye t~ the olljl'et. It lies ill u. vertical plane, pltssing through or pumllel to the aXlS ot till' piece. , The AXGLE O[~ SIGII'f is the angle which the line of sight makes WIth the ux is lIf the piece. The X.\T!IL\L LIXF. Ol~ SIGHT is the stmig-ht line passing through the llig-hf'st puillts uf tllO Lase ring amI the swell of the llluzzle, llluzzle sight, or lllllzzle ham!. The ~.\'ITIL\L A~GLE OF SH:Il'I' is the angle which the nutltrulline of sight makl's with the axis uf the \lieee. Thc IIl~l'.\lt'l' OF A I'H:CE is half the difference between the diameters (If lhl' lm"c rillg allll swell of the lllllzzle, or the llluzzle baJllI. It is, there- f"re, tIll: 1 ang-ellt uf the lItltllml ang-Ie uf sig-ht to a radius eq Ilal to the distance frullt the highest point of th.e swdl of ~he llluzzle or llluzzle band to the plane pas"ill~ throllg-h the rear ut tIle hm;c rlllg': . Ih' H.\x

requ!l'C. An artificial line of sight and an artificial point-blank arc thus obtamed, and the piece is aimed as before. The different lines, angles, etc., which an artilleryman Las to take into account in pointing, will be best understood by the following rigure: II

A.~P= ~"H L ------.'~~ , .. . .. 15::.- A B is t~e axis of the piece. n I ]<~ L is the trajectory or curve described by the prqJectile in its flight. C D F is tIle natural line of sight. C D A is th~ natural angle of sight. rhe ~rojectile, thrown in the direction of the axis A B D G, is acted upon b~ t~]e ~orcc of gravity, amI begins to fall at once below the line at the rate at ] 0t feet for Ol1esecollcl, G41-for two, 144:(t for three, and so on in proportion to, the time. It cuts the line of sight at D, a short distance from the muzzle Of, ~he piec~, m~d descCl~ding, a?,ain cuts it at the POillt F. This second point of lllterseetlOn IS tho pOl1lt-blant •.

~E~DULU.U-lIAUSSE.-The instrument at present in most general use in POllltmg rield g'uns at objects beyond the natural point-blank is callell a }Jerl(l/l~/lill-haltsse, of which the eomponent parts are denominated the scale, ~he sltder, and the scat. The scale is made of sheot brass; at the lower end ~s a brass bulu filled with lead. The slider is of thin brass, and is retained Ill.any desired position on the scale by meaus of a brass set screw with a. lJlII~cdhead. The scale is passed through a slit in [t piece of steel, with wluch it is connected by a brass screw, Jorming a pivot on which the scale cun Yiurate laterally. This slit is lllitlie long enoug'h to allow the scale to tak.e a vertical position in any ordinary cases of inequality of the g-rouml all ;,,'hlch the wheels of the carriage may stand. The ends of this piece of steel .onn t\\'o journals, by means of which the scale is supported on the scat .Lt,tachetl to the piece, and is at liberty to vibrate in the direction of the axis ~t ,t!IOpiece. .The scat is of iron, and is fastell~d to the J.)aseof the breech by ~lIoe screws, lJl such manner that the centres at the two Journaluotches shull e at a distunce from the axis equal to the radius of the base ring-. , A. ma::.::.le si,,!It of iron is screwed into the swell of t]lO muzzlo of "/IllS, or Into the midlll~ of the mnzzlo rino' of howit::.ers. The height of this"'sight is e~lual to the displll't of the piece, ~o that a line from the top of the llluzzle lSlg-htto the picot of the scale is parallel to the axis of the piece. Conse- q~lelltly the vertical plano of sight passing through the centre line of the lS~a,I.c.andtLe top of the muzzle sight will he also parallel to the axis in any ~)O"ltlOnof the piece j the scale will theretore always indicate correctly the ~~llg-IeWhich the line of sight makes with the axis. The scat for suspending . l~ !lall~se upon the piece is adapted to each piece according to the yarying :\~cllllatlOn o.t' the bas? of the breech t? the ~lxis. The -,wasse, the scat, and ac~ 1Jtu,::.::.le Sight v[tr.Ylllg, as they do, lJl tlIClr constructwn and ar!'angelllent, hecOl:dlllg to the confi,glll'atiOl: of tl~e piece UPO:l ,,'hich they are ~l~tended to , . Used, ure marked fort he kind ot plOce to ,Y]llch they helOllg. 1 he gradll- ~tlollS on the scale are tllO tangents of each quarter of a degree to a radius qUal to tho distance between the muzzle si,,'ht and tlw centre of the journal llo,t~hos, which arc in all cases one inch in ~ear of the base ring. 1 Su he hausse, when not in use, is curried oy the gunner in a leather podch, sPclluec1 from a shoulder strap. 28 I'OI~TIKG AND RANGES.

PR.\CTICAL HINTS ON POINTING.""

.As it is. imposs,ible to point a piece c.orrectly without knowing ~he (!islan.cc ot the o1JJed, artllierynien Hhonlll he freqnelltly practiced in estllnatmg dls- tan~'es lJ)' thy eye alone, :lIIll verilying the estimate afterwards, ei~her L:y l'al:llIg th~ cllHtanee, .or I~.ra~tllal measurement with n. tape-line or cham, untIL tlIl')' al:qUlre thy Imlllt ot estImating them correctly. ~J1EI.LS, are IntpIlllecl 10 burst ill tlw object aimed at. SPHERICAL CASE SHOT me llItended to hunit frolll fifty to :;eventy-flve yards short of it. . I-'hell or spherieal ca:;e firing, for long ranges, is less accurate than that of solid !'ihot. At high e.levations a ~olid sho.t will.range further than a shell or sphe,rical l'ase ~hut 01 the !'iallle dIallleter fired With an e(lllal cktro'o. But at low e,ova- tiull,; the :;hell or spllerical ca:se will have a OTeater initial velocity and fi long'er .range. 1t~ however, the charges un 11!bOPOltionCll to tIle weights of the prOJectiles, the sulid shot wiil in all cases have the lOJ1O'estrange. The v('!ucity ur rall.ge ~f a shot, is llot an~cted in any appreciable .d?gree by checkl~lg the .recoll of the carnage by u:mlg It tight wad, or by dIfferent dl'g'reps ot nlllllllllig . . TIll' prillcipal c,allses whidl disturb the true flight of the projectile may be SIlllply stated u,; Jollows: 1:;1. H the whpe18 of the carriage arc Ilot upon the same horizontal plane, tIll' I'ro,j('l.tile will de\'iale towards the lowest side of the carriage. . :2d. If the direction of the wind is across the line of fire, deYiations III the flight of the projedile ,,-ill be oeeasioued, and in proportiOll to the stren~th oft he wind the angle its direction lludws with the line of fire alJll the velOCIty ol'tlle pro.inetile. . :{ll. H the cnutre of g-ravily of the projectile he not eoi.ncid~nt WIth t!Ie ('('lItre of Jigllre, the projnctile will deviate towards the Iteavtest sale-that. IS, in tile saIne direetion th;lt tlie centre ofgmvity oftlte pr~jectill', ,,'I~ilere8tlllg ill t11('piece, lip", witlt rl'o'anl to the centre of Jig-ure. Therefore, H It shot Le. plal'l'd in the pieee so th~t its eentre of gmvit,): is to the rig(tt of the l:ent~'e of the ball, the shot will deviate towal'lls the Tlgltt; and, 'VtC~ vers~l. It tlie ~'~'nt1'('lIf gravity be ahove the eentre of figure, the range "'IIlLe increased; II iJI'lOIl', it will ue dilllillished . . ~llOnlllllll ellem}"s caYalry he at n distance of ],000 yards from the hattery It IS ahont to charge, it will move oyer the first 4UU yards at II walk, ap }ll'oal'ltillg' ju a!2:l'nthl trot, ill auont fom aml a half minntes; it passes oya tll(' IIl'XI .100 yards at a rUlll1lltrot, ill a little more than two llJlI1u[cs; ltlld O\'l'rt he last :,WU yards at n O'allop in alJont hal I' a ll1illnte, the passag'e over th(' who\nllistance reqnirin:.tahollt 8even minutes. Thi,; estimate will gen- ('rally he very Ileal' the truth, as the gi'OUJlllis not always e\'ell ll?r elLsy 1..0 II\l)"e 0\,\'1'. ~l:lIlY losses arise from th(l fire of the artillery and irOI~l ae:cI- lIl'nts.' aud tlie tiJl'lning aud lilling'np of intervals create disorderj al~ o.t wJudl ('.ontnl!lItt ..to retanl the l:hargo. Now, It piece can throw with sufhcwnt, de- 1J~ll'ratl(!1Ilor poillting two solill shot or three c1LJlisten; per minnte. Each }lll'l'p 01 tll() hattery, thl~refure, might tire Jlille rOll11l1Hof801ill shot upon the l':lY:llry ",hil,st it is pas:;illg over thu Jirst 4UO yards; two rouIlllsof solill shot allli three ot ClllIi,;ter whilst it is p:Ls,;illg'over the nuxt 40U yards; and two

* Thl' ll('~t rill<: for approximate time of fligllt iR one HeeOllll for every 300 yards. rrh.i~ 1'111<0 i" only appheahl,. for

rounds of canister whilst passinO' over the last 200 yards-l1laldng a total f~'om each gun of eleven round shot and five canisters. To this is al1l1e<.lthe fire of the supporting infantry. Care should be taken not to cease firing solid shot too soon, in order to Con~nlence with canister. If the effect of the latter be very great on hard, llOnzontal, or smooth ground, which is without obstruction of any Und, it is kss in irregular an<.l soft ground, or on that covered with brushwooll; for, if the grounL1 be not favorable, a large portion of the canister shot is intercepted, ~ solid shot is true to its direction, and in ricochet lllay hit the seconc11ine if It misses the first. Solid shot sholl1L1be used from 350 yards up,varc1s. The use of canister S~10~11~1beginat 3GO yards, and the rapidity of ,the fire increase as the rang-e UlmllJlslJes. In emergencies, double clmrges of canister lllay be used at 15U Or IGU yarus with a siugle cartridge. ~ Spherical case ought not, as It general rule, to be used for a less range than 'lOa yards; aud neither spherical case nor shells should be fired at rapi<.lIJT auvancing bodies, as, for instanc<', cavalry charging. The fire of spherical case and of slwlls on bodies of cavalry in line or column and in position is often very effective. To the destructive effects of e il: projectiles are aulled the confusion and disorder occasioned amongst the ,Jt'ses by the noise of their explosion; but neither shells nor spherical cuse s luuld be tired so l;apidly as solid shot. In case of necessity, solid shot lllay be fired Irom howitzers.

RANGES OF FJELD GUNS AND HOWl.TZERS.

The ranO'e of a shot or shell in this table is the distance from the piece to giG P?int [~ which the first g:raze of th~ ball is mad? on horizontal ground, Ie pIece beillO' mouutcd on Its appropnate field carnage. l'he range ot- It spherical case shot is the distance at which the SllOt bursts 11?I~rthe ground in the time given, thus showing the elevation and the length ot tuze required for certain c1isbtIlC'S. ------~----_c_---_c_---_:_-----_

~ll of piece. Churg-e. Pxojectile. IEleyutioll'I_TI_U_ll_g_e'_I TI_'e_l_ll_ur_k_S_'_

Lbs. G'Ilounder gUll .. _"'" _. Yards. 1.25 Shot ...... 0 320 Do ...... 1 ti75 Do ...... <) 870 Do ...... 3 ,1,140 Do ...... 4 1,250 Do ...... 5 1,52;') 1.25 Sph. case shot tilth t 12'POullder gUll ... 2.5 Shot """" 0 325 Do ...... 1 mo Do ...... 2 875 Do ...... ) 1,200 Do. """ 4 1,320 Do ...... 5 1,680

2.5 Sph. case shot 030 300 Time 1 secolld Do ...... 1 560 .. do .. It..do. Do ...... 1 30 700 .. do .. 2t .. do. Do. "" "j 2 730 .. do .. 3 .. do. Do ...... 3 960 .. do . .4 •. do. I Do ..•.•.. 345 1,130 _.do .. 5 •. do. 30 1'0INTIXG A~D nA~GES.

Ranges of jicld gUlls and howitzers-Contiuucu. --"--"-----_._------De"eripti01~'f piece. ICharge.\ Projectile. \Elevation.\ llauge. \.~~

'I Lb... I' Yards. Ug:lt]::!,pO'lll<1cr gun... 2.5 8h\'II...... 0 300 'I'ime t second. llo. 30 425 .. do .. H..do. Do 1 G:!5 .. do .. H..<1o. , Do...... 1 30 700 .. do .. N..do. ])0...... <> 775 •. <10 •• N..do. Do...... 2 30 925 .. do .. 3t .. do. Do...... 3 1, 075 .. do . .4 .. do. Do...... 3 45 1, 300 .. do .. 5 •. do. 12,polludn gnn...... 2.5 Shot . o 350 Do . 1 GGO Do . 1 30 780 Do . 2 !l00 ])0 . :J 1,270 Do . 4 1,450 Do . 5 1, G60

2.;; 8ph. case shot

12'pr.ull,kr howitzer.... 8111'H. .•..•.. 0 200 ]h,"...... 1 540 ])0. C) G40 Do. 3 840 ])0...... 4 975 1)0. ;; 1,070

].2., Sph, case shot

2.1'PQllu,h'r howitzer.... 2 \ Sh ..I1...... 0 300 1)0. .••... 1 500 , ])0 ...__ .. c) 800 ])0. .•.... :l 975 1)0. """ 4 1,275 Do . 1,325

~.;) 8ph. case .... 1 30 GOO 'rime 2 Seconds. 1)0 .•••••• ] 45 700 .. do .. 2} .. do. 1)0 .•••••. 2 15 800 .. do .. :1 .. <10. ])0 . 245 !JOO ..•do .. :n..do. ])0 ...•••. :11;; 1,000 ..do . .4 .. uo. Do .. 3 30 1,100 .. do . .4t.. do.

3::!'I'0IlIl<1er howitzer .... 2.;; 8hc'Il. "" '" o 2DO ])0 . 1 fl:ll) Do . 2 780 ])0 ..•••.• :l 1,0:10 ])0 ....•.. 4 1,200 Va . ;; 1,500

8ph. ease . 1 30 GOO Time~ seconds. Do . 1 45 700 . .do .. 2} .. <10. ] )0 . 2 ];, 800 .. ']0 .. :1 • .<10. Do . 245 UI)O ..']o .. :n..do. ])0. """ :l 1,000 .. clo •. :32".. do. Do . :J 30 1,100 ..uo .. H..do. ' POI~TING AXD RANGES. 31

TABLES OF APPROXDIATE RANGES FOR RIFLED GUNS.

Description of piece. Charge. Projectile. Elevation. I Range. Remarks. ------___ 1

-- Lbs. 0 , Yards. ~O.ponnl1cr Parrott ...... 2 (Lcngth of Case shot ..•. 0 230 bore, 79 75 inches- diameter of bore (19t Ibs.) 1 5GO I.."'m,. do .. J. 75..'''""d. do ..• 3.(i7 i{lChes; weight or 2 950 .. do .. 3 .. do ... gun, 1,800 Ib~.) 337 1,500 .. do. -4. 75 .. do ... 330 J,500 .. do. -4. 50 .. do ... Shell...... 5 2,200 (181-Ibs.) 6 2,200 .. do .. 7 ..do ... 10 :3,300 .. do.n.82 .. do ... 15 4,500 .. do.17. 20 .. do ..• / 10'ponnder Parrott ...... (Length of bore, 70 0 2aJ .. do .. O ..do ..• ~n~hes; diameter of bore, 1 (;00 .. do .. 1 .. do ... ~9 mehesj W~ight of gun, 2 900 .. do .. 2 .. (to..• 900 Ius.) 230 1,100 .. do .. :3 .. do ... :l 1,300 .. do .. 3. 25 .. do._. 330 1,500 .. do . .4 .. do ... 4 1,600 .. do. -4. 30.. do ... 430 J,700 .. do .. 5. 45 .. do ..• 5 1,950 .. do .. 6. 25 .. do .•. S~ 2,150 .. do .. 7 .. do ... 6 2,;)00 .. rlo.. 7. 30 .. do .•• 7 2, (;00 .. do .. 8. :30.. do ... 10 3.000 .. do .10. 30 .. do ..• J2 :3,600 .. do.J;) .. do ... 15 4,200 .. do.16 .. ria ... 20 5,000 .. do.20 .. do. " 25 5,600 .. do. 2:3.30 .. do ..• :30 5,900 .. do.27. 30 .. do .•• :35 6,200 •. tlo. 31. 30.. tlo .•• 4i.inch ordnance gnn .... 31 Shot ...... (Length of bOrt., 120 0 G,O . .dll .. 1.25 .. do ..• lllyhes; diameter of bore, (331bs.) 1 750 C) .. do .. 2. 25 .. do ..• '1..:10inches; weight of 1,210 .. do .. 3. 25 .. do ..• bUn, 3,450 Ibs.) 3 l,400 .. do . .4. 25 .. do ... 3t Shot .•••.••. 4 1,67G (331bs.) I'.do .. 5. 50 .. do ... 11 'rhe shot (33 Ibs.) here 5 2,078 .. do .. 6 .. do ... alned is what is kUOWll 6 2,2:JG .. (10 .. Shell...... 7.25 .. do ... ~8 }) J'er's projectile. It 650 2,600 (Shenkl's per. Id08dO. ~sun~ert(lin, strips badly, ellssioll.) ,nd IS, in nearly all re. ~reets, inferiol' to that of Shot ..... '" 7 2,560 - .do .. 8. 50.. do ..• hh,ellkl, Which, besides (331bs.) 8 2, GOO .. do .. 9. 50 .. do ... IIClng more certain, gives Shell...... 850 CI?~\1t 10 pel' cent. in. 3,000 .. do.lO .. do ... eased range. (Shenkl's per. cU~8ion.)

3'inch ordnance gun ...... irl~h'I~r;t!1 of bOloe, G5 ~ 0 380 dO.. l.5 .. do ... 1 (;~5 l.. a ir le~, duuuetcl' of bore, .. rlo.. 2. ..do ... 82 lehes j weight of gun 2 1,010 .. do .. :J. ~j .. do ... ..0 Ius.) , 3 1,310 dO.. ~, 3 .. do, .. 4 1,5:!5 l.... do .. ;). • .do ... 5 1,835 6 2.100 1"065.. do .. 7.8 ..do .•• .. 7 2, :l:!5 .. do .. 8.5 .. do .•• S 2,400 .. do. 10. ..do ... 9 2,970 .. do.11 •.• do .•• l'OI;.

Approximate ranges for rifled gUlls-Continued.

Description of piece. \ Charge. Projectile. \EleVatiOu. \ Range. Remarks. Lbs. -----1------l-ra-r-d.-~.-I--.------3.iucl1 orUllUucc gUll.. • • . 1 . i~ ~~y tg I~.I(~~{i,.g s~~,~~~.s: 12 :3,QiO .. do.13.23 .. <10 . 1:3 3,410 .. ,10.14.73 .. do . 1<1 :3,710 . .<10.];'.:> •• ilo . ]5 3,820 .. do.](j .. do . 16 4,180 .. do.17 .. do .

1, ,GO )"anl~ is . 1 mile. 2, (,10 yanh jii . It .. :3, [,:!a yards j, . 2 4,4()() Y:lJ'(1~ iii .. ~i .. 5, ~SlJ ')"tl rt l~ i...; .. :> G, IGO yan]s is ...... ••...... 3t ••

Xon~.-The taIJlcs, &c., for rifled gUllS wero furnished by Drigadier General 'V. F. Darry, Iuspector of Artillery, , lll! 'Were alto the foot notes Oll pages 1to 50. MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY. 33

ARTICLE FOURTH.

INTERIOR ECONOMY AND MANAGEMENT OF A BAT'rERY.

AR'rILLERY HORSES.

,.AnTn..r.EllY OFFICERS "hould make themselves thoroughly acquainted ~\,lthcat the natural history of the horse, und the effccts of diHercnt modes of !l !llent, chanr:cs of diet, etc., on his system and powers of endurance. In i()le,t,eld the horse is subjected ~o so nJa~Y pr~vations, exposures, cl:llug?s of 1°' ,Iud water, etc., that an oHlcer deficlent III such knowledge Will either l~a~e his battery constantly lacking' in effieicncy and reliability, or else make <11 go expenditurcs necessary to provido rCJ1lounts. Officers should also }lorses.Illakethemselves acquainted with tllO bost mothods of breaking and training

tJ A.rn'(~.LERY rrORSES aro roquired fl,)J' quick draught; tlJOy should move Ie carnage, ordinarily, ratllCr vy tho weight thrown into the collar than by 1l111scularexertion. i lJescription._Arre at date of purchase, 5 to 7 years; llOight, ]5 lHlnds 3 IlldIOS?allOWingJ a~'ariation of ] inch. They should be well brokon to llUr- I$ 08,>,freo from vice, pCrlectly sound in evcry respcct, full chested, shoulders \\~~fllcIClltlJbroad to support tho collar, but not too heavy; full barrelled, \/>~horoad, deep loins; sllOrt couplcd, with solid hindquarters; and their ,\'tgh~ as great as is consistent with activity, say from],] CO to ] ,200 pounds to ~ell I~I good condition. In purchasing, special attention shonld be directed rat llie.feet, to see t1Jtlt they arc perfectly sound and in good order, with hoofs tel large, and that the horse submits willingly to be shod. be a~ng-]egged, loose-joillted, long-bodied, or narrow-chested horses should llarness.once rejected, as also those ,vhich arc restive, viciolls, or too free in ill~ tyaught horse ('an draw 1,600 pounds 23 miles n day, "'eight of carriage }lOt lIltisIlt cd. Artil1cry horses should not be reqnired to draw more than GUO can noneers.eucll, inclUding the \\'eight of the carriage, but excluding that of the

I.lorso travels the distance of 400 yards at II walk in minutes j at a tr~} 11 2 4t frOl't 1 • Iniuntes j at a gallop, ill 1 minnte. He occupies in the ranks It HI(' I .ot 40 inches, and II depth of JO fect; in the stall, a front of G teetj at I$L~tlllkct, Il front of;) feet, and It depth of 9 feet. Stalls for artillcr.y stables I( be 6 fect wide.

FOllAGE. 'rhe da'l . )4 po ,I Y allowance of oats, harley, und corn IS ]2 poundsj that of hay, '1'11 ~l~1(Js;that of straw for hedding, ]00 Jlounds per montll. P(J1Jllt~s'~Yer?geWPight of good oats is 40 pounds to the bushel; of harley, 48 '1'1 .. ' ot corn, uU 110111lds. A ~~l~}.alldardbushel of the United States contains 2,lG0.4 cubic inches. I ICYard contains ~J.Gr1 bushels. 3 31 l\lANAGEl\lENT OF A BATTERY.

A box IG X ]G.8 X 8 indIes, contains 1 bushel. A uox]t XIL2 X 8 indies, contains half a bushel. A uux 8 X 8.4 X S inches, contains 1 peek. l)resseu Imy weighs 11 pounds per cubic foot. Captains of lmtteries oruered for service on the plains should endeavot to secure uailv bsues, however snllLll, of grain foran'e for the draulTht horses. The labor is cxeessive. particularly when there an~ no beaten ro~ds, anu is destructive to harnessed horses, which cannot, like sal1dle horses be relieved lJy beinrc dismounted am11ed for lL portion of each uay's march j' neither call thry ~n~zc lluring 8hort halts for rest. Their daily marches arc often longer than those of eavalry horses, l\S they must make detours to head ravines, and llvoiu other had grounds which led horses can rradily pass over. In a. country intersected by steep hiTIs and ravines, teams must often be doubled, thus uouhling their lahor uml consuming time, where cLLValryfinds no diffi. culty. Average Ilaily marches at the natural rates are, for , 15 miles, performed in six hours; for curalry, 17 miles in six hours; for artillery, 16 miles in ten hours. '~'hese (~istanccs are giyen for ~odies of t1'OO\)Son the march, each an1l movlIlp; at Its natural rate m an on111ltLrycountry j anu the Ili:mlh'antages of the artiilery, as compareu with the other arms, are of COlU::iO ~~reatIy iucreased when troops 0llerate on pllLins uestitutc of roads. If a ;mttery is HHllleto conform its movements to those of infantry or cavalry lIIardliug' freely, its horses arc grea.tly f:ltigned by moving; at an unnatural "'ait. 11' it lIIarches at its own mte, the horses arc much long'er on the road (or equal distances, nud have less tillle for grazing. Besides, if a horse breakS dOWII, more labor is thrown 011 the rest of the team. Yet, in case of action, the movelllCnts must be rapid if the guns arc expecteu to keep up with 1110U1Ited11ll1ians. Grain should therefore be issued regularly to them, and their strcugth preserved aUlI economized so far as the nature of this species of ~ervit:e-\Vhich is foreigu to tlle object and unsuitahle to the character of artillery duties-will permit.

WATER.

The llailv allowance for !L horse is 4 g'allons. Pure, soft runnino- water is the best. \Vhenllmwn 1'1'0111 wells in warm weather it should, if pl:'acticaulc, Ile allO\\'l'd to :;taml until the chill i:; taken off before ueillg given to tho horses. If thi,; i:; Ilot practicable, a handl'ul of meal or uHm, if it can ue l'rueul'l'd, :;hollld be throwll into each uucket of water. LOllther buckets arc provillel1 for watering horses on a march. \Vhen the water is drawll from ,veil:;, or has to he dipped from a stream, much time is l'ollsullied ill the opemtiulI; it would, therefore, be well to Imvo ouo uuekct for each pair of horses" ',l'he:;e hu~kets form part of the equipment of the l'arriup;e:;, aUlI the chid 01 each carnage is responsible to the chief of tho piece that they arc retnrJIell anu properly secured aileI' being used.

GENERAL RULES FOR STABLE MANAGEMENT.

The followillg geueml ru10H,having been testel1 by experience and found to be eOIl\'ellicllt, llre reeolllmellded: 1. Tlte stalJ!n "'ual'll will cOIl:;i8tof not leRS than three men and a non-COm- 1lI1ssiolll'll otlic('r~ Tlte guard is responsible for the policc I1nu order of the stabll':; bet W('('IIstable calls. :!. The stahle guard and tllC stahle duty are nnder the direction of the uattery ot1ieer of the day, the first sergeant, and the stable sergeant. . ~. The mell lllLbitually groom their own horses, superinteudeu by the1! MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY. 35

~iVe(sU of pieces. Supernumerary horses may be groomed by reclllits, care- b Iy Supervised and instructed. The horses of chiefs of pieces areO'roomed Y lllen of their commands. 0

tl 04. The horses should be stalled according to their positions in the battery, .1 tea~ns nearest the doors to be led out first. Their places at the picket lOpe wlil be in accordance with the same rule.

o G. Tile grooming' should always be at the picket rope, unless in stormy "e~Lt1~~r; if done iu the stalls, the wisp and brush alone should be used. I. (l, ~ ~ stnke a horse whilst at the picket rope, or in the stall, is apt to make 11111 VICIOUS j it is strictly prohibited. e.7: lIorl,es require gentle treatment. Docile, but bold horses, may he IJ;CJtC~1toretal.iate upo~ those 1-vhoabuse them, whereas persistent kindness a~ ol~eu reclttllllCd V1ClOUS oues. 'tt ~i E:~ch lJOrse of a team should be groomed about twenty minutes; theu, ; Ie I'Hgnal "lead up," the cllief of each picce inspects his horses success- I~e1 y; exacting that the rules laid down under the head of" Grooming" shall

1Jle1:lv1ebeen ;:et. strictlv,J cOUlI)!ied with; if not, the horse is to be taken back to the

II ? At .morning' stable call the stable guard, assisted by supernumerary f(;:l1,1 Pollee the stables, take up the bedding, (separating that which is soiled st. 1!1.leIlJanure heap,) the remainder to be put out on racks to dry. The ._~s ~re then swept out ,and the mangers cleaned . •\'1 U.s l'!le grain IlIay be put in eaL:h bin by the stable guard. A box on e .\el for tbe oats is moved in front of the stall, and two allowance measures s:~teIe.':!the distribution to be mall? with ~'apidi~y. The hay is fed by the If bl men after their horses are led Ill, recClvIllg rt U:Olll the stable sergeant. n'i/rl1cticable, the oats are to be fanned and the hay shaken before being b ] ell to the llOrses. st. {e -:\t the afternoon stable call, wLen the horses have left the stalls, the OI~Ltli lS Policed and the bedding laid down, fi'esh clean stmw being spread rid, Jc top of the old. Great care SllOUld be taken tlmt the bed be not in l'!J~?' b~lt soft and even, the thickest part towards the head of the stall. 12 o:;lmg to be the same as in tllC morning. and: t 1be watering is usually done ham troughs; but after severe exercise to \. u. noon, in hot weather, buckets arc preferable, it then being neL:essary frOllllllt~IWater the . horse's allowance. The horses are to be led at a walk to and

•\'a\'~~.~hol~Ic1it be found that a horse has neglected his feed, or refuses his J Ill. , lt WIll at onc? ~e reporte.d to tl~e stable sergeant. '. I;fo,'j-.u es.A.'t nOIl-commlSslOnedI ofllcer of the stable guard should lllspeCt the of Sicl' ,t ea.st once ill every two hours during the night; any appearance IS"I'" g-eant,\!less III a horse should be immediately made known to tbe stable

ttl/2' ,:~'!Je~ickness of a horse, and the treatment he receives, should consti- LOOl,Pi2,tot. the report of the battery officer of the day, to be recorded in a Cpt for thut purpose.

GROOMING. 'rite \ . ]. 1'J v'SI\ the currycomb, and the brush are the implements used. HlId tJ ,Ie WISp is to be usel1 when the horses COllle in warm b:om exercise, to')IIi:,;" I), ,lead.horse is rubbed until dry, fi'om his hindquarters against the hair llP Ill~;;'} lie CurrYComb is used when the horse is dry, beginning always on tho UllJ. l~~l1e l~~ ,th~ hindquarters, i~s application b.eing in proport!Oll to. tllC Jengt1! liess ot tbe coat; that lS, If the coat IS close, lon£" full of dust, atill 36 MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY.

very mthy, use it freely to loosen the coat or tlle sweat that is dried and fast ou the skin and roots of the hair, appearinO' like a white saltish dust. In the spring of the year the currycomb S11OUld,whilst the coat is changing, be used judiciously, as a removal of the hair too rapidly exposes the horses to the smlden changes of temperature. l-'roceeding from the hindquarters, descend to the quarters, minding not to soraeh or iujure the horse. The legs below the hough~ are l:ot to be touche~ with the currycomb unless the .dirt is lllatted on the .l0lDts of the hough, w1nch may l)e carefully loosened WIth the ,currycomb. 1.'110 comb ,yorks unpleasantly on that part, and must be han- (Hcd lightly. Next proceed to the fetlocks, back, loins, flank, belly, shoulders, arms, chest, aml neck, omitting no part that the currycomb can be conveniently applied tu; but tender l)laces, thin of hair, or rubbed by the harness, need not be touched; they should be rubbed with the wisp. Observe, therefore, to begin with the currycomb on the near hindquarters and finish with the head, keeping the comb in the right hand. After. currying the near side, proceed with the off side; here use the loft hand. This done, wisp off thoso places not touched by tho currycomb j then use the brush. Begin first at the head or uellr side, taking the brush in the left haud and the currycomb ill the right: brushiug more part-icularly those parts where the dust is moro npt to lodge, proceed down the neck. The scurf of the neck next the head und the snag next the mane are difficult to clean .• Apply the brush back- ward and forward on these places, finishing by leaving the coat smooth. Clear the brush ham dust after every two or three strokes with the curry- comb. Proceed in the reverse order used by the currycomb, taking in.thoso parts not tunched by the currycomb, viz: under the chest between the forelegs, the inside of tlJO elbow or ann, and the parts about the fetlocks. The sl~in under tllC flank aml between the hindquarters must be free froUl dUf:t, soH, and so c1ean as not to soil a white cloth. The currycomb begins at the hindquarters and ends at the head. The brush begins at the head, and, taking in all parts of the horse, ends at the qUI1Ii.era. FIELD SERVICE. 37

ARTICLE FIFTH. FIELD SERVIOE. MARCHES.

The front of a column should not be frequently diminished and increased Qu~ long march, as it unavoidably increases the fatigue of the column, particularly the rear of it ; when, therefore, the fi'ont is diminished, it sllOuld ~?t .b? i~creased until there is a probability that it will not be necessary to l~lIU1sh It again for some time. rhe QU detachments should be told off into two parties, one for the piece, the c l(~r.for the caisson, in order to g'ive their assistance in holding on, or 'when- v~~ It may be required on the murch, &c. he w.I offieers commanding sections, in order to preserve them in place, will, " I~ho~ltwaiting for express instructIOns, give such orders as may be neces- for holding on in descents, for assisting horses out of Llifficulties, for ~hlYe Pl~s.sage of obstacles, &c. "IArtJfIcers should always be carried on a march, as their dnties com men co .' len that of the other men may be s,lid to end, and, if fatigued with march- ~n~ll"theyYI lng. cannot be eXl)ected to work with alacritJ' or effkiel1cJ', howe,'er

l' ,An intelligent non-commissioned officer should be sent to reconnoitre tho th'ld Or grOund that artillery is to pass over, and, when necessary, to report 0$ state of it. "Vhen the march is connected with military operations, an 'l~er S~ould be employed for this duty. he tain dIstance of two yards between the carriages should always be main- 110 ed On the best roads, to prevent filtigllC and unnecessary stoppage to the to ?es.ur In bad or difficult roads, it may be necessary to increase the distance llnllo Yards or more, according to the nature of the ground. Even infantry, llIl' er. SUch circumstances, open out and lose distance; with artillery it is e Ill' gC(avo1ldabl On , and the horses suffer much from beino-0 alternlLtely checked ami \.~~he stiictest attBntion, however, sLould be constantly paid to the preser- l'III~ll of ~istances, not opening out more than is absolutely necessary. \Vil~ fSS of distances with small bodies of artillery may be made up; but .'SeriI arg~ bodies, or when acting with infantry, this caunot be dune without llot IUs (!Jsadvantage, particularly to the infitntry; therefore, this point can- offie too strongly insisted upon as being of essential consequence. earr', cerses commanding sections should frequently halt to see that their \vjtg are well up, and marching in proper order. Ollt Of~enan accident happClls to a carriage. it should, if possible, be drawn troop th~ column. so as not to interrupt the march of the other carriages or nnd c1~ rhe curnag~s in its rear ll1U;'3tpass it L~ the most con.venien~ ~ank, .'Soon ~e to proper (hstance. The dIsabled carnage resumes Its pOSItIOn as e the Ii ~~t t.h damage is repaireu; when the road is narrow, it must fil11into .'Spacel~ ~~lte~-vU;1it finds, and use every opportunity afforded by a wider J\ .. ' legam Its proper place. )IOlVe~'~I~sonbelonging to a disabled piece must remain with it; a piece, .'SUllicieelishould nut remain with its disabled caissoll, but merely leave a n nUmber of men to repair it. FIELD SERVICE.

\Vhen it is necessary to move a carriage along a slope, where a small jerk may overturn it, a drag'.rope should be fastened to the lowest side of the l~arriagc, pa"scd over the top of it, and held by two or three men, marching 011 the upper side of the slopej a small effort by these means will prevent no carrillg'u frum overturning on a yery steep slopo. 'Vhellenr the ruts are yery deep the carriages must quarter the road; WhOIl, llUwoyer, the road is narrow and sunk bebveen banks, the horseS sllUulll be \(oft to themselves tllld not hurried. In such eircumstances a skilful dri\"l~r will saye his horses much, particnlarly the wheel horses. In pa~sillg oyer deep furrows, or slllall ditches or drains, the carriages sllOuld cross them obliquely; when they are crossed perpendicularly, the lJOrses nut only encouuter greater difficnlty, but tLey, as well as the harness, sutfe:r lllllCh from the jerks. The fonner line of march should be resumed as soon as they arc passed. When tlle ruads are good, or even tolerable, the artillery is always obliged to wait f(n illfantry, wllich is attended with much additional fatigue to the l~orses, frl)1~l having the hll.rnes~ so much longer upon them. \Vhen! there- tore, l~ere lS 1.10 l!

'r!l() pintle hooks and lunettes should be greased previous to marching. It a battery is packeu in hot weather, the naves of the wheels must be protected as much as possible from the effect of the sun, by sods, tarpaulings, (Jr other covering.

ASCENTS.

. If the asc€nt be long and steep, tlJC road in a bad state, or if, from any ~t!Je.r cause, the exertion of the horses is likely to be great, a part of the ;arnag-es :-;hould halt, the leaders of them be hitched on to those in hont, '.llld wben they arrive at the top, be sent back with as many more leaders as LIla):. be necessary. '''.Itatever may be the difficulties of tlle road, not more than ten horses can b~ llJ~dl~d with effect to the same carriage; oeyond this numoer, and even '\1t1l It, It is ddficult to make the horses pull together. b} t llJay be sometimes necessary to make the detachments assist with tl(':~ks or drag-ropes. t] Aiter going up a short, steep hill, the horses should be halted; but when ,Iat CllIlIlOtbe done, they should be made to move slowly to allow them to 1C\ovcr their wilJ(1. tl ..Ill going up a hill carriages may be IH1Jtedto rest the IJOrses, by bringing lem across it, and locking the limbers or chocking the wheels. For this }l~ll pose, it may be udvi&'lole to divide the carriages into portions of throe o~.iour each, starting them ii'Oln the bottom in succession, \\'itL an interyal o twenty or thirty ;yards or more between each l)Ortion.

DBSCENTS.

I Tdie drivers should never dismonnt in going down hil1. The wheel driver (iI), . Ii Lis near horse 'yell in Land, and his off horse very short; the other 11\ ers barely r.:tretch tlleir traces. ,~~, descending steep hills the cannoneers must hold Oll. J'or this purpose, ~'f\ 1011~ to marchillg' ofj~ the end of a drag-rope is passed twice round the ti:,'W of the piece, and the running part passeu into the hook and pulled 'Vb "tl; the rope is then wound roulll' the muzzle, or formed into a small coil < >I( Jl1JJg' on it. Iii At tile caisson. the drag-rope is fastened to one of the hind irons, or to tlJ.o Ll;~( .a,xletree. \Vith a light battery, holding on will generally oe sufficient; l' Jt I](;ces::;ary, tIle wheels must also oe locked. rj. 11 steep and difficult descents the ",bee! horses only arc loft in the car- \yjlf<', tbo ot1l<.:rsl)()ing taken out and led in rear; tl10 cannoneers hold on II drag-ropes. l\l.:YhCll it is necessary to lock, the middle driver, or with fonr horses the (!.;/Illg one, dislllOunts for that purpose. Should there be it ditch or other i1~ l~elytlS part on the side of the road, the wLeel towards tLat side is locked l'teiorence to the otLer.

TO CROSS SWAMPY GROtJXD. l~. h file 'lt~.ttrriage should preserye a distance of ten or twelve yards from its ollie .~'l( er, to preyeut its being Jmlted. An officer or non-commissioned ilIstl~lc .~hOllld he posted where tl10 ground prc:oents the greatest difficulty, to to u/ ;,ho drivers how to condnct their teams. The horses must be Illade llece~~::r reel~ a~ld (]l,li~ken the gait. If the ground is very miry, it ,may oe teulllS' y to ,lSS1stwUh drao'-ropes, or eyen to use them alone, crossmg the SUIJl1ratel;y. <:> 40 FIELD SERVICE.

TO PASS A DITCH.

The. ~rolonge must be fixed and the handspike taken out. If the ditc11 lw a ddhcult onc, the horses are halted at the edO"eof it and the piece is run by hand close ,to the limber, which theu proceed~ gently until the piece is at t~le Lottom of the ditch, when it moves quickly until the piece is out. ~hnultl th? thtch be narrow, it may be necessary to cut down the edges aud ~101<1 all "'Itl~ drag-ropcs. If, in passing over, the trail sinks into th(~ ground, It must Le du;cllguged Ly a drag-rope fixed to it, or by the handspike.

CROSSING :FORDS •

.~Yl.len. t!l? ,,-at?l: is deep nnd the ,current strong, great ~ttenti,o~l must be p.lId lJl fOllllllg. I he persall cOllductmO" n. column over a dIrect fOld, should kel'p his eyes stell~ily. fixed on some'" object on the opposite bank, wh~ch 1lI1liks the place at gomg out. lIe must not look at the stream, which \\,oull[ decei~-e him by appearing to carry him down. All those III real: should keep their eyes on those in front. In order to resIst the power of the stream, it is necessary to wade rather ag-amst it. \VIICIL !he bottom o~'the ford, or the bank on the opposi.te side, is bad, th~ leaders ot the rear carna/"es should be hitched to those in tront, and an officer statiolled at the entrance~ and another at the place of going out. ~he formCl: causes the distances to Le observed, and directs the drivers as to tUGmannN of cro:;~illg the ford, and the latter directs them in their leaving it., The IIHl.Uag-ement0.1' the horses and tllC reg-nlation of their gait:" 11~'e the :<:lllle as pre:-:icnlJed lor cro:;sing swampy ground., AL?vc all. t[lIngs~ tl~e hurses lI\\I:;t not be allowed to drink halt or trot, mther 1Il passlllg the.fo](l or ill [eavllIg- it. If, however, the stream' to be forded is smal!, and neltl~er dl;ejl l1ur.ral'i\l, and there are no troops immediately in rear, tlll~ opportuUlty 0\ \\'l~tcrlll~ the hur:;es, or at least of giving them 11 mouthlul of water, may IJe embraced. The passage should he effected with as large n front as possible. After reaching .the opposite Lank, the lending carriages should move on. to such dl~t,.lIlee t~'om ~he ford as not to impede those in real:. .., It the turtl IS not well known, it must be exulllllled, and the clangmous plu('es well marked, before the CarrillO"eSattempt to cross. . Artillery carriages ('Ull pass a fordt[m~e feet and one-third de~p; am1 tln~ l~l'plh I1llly lJe attell1pted whell the arillllUnition h0~e~ ure pe~.tectly wat~. t I~.ltt, or meaus Inwe been takell to :'aise them suffiCIently hIgh, althouoll 1lI11C~1 depclld:; UpOIl the IJOttom and the strength of the current. ..) \\ heu the all1l1l1ll1itiou boxes arc not water-tight, and are at then usun hl'i~ht of two feet ten illches above the ground, the depth attempted should not exeecu two feet four inches.

!)ASSAGE OF l\IILITARY BRIDGES.

At !lIe cntr:luce of tIle hrhlge all hnt the wheel drivers dismount; the dis- 1110\lnlet.\\lrivers mllrch at their horses' heads, holding- the reins of tl.1C near IltlrSe With the right hand Ilear the bit. A distauce of twenty yl1nls IS ~;:e~~ lletweeu the carriages. The gait must be free and decided, and the dnvel~ ~hullld ('ull(lllct the curri:wes as lIcar the middle of the flooring as possible, if tbe flouriilg is wet, th~:r lllllSt attend pm-ticuhLrly to keeping the horses from slipping. BatteilS should, ill this case, be nailed fiCroSSthe bridge. It lllUy soulCtillles be necessary to puss the carriages and horses separately. FIELD SERVICE. 41

There shoul,d be no halt on the bridge. Whenever it is perceived to rock, t,~leyassl1/?e 01 the .troops ~1Ust be stopped. If the bridge cracks under a carll age, ~t should mcrease Its gait and pass as quickly as possible. th In p~ssmg over a flying briuge the drivers hold the horses, facing towards t. em; It may occasionally be advisable to take the horses out; and in bois- erous weather, or at night, the wheels should be locked.

PASSAGE ON ICE.

Ice 2 ~nches thick will bear infantry. ~ce 4 ~nches thick will bear cavalry or light guns. ce G ~nches thick will bear heavy field guns. I Jce 8 Illches thich will bear 24-pounder gun on sledges; weight not over , 00 pounds to the square toot.

REVERSING A BATTERY IN A NARROW ROAD •

. All tIle carriages should be drawn close to one side of the road, and the ple~es aud caissons unlimbered and reversed. The limbers are then brought ~.~tront of their carriages, which are then to be limbered up. If there is not 0:11 to reverse the limbers, tllC horses must be taken out. tl Sho~ld this road be so narrow that the limbers cannot pass their carriages, d,l~ tr~L1lsof the pieces and stocks of the caissons must be brought into a 1 IJectlOn perpendicular to the road; if it has a bank on either sidC', the wheels oust run close to the bank, and the trails and stocks made to rest upon it. '1n a dYke, or road witll n ditch on each side, the carriag.,s must be run as f Ose to the edge as possible, and the trails and stocks held up while the tllULars pass. Great care must be taken not to run the carriages too far, and l~)\\"heels must be scotchell or lockecl at the edge of the dyke or ditch. 'v Tlta~'/':s.-'Vhen a battery is in stationary quarters, there must be a l)'~~ dY,IUspection of every part of it, and, when circumstances permit, a ri~I.tue III Iuarchiug order; at which parade every part of the harness, car- ol:~f,~s,aud appointments of the cannoneers is expected to be in the best 'vI ~~i Particular attention should be given to the state of the ammunition, ,~;<:1 lllust be frequently aired. as f L: batt.ery shOUld ti'equently take ont a day's forage, secured and arranged &c 01 serVIce; the detachments being in marching' order, awl their blankets, It' properly fixed. aUl] (~~I~UId ~e made t~ go .over all.sorts of ground, up and d?wn steep slopes.' ilUJ C,I?ss.ult~h.es. 'llw mtrenclllllg tools should be occaSIOnally tl~ken off, lJus . llsed III fIlllllO' up holes and making ramps, to enable the carnages to . s Over difficult ground.

IXSTRUCTION FOR THE PRESERVATION OF HARNESS.

lle~tl:c ~reservation of 1m'ness requires two kinds of attention: one, that of s ',"hic!es , w.hich Illust be continual; the other, strictly that of preservation, '1'0 Y~?~lSlstSin oiling the leather parts two or th!'ee times a y~ar. ~ 'Vllene~~~l~ Ole harness neat, the men shoullJ ,vlpe and caretully clean It CO\], ?1 It has. been used. lltteUd:~s, which it is important to keep soft and supple, IllUSt be carefully Airiu ~o. . . and saJ ,tud bell;tlllg WIth a rope or sl.nall the stu~ng of the c?llars lllll-rches. llles are Important dutJes, whICh must not be omItted on contmued 42 FIELD SERVICE.

In giving the seco1ll1ki1ll1of attention to harness, that of preservation, the oiling ::;hould l)e done oftener in summer than in winter. The he"t oil for this use is neat's-foot oil, the unctuous property of whic.h is partieularly suitable for preserving the suppleness of the leatller. 'fIllS oileontains 110 siccative part, and llIay be used uupurified. As a maximum, fOllr.pints and a llalf will answer, each time, for oiling the harness of a tea111 01 SIX horses. I:efore using the oil, every part of the leatllOr must be perfectly cleaned and "'tlslwd, wi! h~ut, ~lO\\'ever, allowing the water to penetrate deeply into ~be h:athl'r. \Y \u\e stili llamp, blackeu those phtces which Imve become red WIth hatter's dye, illk-ball, or acetate of iron; and when the leather begins to dry oi: it, spreading the oil on with a sponge, or thick and soft brush. \~he.n Ileat's-loot ~)il eanl10t he obtained, ii.sh oil, if pure, may he usel1. 'flll.S 15 yery good lor preserYing hlack leathers; but it must be carefully ascertamed nol to eOll~aill any siecative matter, as that wouM render it injurious. Ol.her OIls lllay. b~ usefully elllployed, as whale oil, wheu they cl~n be oLlalllell pure; tlus 1" not easily done, uud it is difficult to detect the haull. Vegetable oils arc yery injurious. 0!1 campll.igl1s guoll oils ClU~ rarely be procured; under thcs~ circum~tances It mlxture.ot three-quarters of melted lard and one quarter ot. whale 011 may Le used; It should be spread over the leather with l1 piece of woollen cloth, and rubbed in well.

TRANSPORT OF BATTERIES BY SEA.

'Transports for 11OrsoRshould be prepared specially for the PUl'poS~. T~e stalls should Le, preferably, between decksj never, if it can be aVOIded, In the hohl; and there should be a sufficient number of ports for light aud ven- tilation. ~T.\LLS should be about G-tfeet long, 28 inches wide: tail boards, fastell;ed to the rear po"ts, lllld padded as low as the hough j b1'Cast boards aud stile ~UII rds .Etted in grooves aLont 4 feet from the noor, the ii.rst pad~led on the 11Ilj(~rSIdeallu lippeI' edgej the latter on both silles; the flom's of the stalls set on bl~cks, that tho water may pass under them j fonr slats across <'a:ch floor to gl\'c th.e horses j~othol

TO EMBARK THE HORSES.

If the emharkation Cllli he made from It w1mrf the horses are slung- j or, if the hl'ig-ht of the vessel> side will permit, they dre led by rar.llps to the decl~, awl tht;1l lowered. It the tram:purt cannot lay at a wharf, the horses ale hrullght t~longside in lighter", and transferred by slillgs j the ll"cent aDd llesl'l'ut ot the IlOrso are regulated by two guys, attached to the Imlter j onO to be held on the li;::htm', the o.th?r.on the transport. In a seaway the horseS 11l1,I:the ~'\m '.111 rapIdly ,to ayul(lnlJIlrY. . J he slmg' IS lllal1e of stont canvas, two feet in willth and allOut four III lrug-th, 1101lld\'d Oll the edgoI'sone inch, and hemmed clown. The ends aro sep.tl'll!l.tl by pieces of wood of sufticient strength, to the extremities of which thp ropes are attaclled. Dreast straps \lud breecLing of rope complete the sling. FIELD SERVICE. 43

TO EMBARK. THE BATTERY.

1. The pieces and caissons are brought to the wharf or shore and unlimbered; tue ammunition chests and wheels taken off; each set of implements is ~tr~pped together, the washers and linchpins are put in a box; the harness IS tied and labeIJed in sets. ~l'he forage and battery wagon are unlimhered and the front boxes taken o , as '~'el1 as the spare parts outside of the wagon. All of the chests are to be distinctly marked, so that it can immediately be s~e~ wh?re they belong. Too much 'care cannot be observed to separate and dl~tIngulsh the ammunition of the howitzers. . The place for dismounting the guns depends upon the manner of embark- Ing, as they can readily he lifted fi:om their carriages. In the transport the guns are the first to be lowered to their places between decks; then the carriages, limbers, implements, and wheels; the harness is PI~?ed (regard being had to its preservation) where it may be of easy access. ,ll~c box of washers and linchpins is in the especial charge of a non-com- 1I11SSlODedofficer t The battery w~gon and forge, with their limbers and limber-chests, are s OWedaway hom the battery, but where they will be accessible.

'1'0 DISEMBARK.

When the transport is at a wharf no especial directions are necessary. Generally, the debarkation is in the inverse order of the embarkation. ] At a distance from the shore, lighters are employed, upon whose decks the I.~'ses are lowered; when these have approached as near the shore as pos- S1 ,l,e, the horses are backed over their sides. e of l]ht 1e Shore.battery lllay be landed in surf-boats or flats, according to the nature

h' ~II the face of the enemy the guns should be mounted, and when the boat a;t~ bLuehed, it can be dismounted overboard and hauled up by drag-ropes, 1 t e carriages brought ashore by hand.

IN ACTION, OR PREPARING FOR ACTION.

II )1~1t!I,ose.formations iJ?-buttery in which the pieces 01: sections are broug:ht fi:', ne~esf;lvely on the rIght for ACTIO~ l"RO~T', each plcce should reserve ]ts atte UIl.tIlthe one on its right is unlimbered, and its limber reversed; by not tll ,ell~llllg'to this, the horses become so fi'jghtenec1 as not to bc brought up to t~rece Without difficulty. 01'.1.:,0 Positive rule can be laid down with respect to the caissons in presence g'el;~\~'~I~eln~. Th!s must depend upon a variety of circulJlstan~es; but in 'I'll <~!~t WIll be found expedient to place them under charg-e ot an officer, alltf:~\ J~l ?ont~mn to the 1lI0vell1ent~ of the main bodl' in s~lCh a ma~l~er, Oetil.e~ Tlch thstance, as to enable hun to supply the plCces \nth alllll1UmtlOn ]I: , t I~t which is in the limbers is expended. le1l0' ,) hIlly road, when any obstruction is expected from the enemy, the olll/I~g.gun should always be twenty-fiYe. or thirty yards in advance of the (:UI}II,~' .1l1 onler to leave room for the limber to take its place in rear when it CU]lle! s Ilito action, without the necessity of rulming back tue rest of the llll 'I'h' . 1 b ']]. b' I '. f' '\'ill'd b ]S nng It e aVOI(e(, Jll some cases, y. runnmg tIe plOce 01'- \vI' llt .cases may arise where it would not be adnsable to do so. frOl1}i~u PI~ces are in position ou the brow of a hill, they suould be retired as far as they can be without losing the cOlllmand, in order that the 44 FIELD SERVICE. men may be covered as much as possible. If it is neeessary to place them close to the edge, it should not be done until the firing is about to commence. Should a battery be ordered to come into action to a flank upon a dyke or road which is entirely open, with a ditch on each side of it, the carriages must take: double distance from each other, and the caissons turn so as to bring their rear towards the enemy. 'Vhen the piece is unlimbered, the limber mons near the caisson, and turns its rear also towards the enemy. If the road is too narrow to allow the caissons to change their direction, they remain in the same line with the pieces, and in the middle of the interval between two of them; the limbers do not reverse, but move forward to the caisson of the prcce:ding piece. 'Vhen pieces are placed on the edge of a considerable slope, they may be run down by hand, the limbers backing so far as to allo.w the pieces, when tIle prolonges arc stretched, to fim with effect and command the whole slope. 'rhe pieces should, however, be only run do,,:n sufficiently to effect this pur- pose, that the limbers 11UlY be as fa-,' as possible from the edge, and, conse- l[Ill'lltly, in some degree covered. Should there be anything at hand, the w heels may be scotched; or, if there is time, a small cut may be made acrosS the hill. By these precautions pieces may be fired down a slope so con- siderable that they ,,-ould otherwise run down themselves. Should tllere be any fear of a piece nmnincr forward, when unlimbered for action 011 the brow of a hiil, the ,,-heel shoulcl be locked with the lock-ch~m, prolollgc, or drag-rope. It must be applied to the top feUoe, or spoke of the wher-I. iustead of the lower OIle. In passing a defile or l.ll'iclg'owith the enemy on the other side, anc~ likely to oppose the mlvance, the pieces alone'should move forward, leavmg the caissons to foilow in rear by themselves, In retiring throng-It 11 defile or oyer a bridge in the presence of an enemy, the caisson,; should be sent to the rear; one or two IDay be kept nearer than the others for supplyincr anmnmition. ,The prolon~o s.llOuld''\w generally used when artillery is retiring slowly. \\ hen ,I he rl':u' ot the column retires with the prolonge along a road. cav- alry WIll heSitate to attack it if its flank be secure. After firing, ('ither on drill or in action the bore of the piece should be washed ll.nu the piece depressed. '

REPLACIXG InLLED OR DISABLED HORSES.

The t,eams of the pieces 1!lUst always be kept complete at ~he expense of tho,;e 01 the Clllssons. A (lisaLled horse in the first iustance, 1Sreplaced by the corresponding" oue at the cai,;son 1ca~ino' the caisson to refit with a spare horse alllI the llllrlless of the disaLled one. bAfter all the spare horses have Ul'l;ll u~(~d, those of tlle caissons should be taken in succession, so that they Illuy be gradually amI regularly reduced.

ORDER OF E~CAMPMENT FUR A BATTERY OF ARTILLERY.

I'lates 3 an<1 4 represent the ordinary modes of encampment. Other modes or cOlllbinations of these two arc adopted when the circumstances re1luire. FmS'l'MODE.

In tllis mode tIle pieces are parked with diminished intervals; and the tents and ho~'ses are }llac~ll upon the Hanks in lines parallel to each ~ther elllu perpendIcular to the front, so as to give the encampment a front of tho FIELD SERVICE. 45 S~tne extent as the battery in line. The horses of each half battery are pICketed together upon their appropriate flank. The team of the flank' piece ~ placed at the end of the picket rope in fi'ont, and that of its ca isson next hen come the teams of the next piece and caisson, and so on in the same. ?;der. The horses of the chiefs of pieces are with their appropriate teams. I ~e tl:allls of the other carriages are afterwards picketed in the same order WIth reference to their positions in park, and finally the horses of the officers near the end of the rope. U When two or more batteries are encamped together, the interval between t Ie ~amps is equal to that between two batteries in line j and the captain's ent IS between those of his lieutenants. IN HORSE ARTILLERY the front of the encampment would. be 97 yards, U?d the interval between the pieces 7. The horses of each detachment "ould be picketed after the teams of its caisson.

SECOND MODE.

t Iu tlIis mode the pieces are parked with full intervals, and tIle horses and ieuts are placed in parallel lines in rear. 'When a single line of picket rope ~'"dot SUfficient for the horses, a second is placed 4 yards in rear of the first, s U the borses made to face each otber. The teams of the pieces and cais- ~OUsare placed in the order of their piecel; along the centre of the first line, }uf. thOse of the other carriages are placed upon their flanks opposite tIre /u ~.batteries to which they belong. If necessary, a part of them. are placed O~Ileal't Ie line. of the second line. The horses of the officers are at the extremities h ~N HORSE ARTILLERY, in which the second line is always necessary, the fhlS?S of the detachments are picketed together in their pr?l?er ~rder along i cen~re of that line, and the officers' horses at the extrcmltlCs ~f. t~e same. te .U thiS mode of encampment the intervals between two adJollllllg bat- inr~h<;and the position of the captain's tent are subject to the same rules as 1 c other. tit US,tead of placing tllC harness in lines, as represented in the plates of l~llelPleCeding modes of encampment, it may be placed upon the carriages bri~lcovered by tarpaulins, when it is possible to do so. The saddles and tcutse~?f the riding horses may also be covered by pl&cing them in the 1'1 Ith the men. thl' Ie uumber of lines upon which a battery is parked varies according to co~ l~Ulllber~f spa~e carriages at~acbed; t~e batte!'y of manoouv~'e, which is fronl °l~edInes. of the pIeces and thClr appropnate caIssons, OCCUpylllg the two PART II.

INSTRUCTION FOR FIELD ARrrILLERY.

'1' AC rl' ICS.

BASIS O'I:~ INSTRUCTION.

TIlE COMPANY.

TIlE text applies especially to cornpallies servinQ" mounted batteries. Such ,'ariati(lll~ as are required to adapt it to horse aliiilery are noted, and the portions applicable to that brauch aloue arc so indicated. Iu the artillery, as 110 two men of a piece, canlloneers or drivers,. ~rfol:n: ttlC' sallie dlnies, each should. lie specittlly assignell to that POSltlO11for 'Yhidl he is IJest titled. The mell, whether cannoneers or drivers, arc permanently.' attached to pi('~'cs, and wi~lllot he transferred except by order of the cap tam, or tempo- ranly to C'qnallze dctadllllents on drill or paralic. The eanllOlwers assiglled to the service of It gun constitnte a ,!fun dctaclt- mfl/t, ami arc eOll1l1lamled by the gunner. \Vhen the COIllPl~IlYJSparal~o,d~ dlsllIollllted, the"e detadllllents fall in each 011 the right 01 the mell ot l.t:; O\\'U pieee the cauuoneers taking their places according to their llumbers III tlll'detachmollt. \\"hl'n the ealllloncers and drivers attacheu to a picce arc assembleu in rank Hml file formation, the,Y constitnte a platoon, wlIidl is COllluH1uded by the serge:lllt. who ,i~;eh,iet' of the picl:e. The drivers !'orlll on the le!'t, and the platoon IS dlvllielimto detadlluellts of the sUllle Slze as the gun ltetadl- ment, the mell beillg' IlllllJbered in the same IllUlllIer. Two platoons cow;tirute it section, "'hidl is eOllllnullded by a lieutenant. The CUIII pflny is composed of two, three or four sections, The instruc- tion laid duwll is.appli('a~Jle to either case; but is given for three ~e~t~ow;. \Vlll:1I there arc f,ulIr seetll)~IS, the cOlllIHLUYisfllrthcr dividell illto,dt.Dls.wns, ('aeh cO,Il,'posedof tl\'O SC.dIOIlS,alld COllllllalllled lJy its mnking dllet ?f scc- tll'II, Ihe COlupallY 'nil llUt be nIlLIIQ'.uvrell bv divisio1ls nnless l:ll'l:lIn~- st,auccs,reqllire it, the sediou or plutoull IJeillg iJlC most l:ollvenicllt subdJ- YIS1011 tur 1l1alll~lIvrillg'. .' Th,~.1'(,IIl1jl, he is replal:cd lJy the first scrgcaut. BASIS OF IXSTRUCTIOX. 47

FORMATION OF 'I'HE COMPANY.

. (Plate 5. )- The platoons form, when in line, in the order of their pieces ln park, and touching each other. The two forming a section are desig- ~a~ed as the right and left platoons, according to their actual positions with le1erence to each other in the sections. \Vhen nece-ssary, surplus men may be transferred from one platoon to another, so that there shall be but one incomplete detachment in the com pall,):. which should not be on the flank. .When an incomplete detachment COUi:ilstsof an odd number of men, the vacancy is left in the rear rank, in th~,next file but one fi'om the left, that number being omitted in calling off. . ~o prevent the formation of incomplete detachments, artificers may be aSSigned as Nos. 8; or the permanent chiefs of caissons may be assigned as Wlln,ners to detachments other than the gun detachment, and posted 1 yard e und their right files. \Vhen the company is formed for parade purposes, and it is not desired to ~lallOJ~lvre by detachments, the platoons may be equalized and regarded as . Iens unlt~. TIley are then formed as single detachments, the chiefs of cais- l1 bemg posteu as the fi'ont rank men of the. left files of the platoons. llJen call off ii'om No.1 to No. S, as if divided into DETACHMENTS of el,9 If,lt nlen each. t} ~ he sections are designated according to their actual positions in line, as ] le,nIGH'!', the CENTRE, and the LEPT sections. If there are four, theX are ~leslgnated, accordin

POSTS OF THE OFFICERS, NON-COl\Il\I1SSIONED OFFICERS, ETC.

IlC(.~IQte5.)_ The captain commanding goes wherever his presence IDay be tl~~~sary, or hi:" C(~mll\(ll1l~S hest heard, His position is" in the orWER IN COL' 4 yards III front of the centre of the COUlpany; III the ORDER IN 0llfl lJ~IN, or wllOn FACED BY A FLANR, 4 yards outside the nl'arching fia~lsi, 'J;('lt? the centre of the company. are ~r~hentenants commanding' sections, IN LINE, or in COLU31NOFSECTIONS, OJ,, I YardsA in 1i'ont of the centres of their respective sections; IN COLUMNS Ure9'J. 'I'OONS or OP DETACHMENTS, or WHEN FACED BY A PLANR, they lSpect,Yartlse outside the marching' 11ank, and opposite the centres of their re- lead,lv sections, except that when FACED BY A FLANK, the chief of the l~lJ~. section takes his place at the side of the leading file. is 4 J'~~i:lJ,MN.OP DI~ISIONS, the ~'m.~kin~,c~lief of section in ~a~h .diYis~on kl!('ps It~:'lls III !r?llt o~ the cent~'e ?f LIS ?lVIslOn j th~ o~her c~lIef of sectIOn 'J'b. r POSItion at 2 yards 111 1ront of the centre at IllS sectIOn. of tlt~,lelltenant, chief of caissons, is, IN LINE, 4 yards behind the centre tlte.J'ivCOmPHnyj IN COLUMN,or FACED BY FLANli", be is 4 yards outside of Ullk '1' 1(' ot .H , and opposite the centre of the company. Or 1"A~~~~geallts, chiets of pieces, ',,:hell I~ LINE, IN COLD;\lNOF S~CTI?X.S' SPectiv. lIlYA FLANK, are on the nght of tllO g'Ull detachments of thOlr IC- e 1) atoons, in the fi'ont rank. IN COLUMNOF PLATOONS, or OP DE- 48 BASIS OF I~STRCCTION.

T:\crBm~TS, tlley are 1 yard in front of the centre of their platoons or of thPir gun detachments. f The corporals, gunners, when IN LINE, or COLUMN OF SECTIONS, are 1 yard behind the right files of tlleir respective gun detachments. In columns of platoons, or detachments, they are on the right of the gun detachments. \\'llen the column has a detacllIllent, other than the gun detachment, at ~ts head, the gunner of the platoon to which it belongs will place llimselt 1 yard in front of its centre, unless the chief of caisson of that piece is acting as its tile-doser; in wllich case the latter leads the column. .When FACED In' A FLA~I~, they face with the company, and keep their relative positions. The corporals, chiefs of caissons, are in their l)laces in the ranks as No~. 8 of the gun detachments, or as the front rank men on the left of theil' platoons, or they may be assigned as gunners to detachments, othOl: than the gun lletachments, in the case already provided for to prevent the 1orma- tion of incomplete detachments, The first sergeant, IN LINE, is on the riO'ht of the company, in a line with tlle front rank, and 1 yard from it; IN COLUMN he is on the marching flank, ] ya'd outsille the section or other subdiVision' nearest to him when in line. 'Yhen F:\CED llY FLA~\J{_, he faces with the company. The quartermaster sergeant occupies positions on the left of the company, corresponding to those of the first sergeant on the right, whether IN LiNE, I~ COLUMN, or FACED RY A FLANK. The bug-lers or trumpeters, IN LINE, are on the right of the first s~rge.ant, in one rank, and 2 yards from him; IN COLUMN, they are G yards l~ ~r?nt or rear of the subdivision next them in line, according to that subdIVISIOn iimns the head or rear of the column. 'Vhen the company faces BY FLANK, tlH'y face with it. . The artilieers occupy positions on the left of the company, correspondmg to those of the musicians on the right, whether IN LINE, IN COLUMN, or i-'ACED BY A i.' LANK. The gnidon forlllS with the musicians and on their left, or takes such !)ositiun as the captain IlIay prescribe. ' 'Vhen in the movements or manamvres the subdivisions originally on th? right amI left become those of the left and riO'ht the non-commissioned , lllusiei!lns, amI artificers rellluin with the suEdi~isions near which they were originally fon,nell, anu take correspomling positions in li~le, ~c_ .If, for in- stance, the lme should be formed faced in the OppOSIte dIrectIOn, by a HEVERSE of the sections to tlle riO'ht or left they would REVERSE ut t~e Slllll9 time, and the line would thcnbbe formed 'as follows-from right to left: the ~~tificers, ~uarterlll~ster sergeant, company, first sergeant, guidon, and musIc,mns, the proper dIstances being taken hom the company.

THE BAT'l'ERY. The manamvres of infantry, cavalry, and artillery are regulated by. the same g,eneral principles, but as the infantry constitutes the main body ot a.u urmy, Its lJIOvelllents necessarily control those of the other arms. In tIns ,:'ork the. in.rl~ntry forms of COnlllllL11l1have been adopted tor the artillery U'S iur liS the dltlerenee between the two services would permit. . A hattery executes lIeurly the same manmuvres as a hattalion of mfantry, hut with less preeisiOll, tor its elements cannot be moved with the salllO accm~cy !lS pl.atoons of well instrueted illfantry. In some respects the e~elTlses prescnued for fielll batteries exceed those requirell for the purposes ot war, hut they should be regarded as a study whieh it is advantagcous to exteml heyond its ordinary applications, so that the most difficult circull1- stunee,s I~IllYlI.ot p;esellt al1ythillg that is unknown, or that Dluy lead to the COlllllllSSlOnof scnous errors. BASIS OF IKSTrrUCTIO~. 49 the No rUle~ arc laid down for the application of field battery mau(X'uvrcs to L evolutIOlls of troops of different arms. AltllOUO'h all arms arc O'overncd y the saUle general principles, each lIas an appr~priate code for"'its own ~l;tll:Ct:vres, "'hich is not extended to t~1Cgenera! movements of otller troop~. b Ie best ,and perhaps the only ~~'ay f~r an .artJllery ofi.icer to mmmge IllS . u~tery PlOperly, when llULnmuYrmg 'nth otner troops, IS to undcrstallCl the I.nfantrYand cavalry manmuvres, so that he may at once comprehend the Ci)l}luland of the g-eueral officer, and determine the position w11ich tllC artillery ~.loUld take. No rules can be laid down for conducting batteries to the po,~i- . I~)ns th?,f are to occupy, for the order, gait, and direction of cach battery :1:eb1l10chtiedby the configuration of the ground to be passed over, as well

GENERAL PRINCIPLES. Of;'~e b~ttery of manceuvre is divided iuto sections, each being composed to Wo PlCces and two caissons. The column of sections is not ouly found tit be SUfficient for tlJC purposes of manmuvre, but much more convenient to Ull the column of pieces or half batteries. TIle column of pieces requires 1 10 freat an extension of the battery and too much time for its evolutions. n: t Ie.colUmn of half batteries one chief of section is deprived of llis Com- ti.~~ld, and, When formed at full distance, the depth of tlJC Colullln is essen- fO'~y1 the same as in tlutt of seetions. Moreover, when this column is used ill 11Iu'llcenvre, the pieces of the same section cannot be kept long together do any part of the battery. Tllese objections to the column of half batteries hy f?t,. hOwever, apply to the eight-gun battery, which can be manmuvred sc). J:~lt. batteries without depriVing a chief of section of his command, or 11H\;~I'lhngthe pieces of the same sectiou. Habitnally this battery will be QllJV~~3vred by sections, /Jut when necessary or expedient, it may be man- E IC by half batteries. Jlla aelLpi?ce and its caisson are kept in a fixed relation to each other, and hi ~lfeIY ~Itld~~ ~onst:itu!e a t~lIit.. They are separated onl}' in the forlllatioJ~s gelle ..tf . llns pnllclple sHuphfies themallmnvresgreatly.alld renders lt 1X~(t IY.unnecessary to give separate commands to tJw caissons. ill Ii llot!ce is taken of illversions in any of the orders, either in column, lIdOI~;~dOrin batter)'. The most simple and rapid forumtiolls arc always '1'hc • Vl'cs passage of carriages is used as an elementary principle in the manmu- of 11' l' III tho formations in battery it is iudispensable for changing tIle hont 1;1'()atllll~,~1I.1l1,wIlen executed seasonahly, as a preparatory movement, it aC1 anHllclcascdill ~ l htates gait. all the formations. It may uo executed with tllC same or the ot~~I.leWheel is admitted. The pivot carriage preserves its gait, wllilc ah\'ll.r~C1Sregulate theirs according to their distances froUl it, tllC guide being }{(j ',~ll tbe pivot flank.

Ill'tille~~.l1el'alOrey special guides are used. The chiefs of pieces, and in borse tb al~ ~be chiefs of C~tiSSOllSalso, arc tbe g.nides. of tl~e carriages to ",Ilicb eVer Iii, :lttll.clled. Ana each uecol1les the gUIde of the IlJle or column "'hell llir'rhe ~,cal:nage occnpies the position to which the movements are referred (! ed f~l~tlollar'y COUIIlHLDtl A'l"1'EX'1'ION is Hot embraced among thol;e re a the 1l1 nmuvrcs, but may be used at the discretiou of the captain. 4 50 BASIS OF IXSTRUCTIO~.

The COmll1UIllhof the chiefs of sections are morc numerous, and those of the l'aptain are more frequently repeated than in other t~rms of service, on account of the noise of carriages and extent of command. As a general rule, the CUllnOllCcrs should mount the ammunition chests only for rapid movementsj and when within rm1O'eof the enemy's guns they l'houhl di,mlOullt, ull1css important cousideratio~s require l1 contiuuation of the rapid gait. The explosion of a caisson when the CllllllOneers are mounted ll1ig-htdestroy many men. The three oruers, in column, in line, and in battery, are so established ~s t.o occupy the leust possible space, and to require the least ground for then' tonllations. I n both kinds of artillery, whether in column or in line, the distance hehYccn two carriages, or between a carrhwe and detachment, is Z yllrds. The intervul is so calculated that the colurn~ may be readily form?d into line. The intervals thus resultilw arc different in the two kinds of arttI- lery) 1mt when they manamvre togetller, the carriages of foot artillery take the llltervllls amI distances belonging to those of horse artillery. . In the order in buttery the llistunces arc the same for both kinc1s of mill- 1l'ry: This urder presents an arrangement which the exigencies of ~Vl1r llalJltnally vury. Hut the rule 1'1'qllil'lng the limbers and caissons to face tuwards tll? enemy should be departed from only whi1e firing in retreat. In that lunllutiuu in hattery which roq uires the caisson and detl1eln~lon~ o~ 1101',,0Call1I01Wersto pass the piece, the detachment docs not pass until altel the cai~soll j and the cannoneers do not dismount until the detachment. haS n'a(,~led its place in batterj~. The,first p~ut of this arrangement, ~r~so~trol~l the lad that the passage ot the CaIssons IS It prepamtory step, "Inch :;boul.. be cuml)lctcd hefore the cOlllmand IN llATTERY is criven. The second IHHt 10 intelHled tu avoid the difficulty which would be bexperiencec1 by t1:e hOI:se-. holders ill leading tlICir horsos, l1ud the inconvenienec und dauger ot hl1ltll1~. near. the yiece, aml thus grouping all the horses together at the moment 0 CUllllllg mtll battery. . Two u~o~hods ll

CO;\IPOSITION Ol~ 'HIE DATTERY OF MAN(EUVRE •

. (Plates '1H; 29.)-1'1Ie BA'l'TERY OF MANillU\'RE is composed of ~ix ficl~. p.lec(:s llnd SIX cai~sons, l~roperly manned, horsed, and cquipl~ed.. It 1S SOU\o tl,llles reduced tu tuu~' or ~ncreased to eigllt pieces. The tactlcs IS aoapted clth,er ullmb~r, b~lt SIX pieces I~rc supposed. 1'0 Lach cllrnage IS drawn by tour or six horses and the officers and meU II .itS follows: ' . Que captain, who commands the battery. BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 51

l' Three lieutenants, each commandinO' a section; the section of the junior leu tenant should be in the centre. b One lieutenant commanding the line of caissons. \Vhen ~alf batteries are formed, they are commanded by the two lieu- ten,~nts lnghest in rank. Pl?~e., SIX mounted sergeants, each charged with guiding and superintending a ~,\V{)nty-four or thirty-six drivers, being one to each pair of horses. b SIX. detachments of cannoneers, each containing nine men in mountecl o atter~es and cleven in horse batteries. This number includes two corporals, tl~e of Whom is chief of the caisson, and the other, the gunner, has charge of tt.l gun and its detachment. In each detachment of horse artillery two of I?,cannoneers are herse-holders. I \Vo trumpeters or buglers. ~ne guidon. he a.t1t1 battery is divided into three sections, denominated the nIGHT, LEFT, th C£~'l'RE sections. Should there be four sections, they arc denominated cO~I/t,IGH1" Rl?UT-CENTRE, LE,I~T-CEN'l'RE! and LEFT. sections: A section 110 . ~lms two pICces and two caJssons, and III each sectIOn the pieces arc de- '~~llnated RlGn'l' PIECE and LEF'r PIECE. D\'r,J~ battery is also divided into half batteries, denominated RIGHT HALF 'T/:l~Yle antI I.EFT nA~F BA'f'I'ERY. ...,. lill b , \\ ord PIECE applies to the gun or hOWItzer, eIther WIth or WIthout Its ,},e:',and sometimes to the pi,ece and cais~on togetbe,r. , (It' !le I.nON'!' OF A nAl"l'ERY, III the order III battery, IS the front of the hne 1~Ieces. In all other formations it is tho fi'ont of the first line of drivers. tIle h: RlGII'!' or LEF'l' of a battery is always that of the actual ii'ont, whether 'J'l'leces Or caissons lead. 'rIle INTERVAL is a :,;pace measured parallel to the front. 1'1Ie DISTANCE is a spaee measured in depth, 01' perpendiculaT to the front. t)le ,:,e ~IEASURES of intervals and distances are g'!vcn in yards, and express (Pl~c' - 10 0 )Ject 0 a RIGJIT or LEFT OBLIQUE IS to g'lve 10 car- e:-;~:U!~ tIne.ction inclined 45° to the right or left of the one it had before. In cil,t:!e,~~lg,It ,th~ Je~(li:lg horse on the pivot flank descri~es the eighth ?f a h\)r~e lOSeIadJUs IS 3.:.!5 yards, and then resumes the direct march. 1he Slllllt•S c~IUl?le.d'tohim increases his gait, conforms to his mo\'e~wnt, and re- t1:I\:kf; /e d~rect march at the sUllie time. Tho other horses lollow in the Or kt't. °'1 theu' leaders. The oblique of a cani/we is in fact one.half of a ribo'ht ' \\ Jeel 0 t (PlUlo 'k)' l' ,. {J]lnf;:,;tl "'U: - he PASSAGE applies to two carriages in file, and ltS obJoct is to the r' Ie Icar carriage to the front. To execute it, tbe rear elll'riage inclines by jIIClj~g,llt,passes tlw one in ii'ont, am! takes its proper distance in front l)J eOn Illig to the left. The rcciproeal gaits of the curriages are regulated ( t)Il.t;I~l~I>lds. ~:l!lil; gol:".G. )-1'1Ie object of an AUOU'l' is to establish the cuniao'e on the l~ol','('s \\~)Illll.d,lJutin tlle opposite direction, haviIlg the heads of th~ leading Cle LtOlJ u[ thig t l:e lliutIer part of: the ealTja~e was b~t()j'e. yor the easy execu- 111o,CillOntat all gaIts, and WIllI a carnage of io,ur wbeels, all the BASIS OI? INSTRUCTION.

1.orFoCsincline at once to the right as they advance, and so move, according to tbeir llistances from the pole, u,'l not to interfere with the wheel horses, which really govern the carriage.-(See No. 420.) . In HonSE "\R'l'lLLERY the detachment of cannoneers follows the PlCCC,. which llllnlllces 7 yards after finishing the about, in order that the heads of the leading horses Ulay reaeh the position occupied by the rear of the detach- ment. t .(Pla~e 2~.)- The C?UX~ERl\IARCU applies to two carriages of differeu 0 killds. m file. Its object IS to make them both perform the abou~ an~l t _ e:'ltuhhsh tll?lll on the groun~ the~ o~cupied before, but.in t~e OPPOSl~~dlre\ tlOlI and. WIth the same carnage m front. In perfonmng It the canIage a the front rank executes an about at once, and moves to the place which was occupied by the other carriage. The latter follows the track of the fonner, executes the about on the same ground and takes its place. . (Plate 25.)-There is but one kind of wheel which is that with a mOVIng pivot. Tbe carriage on the pivot flank wheel~ in such a manner as to ut;- musk t~e groun~l w~ere the m?vement. commenc~d. When. the ~hee~d~) llI~<.le"ltlt a sectIOn tront, the pivot carrllv"e descnbes a quad16nt (v. yar 1 _ of l.t circle whose radius is 3.25. 'With a b"attery front the pivot carnage (If scnbes a quadrant (2~ yards) of a circle whose radius is 14.-(Plate 49.) 1 the wheel b.e ordered fr?m a ~alt, the pivot carriage m?ves a~ a walk; If f;s th~ I~Hlrch,It preserves Its gaIt In all cases the marcI~lllg ~VlIlg: le?~ll.ates tho gUlt III such l1 manner as to remain the shortest possIble hme m le~r o~ au l111e,without urging tbe horses unnecessarily. In all wheels the gUlde IS the pivot Hank, and the intervals are preserved fi'om that ~ank. I . for In MOUNTED llA'I"I'ERIES the chiefs of pieces act as gUldes, marc lIUg that purpo~ with the leading carriages. .I 'lel In IlC!HSE. A~TILLEnY they are also guides, e~cept when. the ?:1lSS0nS l~~e. ~~l\] the~r chl~ls are moun~ed, these chiefs becommg t1~egUldes 11~ that~ aro lhe gmdc ot the battery IS that of the carriage to which the mo,ement::; referred. . b t- The ALImo1ENT is made on the drivers of the wheel horses, except lU [l tery, w~l~n it is made on the hind wheels. . thO ]11 glvmg commands the strenrrth of voice should be proportIOned to 10 leugth of th? line. 'Vhen a chietoi section docs not hear the c.o1?r:land~'ielf. regulates Ins movement by what he sees executed by an ad]ommg cll It The cOlllmand ATTENTION is given by the captain at the commencellletc and at each renewal of the exercise; but afterwards it is given only when thinks it necessary to fix attention. Trumpet or bugle sign.fils are used instead of commands 'Yhenevor. th~ cun be advantageously mtroduced. The signals and calls III use WIU found in their appropliate place at the end of tIle work.-(Plates 81 togS • inclusive. ) PART II I, SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

ARTICLE FIRST.

METHOD OF INSTR UCTION.

ll)f tl 14 :rUE object of this school is the regular and progi"Cssive instruction pc' ~ a~tIl~erJTman in his duties at and connected with the piece, fi'om the l~o, o! Ins joining as a recruit. SUpe~IS,l,nstrnction is given b.y the non-commissioned officers, under the '1' IV~Slon of the chiefs of sections. is ~e Instructor should never require a movement to be performed until it to ~~tctly explained and executed by himself. It should be left to the recruit tOt ~(eC the positions, and execute the movements directed, and he should be k cd {Jnly to rectify mistakes arising from want of intelligence. Aft~(~ch movement should be perfectly understood befare passing to another. :00 11 they Ituve been properly executed in the order laid down, tllO instructor 'l'!:llf\'cr confines himself to that order. PUrl e,Instructor allows the men to rest at intervals during drill, and for this ~Ilj/~'le he COmmands REs'r. At Ods command tbe recruit is no longer re- his l~o}~ preserve immobility. At the command ATTEKTION, the 111un takes ('1" SttIon, and remains motionless. inst~.:;tr patience and the utmost precision are necessary on the part of the portrn cto . He should especially endeavor to excite a spirited and active de- too 10 ent at every , and above all not to disgust the men by ng an application to anyone point in the drill.

THE CANNONEER DJS.i\IOUKTED.

ELEMENTARY INSTRUCTION.

nt tt ti 2,e This part is taught to each recruit individually, or at most to four ~lch Oln . In tIle latter case, tLey are placed all the same linc, 1 yard from IeI', Without Leing required to align themselves.

POSITION OF THE CANNONEER DISMOUNTED. t' a '1'1 h I IOnof tl Ie eels on the same line, and as noar each other as t 10 conforma- e:teh othc~?,lllan w.ill permit; the !eet tnrned out equaIlJ', H~l(l forming with On the I' SOI~lethlllg less than a nght angle; the knees strmght; body erect llllhll'llll lips,. lllclininO" It little forward; shoulders square; arms lIanging orpet; pr~ln'Vlt~1 the p~lms of the Lands tnrned a. little to the front; head

OOdy1lj ,Vitl SlJghtly drawn in; eyes to the front; the position of the whole tl side 10nt constraint; when the sabre is worn. the left hund Langs by und OVer it. . 54 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

EYES RIGHT-EYES LEFT

4. The instructor commands: 1. EyeS-RIGHT. 2. FRONT.

At the command RIGHT, turn the head gently to the right, so tl~at the inner eorner of the left eye may be on 11 line with the buttons of the Jacket, the chin well drawn in. At the command FRONT, turn the head gently tQ the front. • The command Eyes-LEFT is executed on the same principles.

FACINGS. 5. To TIlE RIGHT OR LEFT. The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, rigltt, (or left.) 2. FACE. At the command FACE, raise the right foot slightly, turn on the left heel, nnd replace the right foot by tLe side of tLe left. G. To 'rIlE REArt. The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, rear. 2. FACE. At the command rear, nmke a half-face to the Jight, turni?~ on th~ ler heel; plaee the right foot square behind the left, the hollow of It OppOSIte t and :3 inellOs from the left beel. At tLe command FACE, turn o.n both hee S to face to the rOlLr,and bring' the right foot by the side of the lett. 7. HALF-FACE. The commands are:

1. Cannonccrs, 1'igltt (or left) obliquc. 2. }<'ACE.

At the command PACE mise the riITht foot a little turn upon the loft heel, llll~l,dllq a half-face,. andl~eplaco the right foot by th~ si.de.of the left. . . f I he Illstructor WIll take care that in executing the fac,mgs the posltlon 0 the boJy is liOt deranged.

MARCHING.

8. The length of the marc,binIT step is 28 inches; its quie1mes~ at the rate of llU steps l.1 millllte. For th~ elementary instruction of recrUIts, th ll'\idmess . of .the. step. is. r~duced to 90 l1 minute. ~hen th.e ~omllHtlldl J)oulJl(;-~lUlch ~s given, It IS .mc,reaseu to IG5. To exp,lam tLe prmcIP.les .~n t lllee!HllllSl1l ot the step, tbe ll1struct('r placiuO' himselt tl or JO yards III 1101.1 of UUllbeing the men, ue:>cribes un<1slowly executes it himself. He LtCl\ C,Ouullunus: ]. Cannoneers, forward. 2. MARCIl. A!. the commaud !oncard, throw the weiITht of the body on the right leg. At tbe .COlllllllllld ~lAHCJI, carry the left foot briskly forwl1r

TO HALT. 9. The instruetor commands:

1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT. At the command HALT, wbich should be given as on\) foot comes to the grOund, bring the one in rear to the side of it 'without shock.

TO MAllCH BACKWARDS. ] O. The instructor cOlllmands:

1. Cannoneers, bad.wards. 2. MAllcn. t br:A the Command MAHCH. carry the left foot ] 4 inches to t}w rear, then tI lUg Ie cO.IJlInundthe right : foot likewise to tl;e rear of it, and so on, successively, until

1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT.

OtlleI'.A.t tL~ command HALT, brill!!"~ the foot which is in front byv the side of the th;'he instructor requires only a few steps to be taken. He obsClTes that blleIlllen st<:p straight to the rear; I1wt the.y do not hollow the small of the c( .~.L~ thro'\Ving back tlw slwnklcrs; and that they always preserye the Illl lonulll and the position of tlw botly.

TO l\IAHK TIME WHEN MAHCHIi\G. 1]. The instructor commands:

1. ~Iark time. 2. l\Lmcn. bll~i.HIe conmmnd MARcn, bring the heels by tllO side of each other, and hi'" tl the0m cadence of the step by raising the feet alternately, without advanc- e 1 , Until the conmltlllds are giYen:

1. Porward. 2. MARCH. C{l~othc>~?mmand MARCH, B'i'~?~las one .foot is coming to the ground, the ll~lS resume tlw step of 2b melles WIth tllC otLor.

TO CHANGE STEP. 12. The instructor cOlllmanus:

]. Change step. 2. ~L\RCH.

At the Co 1 .I l' • • I ~rolll11 . Illmnnc MAllcn, glyen at t 10 mOll1ont one Joot IS COllllllg to t 10 lllel.J1]> bnllg the other to its side, and step ofr again with the first. Tho Ie thus tanght to take the step when tlley 1mYO lost it.

TO FACE WHEN MARCIIlXG.

13. To THE IUGIIT.-The illst"uctor commands: J\. L Cannoneers, b!!.the right jEallk. 2. l\Lu:cJT. tile ~1~}IOe0l11111und :MAnCIJ, given at the moment the left foot is coming to ll.ew cli:~ll~(~,tnrn the body to the righi, and step off with the right foot in tllO ~tJon. 'vithout losing the cauenco of the step. 56 SCHOOL OF TIlE l'lEl,E.

]4. To TIlE LEFT.-The instructor commands:

1. Canllonccrs, by thc lcft flank. 2. MARCil.

A the command ~r:\Rcn, which is given as tllO right foot is coming to tbo gruund, turn the body to the left, and step ofl' with the left foot.

1r,. To THE REAR.-The instructor commands:

1. Call1l0nCCrs, to tltc rcur. 2. MARCH.

Which is executed as dirccted for facing to tbe right, excepting that the body i" tumed to face to the rear instead of the right.

]G. HALF-FACE TO TIlE IUGIIT OR LEFT.-The instructor commands

1. ClIllllOllccrs, l'ight (or left) obliqllc. 2. MARcn.

At the COlllllland l\L\RCIf, make It IHllf-face to the right, (or left,) and st~p oft' ill the new diredion, with the leg on the side towards which the turn 1S mmle.

17. To IlESU:\IE TIlE I'RIi\IITIVE DIRECTION.-The instructor COUl- mumls: FORWARD. At this command, muke a half-face so as to move in the,original (~irection, and lIIardl straig'ht to the front in the manner prescribed lor the obhque.

MANUAL OF THE SABRE. It;' To show the medHtnisn; the execution of each COll1l;Ill'lld is divi

1. Draw. 2. SATIRE.

At tIle enmmalld DllAW, tnrn the head slightly to the left without c1cra~lg' iug tlie po"'itioll of the bu

This position is the same when mounted, except that the wrist then naturally lalls upon the thigh.

Present-5ADRE.

21. At the command SABRE, carry the sabre to the front, the arm h~~f ext,ended, the thumb opposite. to and (j inches fi'om the neckj ,the b.1ade I'C!pcnuJculur, the edo'e to the lolt j the thuillb extended on the slde of the g'npc j the btUe finge~ by the side of the others.

CarrY-SADRE.

}, 22. At the command SADRE, carry the back of the blade against the lOllow of the shuulder j the wrist resting against the hip, the little finger <>nthe outside of the gripe.

Inspection Of-SABRE.

2 pauses j 3 motionE.

23. At the command SABRE, take the position of Present-sABRE.

t TWo. Turn the wrist inwards; show the other side of the blade, and U!'~the Wrist back. I IIllEE. Carry the sabr(' to the shoulder. tt On parade, the last ilIotion is not executed until the inspector has passed e lJext lilan.

1. R~turn. 2. SABRE •

.A. 24. At the command RETURN, bring the sabre to a present. tIle~ ~he command SAmm, carry the wrbt. opposite to and ti inches from an e~t shOUlderj lower the blade, and pass it across and along the left olll~le tUe point to tllO rear j turn the IICad slightly to the left, fixing the eyes swo/ ~pening of the scabbard j retl~rn the blade j fi:ee the wrist fi"om .tho Hilt! lU-knot; turn tho head to the front j drop the nght hand by the slde, till! ~ok up tllO sabre. This is done by seizinO' the upper ring between the sC'IL1L and forefingor of tllC 10ft hand, back ~f the band up, raising the ll.1;~ )~\'(~, W hilst t~uning the hilt towards the body, until it points to the rear, I aSSlllg the mw over tho hook attacLed to tho waist-belt. 11001- 25. \VIlCn tl~e cannoneor is dismounted, the sabre, when worn, is '\'0" 'eu up. In battories of foot artillor)', w Lon servin 0' tho gUll, the bolt is !II '~i~hout the sabre. 0 lIe Co IllJ1lands:2(). If tho instructor wishes to rest tho men, tho sabre being drawn, .A. Pumde-REST. kllt'~ ~l;e CO/lunand REST, carry the right foot (j inches to the rear, tho left re:,;till~''~lltly bent, tho body upright on tho rigllt leg; the back of tho sabre 1\;l'tll'~ yl tIle Iloilo\\' of the right arm; the Lands being crossed in hont, the At' nl OVer tho rigllt. ural\'1l Ie cOIUllJand A'l"rE~'fIOX, resume Jbe proper position with sabre 'VJI~1l tl . lll':~q, . , 10 sabre 113 not drawn, the cannoneer, at the command Parade- Ill' cr~s't:"Stlllies tile sallle position as with sabre drawn, except that instead '~~/Jg n.IO llands ill ii'out, 110 folds tllC aJ'lllS over tbe cuest. llJeercise1'. Aftor tl10 llJanual of tho sabre has bel n taught, the men will be l In tho facings and marchings with the subre drawn. 58 SCHOOL OF 'fIlE pmCE.

ARTIOLE SEOOND.

THE GUN DETACHMENT.

28. TIlE cannoneers of a piece, when united for the service of t~e gun, or for the preliminary instruction, constitute a detachment, which 15 compos~d ordinaril.y of eight men, commanded Ly thegun~er. .' 2U. A rank 1S composed at men aLreast. a file of men placed ono behind the other. ' , 30. The cannoneers fall in in two ranks ] 8 inches between the ranks, elLows slightly touching, and in such manIle~ t11[1tthey may be told off to the duties at the piece for 'which they arc Lest fitted. This, of cours~, docs not I1pply to recruits, each of whom must be taught the duties of every lluluber under all circumstances. The gUlIner tells the detachment off from the rio-ht, No.1 being on the right of the rear rank; No.2 011 the rig'ht of the ft~nt rank ; No.;:$ on .the left of No. ] ; No. 4 on the left of No.2, and so on, the even numbers beIDg in the front, and the otldnumbers in the rear mnle He then takes post Oil the right of the front rank. The chief of caisson, who, as well as the gun- ner, should be a corporal, is toW on' us No. 8 of the gnn detachment. 'When the detachment is composed of lUore or less than eight men, he should be the highest evell nnmber. \\'Ilell the .chief of the piece is present, and not the instructor, he per- forms t~1C dnbes. and t~lkes tlw position of the gunner, who then takes P?s~ ] .ya~'d III. rear at. tllO nght file, and acts as file-closer, except when the chIC! ot plCce IS out of mnks, whell the o-iumer resumes his post. 31. l\lovCllleuts of breaking band formation are first exocuted from lI. halt, that they may be better understood. The lUen should chang'e mnk, eyery day, that they may become eqnally accustomed to botll, am1 each IllO\'elllont SllOlllJ be repeated by the left after being' properly executed hy the right.

TO I?Oltl\I IN O~E RANK.

The instructor commands:

1. J)~taelllneut, [I'it into single Tauh. 2. MAllelI.

3. HALT. 4. night DIlESS. G. }'I:O~T.

At the first cOlllllHlnd, tlw cyen l11ullbers face to the left, and at the COm" lllall(~ ~l.\ll~JJI. ~t~.p utl". A~ the COllllllOllld1tALT, giveu when the man 01.1 the ng'ht 01 the tront nlllk I~ oppo~ite the left cibow of the lllall ou t!te left of the rear rallk, they all halt and face to the front. At thc COl11l11allllDRESS, the odd uumbers step forward. and all alil~ll tllOlllSelyes on the gllllllCr, who has rcnmined iu his positiou. At the cO~lInand }'no~'l', all cust their Cj'CS to the fnmt. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 59

ALIGNl\'IE~TS.

ard 3 33. To THE FRONT.-Two or more files of the nght are llloyed for- 1.'1 yards and aligned by tho commands Two (01'-) right files forward- ARCH-HALT-Right DRESS. Tile instructor then commands:

1. By file, right DRESS. 2. FRONT. At the command DRESS, the mon moye forward sUCCossiYely, rasting theil ~yos to tho right, as proscribed in No.4, halt short of the line, and dress forwardl1n until stauding sq uarely to the ii'ont, and touching tlw elbow of the 1n. on the right, they see the breast of the second man on that side. Each bxecutes the movement when tho preceding one arrives on the line, so that 1astut o,nefIle IS!ile aligned. aligns itself at a time. The eomnwnd :FnoNT is given when the a d ,34. To THE REAR.-Two or more files arc moved backwards 2 yards If alIgned by the commands Two (or -) rigM Jiles backward-MARclI_ AVr-Rigllt DRESS. The instructor then commands:

1. By file, l'ight backward DRESS. 2. FRONT. At the Command DRESS, each file takes the backward step in succession, ~lasting his eyes to the right, passes a little to the rear of the new line, and l;~dresses forward as prescribed in No. 33. Ihe detachllle'nt is aJiO'ned to the left on the same principles. Ill. 35. Tho detachlll~nt b~ing in li;lC, to dre.~s it .to~'wanl! ~he instructor UplaUds: Ces one or more files on whIch he WIshes to alIgn It III pOSitIOn, and COm-

1. Detachment, l'ight (or left) DRESS. 2. l;'RONT. th:-V.ho ?Om!Iland DRESS, all tho cannonoors align thomsolYcs promptly in '1'1 llectIon mdicated. COn10Inland: detachment is dressed to the rear Upon tho same principles at the

1. Detachment, right (or left) backward DRESS. 2. FRONT.

DIRECT MARCH IN SINGLE FILE. 36. The command is given:

1, ])ctaclmlent, lo igltt (or left) FACE. 2. Column, forward. 3. .MARCil. m th:~ tIle co mand1<'AcE, the cannoneers face to the right, (or left,) and at li'OIlI ~lllInalld MARCH, they stcp off together. Each man keeps his distance 11l1lst Ie one Who precedes him, and rcmains exactly behind him. The men '''ill lllotS t'!1'11their lJCads, nor look at the feet of tho mon in ii'ont, or they lJ10LiooU dV'olded.?dl:'3tauce. The shoulder should bo kept square, and 11 SWinging

37. To HALT, when marchi::Ig by file, the command is giYen:

J\ 1. Column. 2. HALT. 'l,t~l~e seCond command, all halt in their positions. Cteu.tes llstdrnctor will point out to those who hayo lost distance the eYils it ,Uu cause them to resume their Droper places. 60 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE

38. To face to the proper front, the instructor commands:

1. Front FACE. 2. Right (or left) DRESS. 3. FRONT.

At the command FACE, each man faces to the front-by a left face, if the detachment has been faced to the right,; and by a right face, if it has been faced to the left.

CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE. 3£). The detachment marching by file, in single rank, the instructor commands; .

1. By file, right (or left.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

At the command MARCH, the leading man tnrns in the direction indicated without chunging the step; and at the command :E'ORWARD, given as s~)Qn as he turns, moves to his front. He is followed by the others in succeSSlOn, who tnrn upon the same ground.

OBLIQUE MARCH IN FILE.

40. The detachment marching by file, the instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, right (or left) obliqztC. 2. MARCH.

The movement is performed as prescribed in No. 10, the men keepinl? in such position in regard to tlJOse in front of them that tl~e .c?mm~nd ~ OR- W:\IW will cause them to move aceurately in file in the prmlltlve dHectlOI\. The oblique march is prndieed from 11 halt before being executed whIlst marching, the commaJl(ls being;

1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique FACE. 2. Column-:M.illClI.

DIRECT MARCH IN LINE.

41. The detachment being correctly aligned, the instructor commands:

J. Detachment, forward. 2. MARCIl. 3. Guide right (or llift.)

At the command ~L\RCII, all step off, taking care to keep the tou.ch of tho cllJUW to\\'.ard,.;, aml to dress on, the guide; to yield to pressure commg from, awl to resIst all pressure towarus him. If the touch of the elbows is lost, it must be rerrained gradually. Tae guitle will be the gunner, or the Ulall on th~ Hank indicated. 4:!. Tu halt the uctachment, the instructor commands:

Detachrnent- HAL'r.

The Jctachmcllt IS then aligneJ by the appropriate commands.

WlIEELINGS.

43. There is hnt one wheel, that on a movab1e pivot. In wheeling, the pivot mUll de:;cribcs au arc of u. circle, clearing the pivot 18 inches. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 61 The conductor of the marching flank lengthens the step as much as l)ossiblc. th,e others taking steps according to the positions they occupy, and touching 'wIth tIle elbow towards the pivot. The conductor should measure with his eye the arc he is to pass over, so that the files should not be too open nor t~o Close. For this purpose he turns his head occasionally towards tha Elvot; the cannoneers turn theirs slightly towards the marching flank, to ,~e~paligned, yield to pressure coming ii'om the direction of the pivot, and leslst that ii'om the opposite direction. 'When they have opened or closed too much, they will regain distances gradually. commands:44. The detaf',hment being in line, at a halt, or in march, the instructor

1. Detachment, in circle, right wheel. 2. MARCH.

~t the command MARcn, the cannoneers take the wheeling steps. They tUln the head slightly towards the marching flank, taking care not to open Or el~se the files too much, and to keep aligned. The pivot man, clearing the pIvot ]8 inches, regulates himself on the marching flank. The instructor ~hees~h?'t the men avoid all pressure in the ranks, and regulates the steps of e dIfIerent files. After several wheels have been executed, he commands:

]. Detacltment-HALT. 2. Lift DRESS. 3. FRONT.

, In the first lessons to recruits, an instructed man will be placed on the out- sl~e of ~he pivot flank. At the command M~RCll, he w~Il turn Upon his g'1??nd In marking time, so as ,t~ serve as a gUIde to the PI:,"Ot.man. Iho wheel in circle to the left IS executed on the same pnnCIples.

THE WHEEL.

a . ~5. The detachment being in line, at a halt or in march, to place it in POSItIon perpendicular to the existing ii'ont, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or rigltt) DRESS. 5. FRONT.

lIla"Wdhiehisexecuted as in the wheel in circle, the instructor giving the com- HALT When the wheel is nearly completed. Ill. e titu n .th Wheel to theright, when tllC gunner is on the pivot flank, he marks e In turning to the right on bis Own ground at the command MARCH.

THE REVERSE.

faced t 46. The detachment being in line at a .halt or in march, to place it o the l'ear, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment, rigltt (or lift) reverse. 2. MARCU. 3. HALT. 4. Lift (or rig/It) DRESS. 5. FRONT. n ~~i:h is execnted .. pmscribed in No. 44, the detachment describing only COlllpIe~~3~e,and the command HAL'l' being given when the reverse lS nearly

}l]etion4~. In aU 'yheelings, when it is desired to move forward a.t tllCir ~om. '~'i\ltJ.)":"lI~st.eadof the command HALT, &c., the commands WIll be l' OR. GUlde RIGIl'r (or LEFT.) The command J'ORWARD is given as soon 62 SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. a,: tllC defaehment is in the new direction, and is followed by the command fur tlte gnide. All resnme the alignment without too much precipitation.

TO FOR;',1 THE DETACHMENT IN TWO RANKS.

4.3. The iustructor commands:

1. Rightillto two ranks. 2. MARCH. J. Right DRESS. 4. FRONT.

At HIe first command the od<1numbers take two steps to the real'; the eYe~llllllnl.)(~rSface to the right, and at the comllland MARCIl, move forward l~lltll Upposlte the rear rank men of their illes, when they halt and face to the lrullt.

At th~ c~I~lmand Right D1lESS, the detachment is aligned to the ri.ght .. 0' 4J. 1he detllchment having been formed in two ranks, the foregolD", 1l1OYCllH.:utsareexecllted. In wheclillO' the rear rank mCll cover and con- fUrIn t!H.:ir1Il0Yl'l1lC:nfstothose of tlwir 'file leaders. • :)U. When the c1ctaclllllent mardlCs by a flank, (that is, when the men ot oath raul~ are formed in tile) the even numbers are '''uidesj they preserve the prupcr di"tance and keep i;l the diredion of those wllO precede. The odd llI11lllwr,.;tOllch lightly the elbows of their proper file leaders, and d~'ess on tliem. In the changes of direction, the mau on the side towards wh~ch ~he tmll is lnade execnte'''; it as already pre,;cribell; the man 011 the OppOSIte SIde lengthens tit: ,.;tep in turning, and keeps np the touch of the.clbo~v. .I'e In the oiJlUjllr, the lllen on the side towards whidl the oblique IS ma~le a guide,.;; the Illell or tite opposite side reo-ulrtte their movements accordIll.g.IY ('ach following the gui(le ill front of his"'owu, aUll keeping in ~ueh POSltl?U wllh regard to the latter that at the cOlllmand FORWAltD they wIll be abreast, elbow,.; touehilW. In lIl11n:hin~in line the o-uide is the gunner or the front rank mall of th~ Hank ill(lkat('~l; the r~ar n~lk llJe~lwill carefully cover their file leaders, a~.( wh('1l th~ distllllc.e betweell the ranks is lost, reg'ain it gradually. r~'hey WIll Ll~practiced, wlllist lllun.:hing in line, in marking time and changmg ~tev. \\ hen tlwy lose the step, the meuns prescribed in No. l~ are used to regamIt.

TO MARCH BY A FLANK.

51. To TIlE RTGIIT OR LEFT. The detachment marching in line, tho instructor cOUlmands:

1. Detachment, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARD.

At 1he cOlllmand :MARC)[~ each man turns in the direction indicated, und step" ofl'. The mardl in line in the primitive direction is resumed at the commands ~

1. CululfIll, by the right (or left) flank. 2, MARCIl. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide ItIGu'r (or LEFT.)

;)';!. To TilE l'IW:\1'. The uetachment marchirw iuline, the instructor COlllmlluus: '"

1. Ddar.hlllcllt, by thc right flank by Jile left. 2. MAHeu. J. FORWARD. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 63 At the command l\LmcII, each man faces to the right, and the column fhen turns to the left. The instructor commands l<'oRWARD as soon as the e~~ing file has turned. 1 he movement is executed with the left in front at the commands:

]. Detac1nnent, by tlte left flank by file rigltt. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

THE DETACHMENT l\IARCHING BY A FLANK, TO FORM LINE.

Ulands:53. The column marching with the right in front, the instructor com-

1. Cannoneers, into line. 2. MARCIl. 3. Guide RIGHT.

At the COmmand MARCH, the first man of the front rank continues to ad- van~e. '~he first man of the rear rank shortens the step, and places himself tellln~l hun by obliquing to the left; the otllOr men oblique immediately to fi I:left, qUicken the step, and form in succession in line on the left of the rst, each in the rank to which he belongs. The instructor then gives the com!llltnd Guide RIGHT. W lIen the column marches with the left in front, the movement is exe- Cuted on the same principles at the commands:

1. Cannoneers, into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide LEFT. 1'he cannoneers obliquing to the right.

OBLIQUE IN LINE.

54. TllO detachment marching in line, the instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, left (or riglLt) oblique. 2. .MARCH.

l'l~t the cOmmancll\LmCH, the cannoneers oblique in the direction ordered. ~('I/l ma~lof each rank on the flank towards which the oblique is made is the tlJel~: of tllat rank, tllO guide of the rear rank governing himself by that of tou '1IOIJ~, as prescribed in No. 40. The other men, no longer keeping up tho tha~ \ o~u ,the elbows, glance. towards .their gU~de, l1ud keep in ~uc1~ positi~n tjl'lt;l.'h(ll'e(;tion. \.Ie shoulders illay be 1Il rear of those of the next man of thClr rank III C prunitive direction is resumed at the command:

FORWARD.

l)le~~ t~is command, if the oblique llas becm properly executed, the detach- 'vith \\ Il~lllove aceurately in liue iu its original direction. The guide reverts, or\le~~t. further or~lers, to tbe side on which it was wb.en the oblique was l.l::J'''J' ' ~llt the lIlstructor may add the command GUlde IUGUl', or Guide ' at hIS discretion.

TO MARCH TO THE REAR. Sf': 'rl 8tructo1 .u.conlUJo,uds Ie detachment : being in march, in line, or in column, the in 64 scnOOL OF TIlE PIECE.

1. Cannoneers, to tlte rear. 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARD.

'Which is executed as prescribed in No. 15. 'When the detachment is marclling' in line, the iustructor adds the command for the guide. If the detachment is at a halt, the cannoneers are first faced to the rear; unli then put in motion by the coulllu:mds:

1. Forward. 2. l\Lmcn.

"'hen the desired distance to the rear has been gained, the detachment is halted, and resumes its primitive front at the command:

Cannollars, rear FACE.

If, whilst marching to the rear, the instructor wishes to march to the front again, without halting, he commands:

1. Cannoneers, to tlte rear. 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARD.

And, when marching in line, adds the command for the guide.

TO MARCH BACKWARDS.

56. The detachment being in line at a halt, the instructor commands ~

1. Detachment, backward. 2. MARcn. 3. Guide RIGHT (or LEFT.)

At the command 1I1ARcn, all take the backward step, dressing on tho guide, until the instructor cOl1lumnds :

1. Detachment, HALT. 2. Right (or left) DRESS. 3. FRONT.

As this movement is seldom used, the men will not be required to move more than 12 or 15 steps at 11 time.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE 'I'HE RANKS.

57. To OPEN TIlE RANKS, the instructor commands:

1. To the renr open order. 2. MARCIl. 3. Right Dlmss. 4. :FRONT.

At the command MARCH, the rear milk briskly ml1rCllCSbackwards 5 yard~ and halts, each cannoneer a~cur:Ltely covering his file leader. At the coUl IDand DR\';SS, the rear rank IS alIgned to the right. 5tl. To CLOSE TIlE llANKS, tLe instructor comml1lll1s :

1. Close o'fller. 2. MARCIl.

At the command MAHCH, the rear rank closes on the front. . .. 1 c 69. After the foregoing mov~ments arc properly executed \vltlI t J sabres sheathed, they will be executed with drawn f'uures. . .0 tI liV. \\'hen the ranks are closed, at the first part of the command Dr J SABRE or Heturn SAlIRE, the rcar rank murcllCs ullekwunls 2 yards, all , after the lliOyeWcnt is executed, closes again without a command. SCHOOL OF THE rIECE. (35

EXECUTION O}l' THE MOVEMENTS .AT THE DOI'BLE-Ul:ICK.

I 61.. The mo,ements, as prescribed, arc made at the ordinar.y rate of ~O 8teps 1ll a minnte. ",VheneYer, during tho movoment, it is desired to iu- Cleuse their rapichtJ', the instructor commands:

J. Double-quick. 2. l\J.lltCH.

,At the command MARcn, the cannoneers take steps at the rate of 165 iu a llllnute, and continue thom llutil tlw c01lll1laud,

1. Quick. 2. MARCH,

is Aiven, When they resume the ordinary rate of 110 steps to the minute. In 1~ commence tlte movement at tlte double-quid.:, the instructor adds the com- th~Utl' of.douule-quick execl!tion. to the command of preparation, immediately preceding iust?Inetor I~OYe10rward commands:in line, for instance, at a double-quick, fi'om a halt, the

1. Detachment, jorward-double-quick. 2. MARCIl. 3. Guide RIGHT (or LEFT.) This rule is general for the movements when dismounted.

THE PLATOON.

to tll 62. The instruction laid down for the detachment is equally applicable 'l'ltis~ platoon, by suLstituting the word platoon for the ,vord detachment. l' ~nstn~etion is given by the chief of the piece. g-111l~1theInstruction of tIw platoon, the men are fanned in two ranks, the I'll0er On the right; the chief of caisson is the 1i'ont nUlk man of the left file. bered PI~ltOOllis di,'ided into detachments of eight men each, who are nUli- III /'~ 1:1the gun detachment. the le1~.lUIJng, the gun detachment should fall in on the right, tho driyers on

SAllRB EXERCISE.

~\'l'i:st:sGa. 'rho 01)joct of the mouEnet is to rendor tllO joints of the ann and 1,Ill'r(:n':s~?:!)lo;.and as adds to the eOllfidelll.'e of the mell ,rJlCll isolated" Ly 1r it lor the I,., tl10 dexterity, they shOUld 1irst be oxereised at it, as a preparatlOll J';a _I other 11l0tions. 'Vitlj \1 les~on is, t1orofore, commenced and ended "'ith monliuots, executer] ~tl'llet~, (jlllekness proportioned to the pr01vress of the eannOlleor. The in- 1,ol'eoil: t:;~.~,IJ[ll'ticul:l:' attcn~

\Vhen tIle cannoneers execute all the motions with regulari.ty, t]lO instructor requires each cut to be given without decomposing itj the last syllable of a commllnd is the signal for the quick execution of it. All the cuts are then terminated by a half moulinet, which brings back to the position of GUARD. Thrusts should always be used in preference, as they require less force, and their result is more prompt, suro, and decisivo. They should bo directed quickly home to the hody of tho adversa.ry, the sabre being held with the full grasp, the thumb pressing against the guard in tho direction of tho blade. The llarries again,;t the aro tho sallle as againllt the point. . . .u4. The. instructor explains what is meant by right and left Stele 0./ the grtpe, by (!Cree, and by qual'te. TIt~right side of the g'ripe is the sido opposite to the guard; the thull1~ and hngers clow over it whcn the hand grasps the hilt. The left side uf the gripe is the side next to the guard, and lies in the palm of the hand. Tierce is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned to tho right, the nails downwards. Quarte is the l)Qsition in which the cclrre of the bll1de is turned to tho left tbe uails upwards. to • To rest, the iustructor conforms to wlmt is prescribed in No. 1. In tbl8 case he Cl1uses tho sabro to be roturned.

TO OPEN FILES.

65. For the sabre exercise the instructor opens the ranks of the platoon, or forms it in one rank, ~auses the sabres to bo drawn, and conl- mands: 1. By the left (or right )-OPEN FILES. 2. MARCH. 3. Right (or left) DRESS. 4. FRONT.

At the commaud OPEN FILES, all face to the left except the first file. At ,the COt.lllllaml~lAHCII, the men step off together. The se~onc1n.am fro~ the nght, alter Imvlll~ lIlarched 4 yards halts, fronts by a nght tace, anl dresses on the rig-ht f~le, who has not mov~d. Tho others ~Olltinuo th: marchj ~nd, each olle gluncllJ.g over his right shoulder, halts III succesSIOn,. aUl tronts wben ho has unwed at his place which is 4 yards from that 0.1 t!~O man next uehilld hilll. The rear mnk ;nen regulate tbemselves by thClr fIle leaders, and re/llain exactly behind them. \Vhen the third mun from the right has faced to the front, the instructo~ COmllll111USRight I)(lESS; the gunner uresses tbe rear mnk, and the instructor commands FllOX'l'. During the exercise, the gunner superintends the rear mnk. To open the tile.s w~tllOut too much extendinrr the front, the in~tructo~ forms tbo platoon III sll\gl~ rank, or else opens the ranks by lllarc}llng tll front mnk Ii yards to the front, or the rear mnk 12 yards to the rear. lie then conuuands:

1. To the front-OPEN FILES., 2. MARCH. 3. Right DRESS. 4. FRONT. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 67

At the command MARCH, Nos. 1 and 2 move 9 yards, Nos. 3 and 4 move 6 :yards, and Nos. 5 and 6 move 3 yards to their front, and halt. At the thIrd command, each dresses on his own line. 66. The files being opened, the instructor commands:

GUARD.

eAt the Command GUARD, carry the right foot two feet from the left, the he ll:3on the same line; place the left hand, closed, 6 inches ii'om the body, :tnd as high as the elbow, the fingers towards the body, the little finger nearer than the thumb, (position of tltc bridlc hanl!.) At the same time flace the right hand in tierce, at the height of and three inches from the left :and,l de the thumb extended on the back of the gripe; the little finger by the sh . of the others; the point of the sabre inclined to the left, and 2 feet Igher than the hand.

THE MOULINETS. 67. The instructor commands:

Left-l\WULINET. 1 pause; 2 motions.

1 At the command MOULINET, extend the right arm to the ii'ont to its full ~~g'th, the hand in tierce, and as high as the eyes. ~'\Vo. Lower the blade in rear of the left elbow; graze the horse's neck "lttckly,UUARD. describing a circle from rear to ii'ont, and return to the position of

Rigltl-MOULIXET. 1 pause; 2 motions.

it, f I 68. At the command MouLINET, extend the right arm to the front to '\ ,II I length, the hand in quarte, and as high as the eyes. (/I/.\~o. Lower the blade in rear of the right elbow; graze the horse's neck (;lJlcl~ly,AltD. describing a circle ii'om rear to ii'ont, and return to the position of

to b •. 69. To execute the moulinet without stopping, if the instructor wishes eglU by the left, he commands:

Lcft and rigltt-MouLINE'l' 1 pause; 2 motions. If he WiShes to begin by the right, he commands:

Right and left-l\TOULINET. 1 pause; 2 motio11s. of i~either of these commands the cannoneers, commencing from tIle posItion stoPPi~IlD, execute alternately what is laid down in Nos. 67 and 68, without go at any motion.

Rear-l\IOULIKET.

1 pause j 2 motions. G8 SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE.

iO. At the commaud ~IOULINE'l', raise the arm to the rig-ht and rear to its full extent, the l)oin! of the sabre upwards, the edge to the right, the thulJlb extended ou the back of the gripe, the bony slightly turned to tho rig-lit. Two. Describe a circle in rear frl'lm left to rig-ht, the hand as far as pos- sible from the body, Hnd return to the position of GUAIlD. • \Yllen the canuoneers execute the moulinets well, the instruetor reqUlres them to execute several in succession, until the commaud GUARD.

THE THRUST.

71. To execute the thrust, the iustructor eommands :

In tierce-POINT.

2 pauses j 3 motions.

At the commaud PO~T, raise the Imnd in tierce as hiO'h as the eyes, throw back tl~e right shoulder, carrying the elbow to the rear, the poiut of the sabre to the tront, the edge upwards. Two. Thrust to the front, extendiug the ~trm to its full length. TIIHEE. Hetum to the position of GUARD.

In quarte-POINT. 2 pauses; 3 motions.

72. At tho command POINT lower the hand in quarto near the !'iglit hip, the thumb extended on the riO'ht side of tho O'ripo, the point alittlo higher thun the wrist. '" b :~WO. Thrust to the front" e.xtending the arm to its full length. I IIHEE. Hoturn to the POSItlOUof GUARD.

Lf!t-POINT.

2 pausesj 3 motions.

73. At the command POIX1" turn the head to the left, draw back the hand in tierce towards the rig-ht, at the Lein-ht of the neck, the edge upwards, tho point directed to the left. b Two. Thrust to the left, extending the arm to its full length. 'l'lIItE.E. Rotum to the position of GUARD.

Right-POIN,!'. 2 pauses; 3 motions.

74. At the command rO[~

Rear-POINT.

2 pausesj 3 Illotions.

7:i.• \ t the commal\ll POlX'!', turn the lJcftd to the rigllt und rear, hri ng' j he h ml ill quarte opposite to the right sllOulucr, the ann half eX' tl'IHlcd, t he Glade JlOrizOlltul, the point to the rear, the edge upwards. SCIIOOJ~ OF THE PIECE. WO :r • Thrust to the rear, extendIng the arm to its full length. THREE. Return to the position of GUARD.

Against infantry, left-POINT. 2 pauses; ~{motions.

• . 'it;' At the command POINT, turn the head to the left, raise the llHlld bInhercereast of near a man the on neck, foot the point of the sabre directed at the. height of the :~wo. Thrust down in tierce. 1 RREE. Return to the position of GUARD.

Against infantry, rigltt-poI~T.

2 pauses j 3 motions .

. 77. At the command POINT, turn tbe head to the right, carry the Of,t~eband ln breast quarte of near a man the on right foot.hIp, the poInt of the sabre directed at the heIght I Woo Thrust in quarte. TUREE. Return to the position of GUARD.

THE CUT.

78. To execute the cut, the instructor commands.

Front-CUT.

2 pauses j . 3 motions.

I't At the command CUT, r~ise tllQ sabre, the ann half extended, the hand a th~?tlethe above hand. the head, the edge upwards, the point to the rear, and higher f Wo. Cut, extending the arm to its full length. lInEE. Return to the position of GUARD.

Lift-CUT.

2 pauses j 3 motions.

th 79. At the command CUT, turn the head to the left, raise the sabre, th~ ar~ extended to the right, the hand in quarte, and as high as the head, lP~lllt higher than the hand. '1' woo Cut diagonally to the left. HItEE. Return to the position of GUARD.

Right-CUT. 2 pauses; 3 motions. op 0 ,80. At the command CUT, turn the head to the right, carry the hand 1(lrP. SIte to the left shOUlder, the poiut of the sabre upwards, the edge to tho

Cll~~VO: l~xtend the arm quickly to its fUli length, and giYe a back-banded '/'IJ~:'~:-?ut~lly. .. 'l'he ~~",I ts heturn to the pOSItIOn of GUARD. . . • direct tLem• Nos., vertIcally. 78, 79, ana 80, are also used agUlllst IllfantrJ', obsernng to 70 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

Rear-CUT. 2 pauses; 3 motions.

81. At the command CUT, turn the head to the right, throwing bac~ tlw right shoulderj carry the hand as high as, and opposite to, the left SllOuld<.>r,the sabre perpendicular, the edge to the left. Two. Extend the arm quickly to its full length, and give a back-handed cut, horizontally, to the rear. THREE. Return to the position of GUARD.

Right, in tierce and quarte-cUT 3 pauses; 4 motions.

82. At the command CUT, execute the first motion of rigllt cut, No. 80. Two. Execute the second motion of right cut. THREE. Turn the hand in quarte, and cut horizontally. FOUR. Return to the position of GUARD.

L('ft, in quarte and tierce-CUT. 3 pauses; 4 motions.

83. At the command CUT, execute the first motion of left cut, No. 19. Two. Execute the second motion of left cut. TIIREE. Turn the hand in tierce, and cut horizontally. :FOUR. Return to the position of GUARD.

Rear, in tierce and quarte-CUT. 3 pauses; 4 motions.

84. At the command CUT, execute the first motion of rear cut, No. 81. Two. Execute the second motion of rear cut. THREE. Turn the hand in quarte, and cut horizontally. :FOUH. Return to the position of GUAHD.

THE PARRY. 85. To execute the parry, the instructor commands:

In tierce-PARRY.

1 pausej 2 motions.

At the command PARRY, carry the hand quickly a little to the fro~t and right, the nails downwanls, without movin'" the elbow, the 110int inc1med to thc front as high as the eycs, and ill the dir~ction of the right shoulder; tho tll\llllb extcmlcu on the back of the gripe and pressiIl'" against the guard. Two. Hetum to the position of GUAR~. b

In q.uarlc-PARRY. 1 pause; 2 motions.

SG. At the command PARRY, turn the hand ana carry it quickly to the front and left, the nails upwards, the edge to the left, the point inclined to the front as high as the eyes and in the direction of the left shoulder; thO thumb extended on the back of the gripe and resting against the guard. Two. Return to the position of GUAlm. ~CHOOL OF TIrE PIECE. 71

For tlte l/fad-PARRY. 1 pause; 2 motions.

87. At the command PARRY, raise the sabre quickly above the head. ~b~ nnn nearly extended, the edge upwards, the point to the left, and -about I,~ehcs higller than the 1Ian(1.

PO,~ltlOnof1.I~ehand. the is adversary. carried more or less to the right, left, or rear, according to the rWO. Hetul'll to the position of GUARD.

Against infantry, rigltt-PARRY. 2 pauses; 3 motions.

b 88. At the command PARRY, turn the head to the right, throwing -ack th(\ right shoulder; mise the sabre, the arm extended to the right and ~~.arh'the point Upwards, the Land in tierce; the thumb extended on the back ' \ e grille, the edge to the left . .1\Yo. Describe a circle quickly on the rig'ht, from rear to front, the ann J lUllCXtedllded;n h'turn 1 aside h b the b' with the back of the blade, bringing the l' «S 19 I as t e cad, t e POlllt Upwards. lUtEE. Return to the position of GUARD.

Against infantry, lift-PARRY. 2 pauses; 3 motions.

tl C 89. At the command PARRY, turn the head to the left, raise the sabre, tL ~trJ extended to the fi'ont and right, the point upwards, the hand in tierce; UnlO extended on the back of the gripe, the back of the blade to the fro~tl' lIar '\0. Describe a circle quickly on the left, ii'om ii'ont to real', along the bin Ie sLn~ck, the arm extended; turn aside the bayonet with the back of the :l~Je, I'lnging the hand still in tierce above the left shoulder. UtEE. lwturn to the position of GUARD.

THB THRUST AND CUT COMBINED.

thrust 90. 'Vhen the cannoneers begin to execute correctly the above cuts, tlJCll] and parries, the instructor requires them to make the application of b'Y COll1bmedmotions, as 1011ows:

In tierce-POINT, AND FRONT CUT.

In quarte-I'OINT I AND FRONT CUT. Lcjt-POINT, AND CUT. Rigid-POINT, AND CUT. Rear-POINT, J\ND CU1'.

Against infantry, right-poINT, AND CUT. Against infantry, lift-POINT, AND CUT.

CarrY-SABRE. of tile l;k As it is prescribed in No. 22, and carry the right foot by the liido 72 SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE.

9'> "TLen the instructor wishes to form the platoon, he commands:

1. To the right (or [{'ft )-CLOSE FILES. 2. ~IAllCII.

At. tile COlllllHllldCLOSE FrLES, tl10 mell all face to tLe rigLt, (or left,) eX- cept tlle file 01\ \yhith they dose. . At tbe L:UllllIHllId:\L\ltcIf, they step olf to;'"ethor, and eath one fronts III sllcce~sioll~ Ly a left (or right) JilL:e,when he1ll1s closed up to the man who llreL:edcs 11l1ll. Artl~r tlle ranks arc formed, the instructor closes and dresses them. If tbe files 11<1\'eLecn opened to the front, the instructor COlllllll1nds:

1. Close files. 2. 1\IAllCII.

At the command Close jiles, Nos. 7 und 8 stam1 fast, the other numbers face to the rear. At the COllllllUlHlMAllCH, all close on Nos. 7 uwl 8, each in his own rank, nud face about. The ranks arc then formcJ, or closed, and the platoon aligned. scnOOL OF THE PIECE. 73

ARTIOLE THIRD.

MANUAL OF THE PIECE.

b, 93. TIlE instructor should bear in mind that, in every cllangc of num- d~;:'l.at t~lC gnn, each recruit has to learn different duties, and to handle U(~.• ~lent unplelJJents hom those he was previously engaged with; and these, {tI~t'~!f'vary WHit the se,'cral natures of ordnance and machines which au h 1 erYl11an must nse. It is impossible that such a variety of exercises can 1e '~eJI executed, or even remembered, unless the recruit is made to cOll1pre- Cpt .the object of the various duties he is called npon to perform. hI f~1 the,Purpose of inS1J'\lcting the recruit, each detachment is to be fonned 11)0 10nt of the piece, nnhll1bered, and tho diflerent uumoors arc to oe called ll'St.1 n,f sUccessivelJ'' to perfonn their reslJcctive duties in detail', while the

POSTS OF THE CANNONElmS.-PIECE UNLIMBERED.

about 95: 'rhe gunner is at the end of the trail handspike ; Nos. 1 and 2 are "'it! } 2 i?et outside the wheels, No.1 on the right, and No.2 on the left; froll~ I?Wltz~rs, rathor in rear of th0 lllUZZle; 'nth guns, in line with tlJC caLe]Jl'.LrtOf, the~,'heels; Nos. 3 and.4 arc in lipe wit11 ~Le Im~b of the cas- (j ill '. cove1:llJg Nos. 1 and 2; No.5 IS [) yards m rear ot the left wheel; No. chjefle~r of the liJ1loor, and No.7 on his left, covering No.5; No.8, the to'1' the°:'.10llt.tile caisson, is 4 yards in rear of the limoer, and on its left; all ii.tce ltlid l~~.cJ.liefof ~he piece is opposite tLe middle of the trail handspike, out,side 01' left

LOADING AND FIRING.

1i)1' uct~G.01l 'rhe piece is taken at tLo drill ground, unlimbered, and prepared the ell(1 .; the limber in position oehind the piece, and lilcing towards it; 9 of tile pole (j yards li'OlntllC end of Ille trail handspike. COIIII1I') 7i ~Ol\JM.'\~J)l!\G A!\D l'ol!\'1'ING.-The gunnel' g'ives all executivo d\Jlh~s' ~Its III action. He is alliHYerablc tllat all tllC uumoers perform their or aJlJl~olr?~t1.Y. lIe COJ1l1llunicates tlJCorders wllich he receives for tlJC kind ~'o\Jlld lllllltlOli to oe lired; sOlllling to No.6 the time or distance for each 1:-;Klo,~. ":I,IOlifiring slJCl1s or spherical case shot. He should, when the tiring Ilr,(~11{jt:e~ee~hlLt~ac1t fuze is properly prepared, awl maIm such corrections as 1 \\'ltl It fl~.SllJy;ze-gollge lor. this purpose he, us well as No. G, should be provided f!lCIIOOL OF THE l'TECE.

On receiving the command or signal to commence firing, he gives tb8 command LOADj takes hold of the handspike at tbe end with his nght hand, and at the centre with his leftj places his left knee against the left handr bending over it, the right knee being slightly bent j looks over the top 0 the pi~ce, and. gives the direction: He then steps to the breed.1 to give t!JC elevatIOn, which he does by placmg the hausse on its seat, takmg hold of a handle of the elevating screw, drawing back his right foot, bendin~ .ove his left knee, and sighting through the slit in the hausse. In the dnll 0r recruits, the gunner should be made to name the elevation and range before stepping up to the breech. \Vhen the piece is loaded and pointed, he removes the hausse, gives tile command READY, and, stepping clear of the wheel to that side where 10 can best observe the effect of his shot gives the command FIRE. As soo~. as the piece has been fired, he causes' it to be run up to its former place, 11 nccessary . .When the ,instructor, instead of giving the comm~nd COMMENCE FI~IN~~ gives that of LOAD, the gunner repeats it and performs the same dutles I before, except that he does not command 'FIRE until the firing is ordered ~o commence. After the command COMMENCE FIRING is given, the action IS continued by the gunner, without furt.her commands from the ins.truct~r, until the firing is ordered to cease. When the commands are all gIven. ! the in~tructor, as in loading by detail, the gunner p~rforms the same dutles, but wIthout repeating the commands. . 98. The detachment being formed in front of and .facing the plcce, the instructor commences by giving the following explanatIOns: • H W- The term CANNON embraces all kinds of heavy ordnance, GUNS, ? O"e ITZEHS, .MORTARSj each is mounted on a. carriage, and each field carns" has a. limber. .t The term PIECE is applied to the cannon, and is also used to designate 1 in union with its carriage, with or without the limber attu.c~ed. . d' ec- . Tl~e jro"!t of a piecc, 'yhen limbered, ~r prepared for movlll~, IS t~e 1\ is hon III whIch the pole IlOllltS j when unh1T!bered or prepared for actIon, 1 , the direction iu which the gun points' the ri'ritt and left are in each eaSo determined accordingly. ' "". ... of He then repeats the names of the following objects, llldlCatlllg each them. The LIMDER: ammunition chest lid handles; POLE: pole-yok:, branches, sliding ring, pole-prop a~d chain; WHEEL: spokes, felloe , 1Ia/Je, tire; PINTLE-IIOOR, and lay. . The GUN-CARIlIAGE: hUlIdspik,e, pointing rings, elevating screw, hmldlc:;, sponge-hook. :rhe GUN,or H~WIT.ZEH, giving explanations of th,o parts: rhe bore IS the mtenor hollow cylinder whieh reCeIves the charge. The lIIu::le is tho entrance of the bore.' The face is the front plane terminating the piece. :l:he vent i~ thc hole through ~vhich fire is communicate

'1'0 YOUR POSTS.

99. SPONGlXG AND RAMMING.-Undor the command LO"\D, NO: l stands square to the ii.ont, in line with the front part of the wheels, holdl og SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 75 the Sponge about the middle of the staff in his right hanel, and trailing it an angle of 45°, sponge-head up. The instructor commands:

By detail-LOAD. 3 pauses; 4 motions. h' .At,this command No.1 fuces to the left, steps obliquely to the right with IS nght loot, without mOYing his left, and at the same time brings the i.POllg~ smartly to a perpendicular position by drawing his right hand up in .~llOWIth tho olbow. The sponge is grasped firmly in the lumd, and the l'I~I~ll1er-head lwpt just oyer the right toe, the elbow close to the side. 1' I.wo.way He steps obliquely to the left with his left foot, planting it about .l(tlt- Letwoen the piece and the wheel, and opposite the muzzle; bring- 1~gndtho SPOlJge at the sallle time across his body to the left, so tllat Ilis right may be opposite the midllle of the body, the sponge-staff being inclined u:,~n angle of .t[)o across the front of it. r' t lUtE£. He takes it side step to the right of 30 inches, and bending his t Igt1t knee, brings the sponge to a horizontal position, extending the hands llO .~eends of the staff, the sponge-head to the left, the back of his right P~nuIeee. up, and that of his left dO\.':1, the sponge-head against the face of the

IIIl"~un. He inserts the sponge-head, drops his left hand behind his thigh, L lOUd' del's square, leet equally turned out, straightens tbe right knee, und, en lng over the left, lorees the sponge home.

SPONGE. 3 pauses; 4 motions. cIa 100. At this command No.1 fixes his eye on the vent to see that it is Su, sed,. gives two turns to the sponge, taking great care to press it at the 'l~~tlUIOagainst the bottom of the bore. . . . . kne ,YO. lIe draws out the sponge, at tho same tnne straJghtenmg hJS left JgJt j;, and hOnding IJis right; seizes the staff near the spong~-head with his thcPiece ~tucl,Lack of the hand down, anll places the sponge agamst the face of dl~l'l?tEE. lIe turns t110sponge by bringing his hands togethor in the mid- o"el? the staff, giving it a cant with each hand, thrOWing the sponge-head 1111ll ~ ~tt th? same time turning his wrist, which brings the staff llOrizoJ1tal~ e 0 tL1) tftClIdlllg.ler dowlJ. Lis Lunds to the ends of the staff, back of the left up, that of u.tUI~ll')lIgth~ ":1Iole time of spongi.ng, !fa. 1.keeps his eye on the vent. If e 11l1l1llfP,lIl It IS not closed, he WIll dlScontmue the manceuvre, and com- j.'o~ 1 OJ> VEN'l'. u !l " i H. lIe introduces the rammer-head into the muzzle as soon as No.2 tl' '11IIsl'~rtedthe. Crout. charr)'eb , and joins his left hand to his right, casting his eyes

RAM. 2 pauses; 3 motions. hOdy /01. At this command No.1 raillS llOme, throwing the weight of his With tL ItL tho rammer; bonding over his 10ft knee, and passing his left arm, t!OIl Ov e,clLow slightly bent, and back of the hand up, in a horizontal posi- )'!~ht I>lc1 the piece, until it points in the direction of the left trunnion; the l'lllgo isl?lllder thrown back, and the eyes cast towards the front until the cart- 1,\Oule. 7G SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE.

Two. He jerks the sponge out with his right hand, allowing it to slide through tll(~hand as far as the middle of the staff, when he grasps it firmlYi and seizing it close to the rammer-head with the left hand, back of the ,ballc. np, placos the rammer. head against the face of the piece j both knecs strl11ght• eyes to his own front. TIl1:EE. He then draws the sponge close to his body, and imJ?e?iatcly steps back ontside the wheel, first with the ri~ht, then with the left, foot, ,s1' that ,when the right foot is brought to it, the right hip may be on a h.ne WI; l the hOllt of the wlJCel. In drawing the right foot to the left, he g~ves \10 sponge a callt with his left hand, at the same time quitting it, and bnngs. t ,~~ ~pong'e to a 'perpendicular position in the right hand, the rammer-head le~ lllg 011 the nght toe. . . 102. 1<1':AD::-At this command, which is given as soon u;s the .~iecf~ IS loaded, or the fmng about to commence No.1 breaks well off to IllS Ie with the left fo?!, bending the left knee, ~nd straighteniJ~g the right l~g, drops, tile e~d ot the sponge-staff into the left hand, back of the hand dowl1, and flxeil lllS eyes on the muzzle. The IJ(:e]sshould be parallel to the wheel, the body erect o.n the IJaun,e~e~. aud the sponge and rammer held in both hands in a honzontal pOSItIO , sponge-head to the left. t . The piece Im,iug: Leon fired, No.1 rises on his right knee, and returns 0 LIS position, as in the third motion of HAM. .., me At the COlllll.HllJU LOAD, he steps in and performs Ius dutICs III the sa manner as before. b's , . 1O:J. 'When the loading is not by detail, ~o: 1 goe~ through all ~s (luhes at the command LOAD j returns to his posItlOn outSide the wheel, 1 gi ....en in the third motion of HA~I' breal,s off at the command HEADY, (1U~ at the flash of the gun rises, step's in and performs his duties in the ~a.J1~. lllUnneras Lefore. This he continues until the cOlllmand CEASE PIR(~~' ~~ gi H'n,. at which command he resumes thc position: To YOUR l>OSTS: ~f t I'l'0nglllg ltas Leen connnenced when the eommand CEASE FIRING IS gnreu, it is comple.ted before No.1 resumes his post. .. fl'C In ..:pongl.llg. and ramming, if tlle length of tlJC pi?ce reqmres It; the :"p~Ilbls

a.nd J

REMARKS O:"J THE DUTIES OF NO. 1.

" .104. The position of Ute left foot will not Le conSIdered as ab~ol.11t~f: It IS gn'eu as the lIsllal olle, and lllay be modified according to the cahble lO the piece allli height of the man. The sallie remarks will apply to t ~\1 d~sttance from each other, as WIll enable the man to per/onn hIS dutICS'\ J the, most ease allll steadiness, allll at the sallie time exert Ids full strengt:~ wlndl will always be rClluired after firing a few rounds, especially wheu new Spollge is useel. ?I~e oL.iec~(If joinin~ tL~ left 11~nd to the right, and casting the e~':-\l\~ the: 1,IOIItwhJ~st J'Ummlllg, IS,to refuse the right shoulder, l1nd to ~eCll~e,lhef object the left halld, \\"hell It ]lasses oyer the piece, is not earned hut. 0 bac,k t~lU~,the (~irecti?~ illdicated. This will keep the shoulders in 0: l~~o pILI

To YOUR POSTS. os~~tHthe command LOAD is given, 0' fo, No. I, No.2 mmains in hi' gb!" IOn. On this command boing givon, ho facos to his right, and by two see lque steps, corresponding to thoso of No.1, tho first WIth the 10ft, the lhu??d at the command Two, with the right foot, lIe places himself near the the z~le of tIle piece. At the command THREE, ho brings up his 10ft foot to reee ~Ide of the right, and faces to his right, bringing his hands together to left ?e the ammunition from No.5, the cartridge in the right, the shot in the Puts l~fd. As Soon as the sponge is Withdrawn, he faces to his loft, and ('art,' Ie ammunition into the muzzle, taking care that t110 seam of the 'Vith~dge d?e~ not come under tho Yont, and tben steps back, commencing ~oA I ~sOes.lett foot, to his position outside the whoel, in the same manner thgt foot t the ~onllnand READY, he breaks well off to his right with the right On tile b~ndl1Jg the right kneo, and straigLtening the left leg, the body erect '1'l lO )~unches, and fixes his eyes on the muzzle. Pieco l}J?co haVing been fired, No.2 rises on Ilis left log, remains facing the thel untJ! he hears tbe command LOAD, or obsorves the flash of the guu, l"lIt;~steps iu and performs Lis duty as before. ~t the c0ll111~and C.EASI~ "\v:' G he takes his position outside tLe wheel andiaces to the,iront. ag'ai~:h the howitzer, No.2_puts in tho, charge so that the fuze may rest t t~o ramlller-head, and No.1 sets It homo carefully. Of th l?G. SERVING THE VENT.-The instructor places No.3 on the right '1' 0 PIece, indicates the follOWing objects, and explains their uses: 1<'ltl~~r.'POUCII; 'l'uulVIllSTALL; PRIl\lIKG WIllE; GUNNERS' GUlLET; C(lSCQb:lO~PRIMER ; LANYARD: lanyard Iwok ; VENT: vent jicid; BREECH: ' inob, and neck of cascabel. He then Commands:

:N" 3. To YOUR }>OSTS. priJl)~;)e st,an~slfe in line "'ith the knob of the cascabel, covering No.1, the tb leftg'tt III his right hand, thumb throngh the riug, the thumbstall au LO'\Il lUlllb, the tube-pouch fLlstened to the waist. '. theow th '-At this command he steps to his loft, .wipes the vcnt-tic!d Wlt,ll e1h 1~,I~lbstuI!,which he then hOlds pressed upon the vent, keepmg IllS l{1l111Iel~~~sed!Ilisfingers 011 the left side of tho piece, so as to allow. tho tJ~oIlioco ,~}OIlltOVerhis thumb; ~he right Ital1d on tho tnb?-pouch. W Iron (1/ the t', !;; SPOnged, and the charge inserted by No.2, he .Jumps to tLe en,d to tile 1',',11,1handspike, and, seizin')' it with oath hands, prelJarcs to move It trail jo/~ltIt Or lett, ou a signal tfom the guuner, who taps the right of the ,lIl(~,I-i"'ht movoment to the Jen., and tho left of the trail for a movement to ,I "'11{1~t1 t ,:s ;;oun as the piece is pointed, t1lCgunner raises both haucl:; as ' 1~I~l\Il\'~-=-11lr 0, :3,,Who tlWll resumes tLe positioll T? YO[JI~ POSTS. . t.1k ., c', At tIllS command, he steps 111 to the pICCO,pncks the cartrIdge, Il~ /o;O~1 :l~e not to move the charge, uucI oo,'ers tho vout with his left hand th~i!ror 'tl the tnue is inserted. At the command FIlm, he stops to his right, "'el'Vesve~~ Wheel, and at the flash of the g'Ull, or at the command LOAD, e .No.a Ilho as UcI'orc. . lJ.lOl'ljtheUl

IOi. Fmnw.-The instructor places No.4 on the left of the piec~, equips him ,,,ith a tube-pouch, and repeats the nomenclature as for No.3. He then commands: To YOUR POSTS.

No. <1 stands in line with the knob of the cascabel, and covering No.2. f LO,\D.-At this command, No.4 inserts the lanyard hook into the ring 0 a primer, and stands fast. HEADY.-At this command, he steps in with the riO'ht foot, drops the tube in the vent, takes the lanyard in his right hand, mov~s to the rear so far a~ to keep the lanyard slack, but eapaLle of being stretched, without altel- ing hiS position, which should be clear of the wheel, left foot broken to the left. and rear. FlllE.-As soon as No, 3 is clear of the wheel, No.4 pulls the la?yard briskly and firmly, passing the hand, back up, in a downward directl.on to the rear, so as to keep the lanyard hook hom flying back in the directIOn of the face. Should the tube fllil'to explode the charO'c, the gunner immediately commands, Don't advance, tlte primer Iwsjailcd.b Upon which No.2 stepS inside the wheel, close to the axletree, receives fi'om No.3 over the wheel a. p:'iming wire, amI from No.4 n prepared primer, pricks, prin,res, and resumeS hIS post. At the command CEASE FHtnw, No.4 secures hIS lanyards. h ] 08. No. :3, as well as No.4, should be equipped with 11 tube-pouc , furnished with friction primers and lanyards. In the absence of No.4, immediatel v arter ]H"ickinO' the cartridO'e he prpI)ares and inserts a tubC , t steps to his.J post, faces theb vent, Lreaks" to, his rear WIth. theI eltc. ~oo • t ,and!1 d the commlLlHl FIRE, discharges the piece. He then resumes hIS post, au tends the vent as Lerum. . ]09. SEIlVIXG Al\DIUNITJON.-The instructor stations No.5, covenuft t~lClert wheel, ;) yarJ~ in r~ar ot: it, and No.7 .in rear of and ne~r the liro hlllber ,~'llec\; No .. G IS st?'tlOne~ 11l re~r of the lunber chest, and Issues t d allllllUIIJtlOt1. He IS IWOYldcdWith a fuze-gouge, and prepares t]~e shell. ao .• sphencal case shot accordinO' to the distance or time ordered, before delI vel ing it to No. G. b To CUT TIlE FUZE.-Place the projectile between the knees, fuze upper~ most, m:d support ,it with the left Illtn'd. Holding the fuze-g:ouge i!1 the n~~i. llU1H.l,place the lelt corner of its edO'e close to, and on the TIght of, the ~Ii uated mark illllicaling the time de~ired; then cut away gradually until t 10 composition is exposed fur a lenO'th about equal to the width of the. gO?~e~ Great care lllU.st be taken not"'to expose the cOlllpositio~. to the left?t t;o proper graduatIOn mark, and, to this end, particularly aVOId commcnczng d wt too close to the Llesired mark; for after the composition is once expos~Y' it is ver.y easy. to pare n~va~ t? the left, if the time has no~ ~cen accnn~lC of cut. '~' lien lIme p,enlllts, It IS well to expose the compOSitIOn fully, elt~lt. by cuttlllg tile openlllg larger, tuwards tlte ritFltt, or (witll sllells only) by C\o ting anotller openillg to the right of the fir~t. It is in all cases better enlarge the first openillg, and always by extcndiug it towards the right.~ r Care must ue taken nut to cut the fuzes 1110rerapidly than the demand 0 shells amI shrapnell shot requires. I • At}he C~)IlII~ll1ll(~LOAD,No. G nlllS to the ammunition chest, receiv?s :ro~1 1'y, '.or i'\o. G .a ::illlgie r~lllllI, the shot in the right htLllll, the ~.aJ;t:J.'ld~c,11 1:ls lelt; takes It to the plCce and delivers it to No.2; returns lLl1lnedlI~t~(_ !or anot her round, alllI then halts at his post until the piece is fire? In tv. mg shells /)1' spherical case, he exhibits the fuze to the gunner befofe de I crillg the tharge tll No, :!. l(t 'Vhell ull:lIIunition pouehes are used they are worn by Nos. G and 7, hU~t frOlll the left shou!uer to the right sidej the round. is placed in the poncll SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 79

No.; Or No.7, so that the cartridge will be to the front. 'When it is brought h~ 0.5 holds .open.the p?uch, and No.2 takes o.ut tIle round with both I nds. In rapId firmg wIth round shot and callister, Nos. 5 and 7 may r. t?rnllte in delivering the charges to No.2, especially when the ammunition s IS:'3ueddirect from the caisson. At the command CEASE FIRING. No.5 carnes the round back to No.6. . cJo~o. 6 will be c~reful not to. raise the lid unnec~ssarily. It should be kept ft .sell wh~n possIble. In finng shells and sphencal case, he pI epares each t ,IZG as l~Irected, assisted, when necessary, by No.7. He gives No.5 the l;::l~ebol~(~lstllJ!.~e o~' th? fuze with each round is:med, who reports to the gun- fUll ~foie dellvermg It to No.2. At the command CEASE FIRIXG, he care- Y leplaces the ammunition in tllC chest and secures the lid. 1'0 110. LOADING BY DETAIL.-For the instruction of recruits united g{~he ser .. ice of the gun, the exercise is conducted by detail, the instructor 'rl~lDg all the commands. His commands are: Load by detail-LOAD; " 0, 'I'IIRJm, {<'OUR: SPONGE; TWO, TnREE, FOUR: RAM; TWO, llI!t.EE: I~EADY; PIRE; CEASE FIHING. OU~VJl(JU.themen ure sufficiently instructed to go through the manual with- Co eta,I1, the commands of the instructor for that purpose, are: LO.1Dj C/\ll\JE~Cl<: PIRINGj CEASE FIRING; or simply COMMENCE FIRING and ti!J;ASF;PIRING.le After the command CO;UMENCEFIRING, tllC action is con- l"ru ? ll:" laid down for loading without detail, until the command CEASE LNG IS given, which is repeated by the chief of the piece and the gunner.

MOVING THE PIECE BY HAND.-PIECE UNLIMBERED.

111. 1'0 THE FRONT.-The instructor commands:

t 1. By hand to tltefront. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 1 1 ~Le first Command the gunner seizes the end of the handspike, and Nos. a' '~~i'and 4, the spokes of the wheels-No.1 with his left hand; Nos. 2, iit'lft' ( 4, .with both hands; No.1 holds the sponge with his right hand, the O C IIJlll rest1llg upon Ids right sliOu1der, sponge-Lead down. At the second COllll1 ~l1U they move the piece forward, the gunner raising the trail until the 1,ltlU HALT is given, when all resume their posts. ll~. '1'0 THE REAR.-The instructor comnlunds:

1. By hand to tlte rec:.r. 2. MARCIl. 3. HALT. "i~,t I~\': COmmand. 'he gum .. ,. {""iug to the rea,. seizes the.handspike at .,'s, th }{ s nght hand: Nos. ], 2, 0, and 4, seize tllC wheels as before, except J\.tethe~ 1 holding the sponge in his left hand, uses his right at the W!l~eI. tL tr4') oum.land .MARCH,they move the piece to the rear, the gunner raIsmg I, Hnbl the command HAL'I' is given, when all resume their posts.

CHANGING POSTS. itlstl'llC~I~' In order to instruct the men in all the duties at the piece, the 1"01' th' causes them to change posts. IS Purpose he commands:

1. Change posts. 2. MARCH. o J\.t the e Ie I' ul" C~ll101and Cltange posts, t110 men on the right of the piece face to ' lOse Who have cquipll1ents lay them down j No. 1 resting the 80 SCHOOL 01" TUE PIECE

sponge-head on tllC naye of the wl1ee1. At the command M....ncIl, each man takes the place amI equipments of the man in his ii'ont.

No. ] takes the place of No.3. No.3" " of No.8. No.8 of No.6. No.6 of No.7. No.7 of No.5. No.5 of No.4. No.4 of No.2. No.2 of No. 1.

. The gunner clJ(m~es with one of the numbers by special direction of the mstructor. A suffiCIent number of the most intelligent cannoneers must uC kept instructed to serve as g-unners. . ll:l. EQ.uIl>,l\1EN'l'S.-Th~ gunner WllO is responsiule for the eqmp; ments, CltllCr dlstnbutes them hom the limber chest, or they may be hUll", on the neck of tI~~cascabel, and distriImted by Ilim to t}le proper ~uml)ers, at t~1C commUlHl 1.\1\..\0: EQljIPl\IE~TS, from the instructor. He r~ccr\'~s.theuf- agum at nle commanJ REPLACE EQUlPl\1E~'fS, makilJg such dlSpOflltlOn 0 them as muy be direct ell.

LIMBERING.

11;J. To THE FR01\T.-Tlle instructor designates the following parts of the carriage: STOCK: trail, trail handles, t-rail-plate, lUllctte, wasltefi hook for Itaudspike, lllrffe pointina ring small point-ing ring, sponge al~ ,..aU1l11c~stup, sponge-ch~in and Ita~p, ear~platefor sponge-chain hasp, Itall" spIke Tlng, sponge-hooh. lIe then commands:

LIMBER TO TIlE FRONT.

At tll,is commfill~}, No. ] steps up between the muzzI~ 1111.d.the.wII~eI, b~ the oblique steps ))Hlicated for loadino" turns the staff, SCl:l.lIlgIt \nth tll t left hand, at the sallle time s!tif'tiJJo' lliso ;'iO'lIt the back of tIle right up, ll1a ' tl I' ] , to ' 0 , I' I} to the ot le et! (OWlI, and pa~ses the sponge on its hoo \:, ntllllller- lea( . .-.t rear, to 1\0. 3, who receives the head secures it against the stop, ami ],e) s I. ~IP,. ~rhe piece i.s thell Lrought aL~ut hy the calln?~eers! amI the li))l,lJ~l~ mellllll1g to the ngIlt, passes to its place in front 01 It, hOlng drawlI, "It, l' it is not hursclI, hy Nos. ti u1Il17, who take hold at the end of tIle pole jo the purpose. 1 To bring the piece abonl, the gUIlTIer and No. G pass to the rig-ht of t \C hUlll1:;pikl', llll(l, JtlcilW towards the left seize it tIIC gUlIJler lll~ar the CUI i amI l' o. ;) at tIll: miJdlc, and Oll Ilis rio'ht mise tllC trail lIml carry it rOlll~1 to the It:ft i 1\os. ] allli :! Lear dO\\'lI °Up'Oll the 1ll1l:l.zlu,and 1\ os. ;: aJld I ~ l'ach \bill~ both llamls, bring' the wheels rOllllel j No. ;; tumillg' tIle ng ,I ",hed to the rear, llml 1\0. <1 the left wheel to the frollt. ,Vhen the piece IS hrollg:ht abullt, the trail is Joweretl i 1\os. ;J am} 4 step within the \dleds t~ ll;'oi:' the lillllwrj 1'\os. ] alll] :! remain at the lllllz;'.1c, and the gunlJ(~r HIt 1\0. :),s~e'p lJetweell ~os ..;~antl.4 and the trail, the g-unller iirst taking Ollt t JV hand"lllkl', and passlllg' It to 1\0.4, by whom it is put up. _' As SOOll liS the lilllber is ill frOllt of the piece, the g-unner comlllalld,.~ ll:\L'l'-LI.\~J:Ell uP; upon whieh the lilllber halts, the gunner lInd NO;l'~ r~l\se the tl'lul ~)y means of the hallllles, aIllI, assisted by Nos. :~ami ,'1at "J whee!:;, and 1\os. 1 awl~ at the head of the carriage, run the picce forwlLl , SCHOOL OP THE PIECE. 81

~nd place the lunette Upon the pintlej the gunner then puts in the key, alld ,tll take their posts; when necessary, Nos. (j and 7 assist at the trail in oring- Ing the piece about, and in limbering up. 116. To THE RIGHT, (or LEFT.)- The instructor commands:

LI:\mER TO THE RIGHT, (or LEPT.) tJ ?:,here trail is turned to the right, (or left,) and the piece limbered up as .et10 ; the limber inclininO' to the right, (or left,) and taking its place bv a 1"lgIt (or left) wheel. b " 117. To THE REAR.-The instructor commands:

LJ:\IDER TO THE REAR. t1 :}le, limber inclines to the right, and takes its place by wheeling about to e eft, and the piece is then limLered up as before.

POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS.-PIECE LIMOERED. leu ],]8. Nos. ] and 2 are opposite the muzzle; Nos. 3 and 4 opposite the au.ol~ ot the cascabel; the gunner and No. [) opposite tIlC rear, and Nos. 6 op d ',Opposite the hont parts of the limber wheds: No.8 is on the left, and e'e rt'lte the limber chest of the caissou. All titee to the ti'ont, and Cover tt lather in Jines I yard ti'om the wheels, the even numoers on the right, lJ.~~oeMnumbers on the left.. 'fl.lC duet' of ~~e piece is ou .the left, and, if ilJ.f)o~l~?Il11ted,opposite the end ot the polo; It mOlluted, he IS near the lead- o lIver, and on hIS left.

TO FORM THE DETACHMENT.

119. To TUE PRONT.-The instructor eommands : DETACIlMENT-PRONT. 1'he gu hers In . nn.er commands: Cannonecrs, fon;;ard-~IARCH; the even Ullm- of tho o~e ehrectly to the frontj the odd numbers closing on them wllCn clear .ttJo the Pleee.per The gunner files them to the Jen, and frOllts the detac1lment tl '1'ueroUchUlentdistance. No. 8 lllove,~ directly forward and takes his place in o 'l'1I~ llE:\~l. The instructor commands:

1'1 DE'l'ACIUJENT-REAR. tllflllJefrf"tnner cOmmands: Cannoneers, rcar }o'ACE-~IARCJT. At the eom- clu,~itlg ,\HCIl, the odd ullmoers 1Il0\'e dil'Cctly to the rear, the eveu IlLllllbers ~iKtulJe,oll0 them, and the detachment is filed to the left, halted at a propel' lljIII thef l.I.etaclVJlent.,1 ly tho g'llnner, and faced to the fi-out; No.8 taking his proper place tile l'j(~::ILllg detachment,; in liue, they are always, after haltiug, dressCtl to o y tho gunner.

POSTS OF TilE DETACHMENTS AT THEm PIECES . •}'ltrd~ I~;I~'IN' FRON'l'.-TllC detachment is in line Jilcing to the ii'ont, t\\"o IN Ill,: \I~ th~ end of the pole or the lead horses. Itlll! fUeil'lf>.-the centre of tllC detachment is h\'o yards beLind the llluzzle O~ 'I'll t> to It.

E 6IlIGU'l' OR LEFT.-The detachment is in line opposite the limber SCHOOL OF THE PIECE, ltxlotree ana tln'ee yards from it. In horsc artillery it is in line with and th:e" y:.nt1s from the Ip.ading horses. In all cases it faces to the front.

CHANGE OF POSTS OF DETACHMENTS AT THEIR PIECES. ]21. FRO:'!I FROXT '1'0 REAR.-The detachments being in line in fron of their pieces, to post them in rear, the instructor commands:

DE'1'ACIDIENTS-REAR. The gunner commands: Cannoneers, rea1' FACE, },lARCII. At the com- mn.mll\L\RclI, Nos. 1, ~, :3, and 4 oblique sufficiently to the left, and Nos. 5, G, 7, and 8 to the right, move along the sides of the piece, reunite a~ so~u ag t they have passed it, and are halted at the proper dist:lllce, faced to the tron , and aligned to the right by the gunner . .FIW~I HEAr<.TO I"RONT. The inl;tructor commands: DETACHMENTS-FRONT. The gunner repeats the command, and adds MARCIL At tbis command the c.annonecrs oblique, Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4 to the left, Nos, 5, G,.7, andS to the nght, pass their piece, reunite in ii'ont, and are halted and aligned to the nght by the gunner. FRD:\I REAR TO lUGIlT (or LEFT. )-Tbe instructor commands: DETACHMENTS-RIGHT, (or LEFT.) The gunner commands 1'ight (or 1cft) obliqne, MARCH, ~nd afterwards ~OHWARD and HALT, in time to bring the detachment to lts post on the ngbt orleft. TIe then aligns it to the right. 1'5 122. Ix ~IORSEAR'l'ILLElt Y, to clmuge from front to rear, the gUl1ue'r command: Lcjt rcrersc, MAllCll: FORWARD, Lcft 1'cvcrsc, "MARCIl; HAL. ~ Fn.ml REAlt T? FIW~T.-The gunners coulll1atiu: Wght oblique, MArtCIl, :E OltWAIW. LcJt obluluC MARCH' FORWARD j HALT. Flw:\[ ItI::AItTO JUGl['~, (or LI::I':T.)-The gunners command: Right (or lcfq obliquc, l\Lmcll; FORWARD; HALT. .' l' l' IW.\1 lWillT (or LEFT) TO REAR.-The gunners command: RIght (?, left) rccersc, )LmCH; FOltWAIW, Rirrht (or left) TCccrse, MARCil; lLi\J.,l" If tl ., . I I I" . . I 1 tl . ner h'll!:; Ie JlICce IS 1ll0\"lllg W lOn t Ie c lunge ot post IS on eree, 1O g:uu . "t) or slaekells the pace until it 11asses, and theu commalllls: Lcjt (or rtg I obliquc, ~L\JtCll; FORWARD. 1 The cOllllllanus of the imltructor are tbe same as in foot artillery. 'f ~o monments are executed in the same IDauuer when the detachmeuts Ulo dismounted.

TO POST THE CANNONEERS AT 'l'HH I>IECES LIMilERED. llt ]23. The detachment being formed in line in front or rear, on the rig or left, the iUl;tructor COllllllaUUS: CANNONEERS, '1'0 YOUR POSTS.

.FHO.\l TilE FRoNT.-The gunner faces the detachment to the right., 1t~1(~ cOlllmalllb: Tu yuur pusts, ~lARCll. At this COlllll1l1ud,the canuoneers, NO~"ir and :!, tnrning to th.e right, ltn\l opening out, file to their po:;ts, hult ~~tt C proper places, and lace to the tront. . '1'(1 FRO.\[ TIlE ItEAH, ltIGllT OR LI::F'l'.-At the commallli CANNONEl':~S,. It! YOUlt POSTS, the gunner, in each case, ii1ces tho detachment to the left, ,\1 marches the cannoneerl; by that fillonk to their posts. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 83

MOVING THE PIECE BY HAND. PIECE LIMBERED.

124. 1'0 'rIlE FRONT.-1'he instructor commands:

1. FORWARD. 2. l\LmcH. 3. HALT.

I At the first command, Nos. G and 7 seize tllO end of the pole 'with ooth I~nds;one the gunner and No.5, facing toward,,; the pole, seize the splinter bar ;jItll. hand and the pole with the other ; Nos. 3 and 4 seize the spokes ot 1)~?.lin~l wheels with both 1Hmds; and Nos . .1 and 2 apply both hands at the ~ad ot the carriage. At the second command, all acting together, urge the POlStS.lJIece forward until the command HALT is given, when all resume their

125. 1'0 THE REAR.- The instructor commands:

1. BACKWARD. 2. }Lmcn. 3. HALT. tl At the iirst command all face to the rear; Nos. G and 7 seize the end of li~\pole with both hnnlls; No.5 and the gunner seize the spokes of the l\f~ cr, and Nos. 1, 2, :3, and 4 tLose of the hind wheels. At the command it .~,C~I, all moving tog-etLer, move the piece to the rear, Nos. G anll 7 keeping' tl'~Oil,laIghtposts. by tLe use of the pole. At the comUJand HAL'I', all reSltl1le

U:.vLUHlmJUNG AND COMING INTO ACTION. 12G. 1'0 'l'HE FRONT.-The instructor commands:

ACTION FRONT. At r't. this COmmand the gunner takes out the key, and, assisted b,' No.5,. ~~~os ,tIlo trail hom tllC pintle, and then commands DRIVE ox, UPO'~lwhil'h :t,,~:1 G and 7 reverse the limber to the left, and proceed with it to the rear; \\i;t reverse to tllO left, and halt so that i11C limber shall cover the picce, /j1l111 ~e n,le end of the pole G yards hom the end of the trail handspike. At the li~ il tHUG t!Jat the limber moves off the piece is brought about in all respects 1~l'ill(: t't~be,ri,llg to th~ ii'ont, except that the g-ltJ.lllerand No.5, ,:'it1lOut 1.011'- };I)~ b t' Ie had, carry It about, each by llleans ot the handle on Ins OWI1 SIde. }Jo.~iti~l~lll<17,When necessary, assist at the trail, after placing the limber ill .I\.~~ .. GIltth'eOO~lastJ.lC piece is br011~ht about and the tn~il lo:v~red, No .. 4 ta~es I hI!, " 11'llllhpJl,Hl and passes It to the gnrmer, who fixes It 111 the trall. 1\0. <\.l] tICSl°llOut resllInethe ISpOlJO'e, theif. posts.No.3 unkeyiug it, allll No. <1 prepares his lanyard.

] 27. To 'rUE RIGHT, (or LEF'l'. )-'1'110 instructor cOllllllalllls :

ACTION RIGlI'l', (or LEFT.) I";::~,r:e:e i, nnli~,bm'cd ;,nd ]'Ia"d in thc.'"'luimddimction, and tho lim- tjl(j left (',,; to. tIle lett, (or ngllt,) and takes Its place 111 rear, by reversmg to i2 or r~gIJt,) 8. 10 'l'IIE REAH.-The instructor COl1lmamls :

A 1. Fire to tile rear. 2. IN BATTERY • . J\t the . " '. 11~llJledi'~Gnllnandt IN BATTERY, the piece IS unlunLerod, as before, the trml ,I"Cell y",.'.y lowe,ed, "ud the gonn W01'''''ed fo,. n"iou; lice limbet. mov," !JluCeby ~l w:~l'(lat the commane! DRIVE ON ii'om the gunner, and takes its COlUIng to the left about. 84 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

SERVICE OF THE GUN WITH DIMINISHED NUMBERS.

1':!0. The men should he Jj'equentlyexercised in serving piec~s wi~1J diminisl!Cl1numbers, that each lllay know the duties he has to perlonn 1U 1;1I('hcases. Disabled lllen are replaced as soon as possible by the highest numbers, or, if men are selected to replace them, the highest numbers will be reduced to till the vacancies thus created. DnringactionNos.l and2mayoccasionally change places am1 numllers, as tbe duties of No.1 arc very severe. 13U. SERVICE OF TIlE GUN BY 'l'WO l\fEN.-The gunner commands, points, serves the vent, and firesj No.1 sponges, loads, and serves n,mlllU• Hitioll. THREE l\TEN.-Tbe gunner commands, points, serves the vent, and fires; No. ] sponges j No.2 loads and serves amlllunition. () Foun. l\lEN.-The gunner commands and llOints j No.1 sponges; No. fJ loads am1 serves ammunition j No. 3 serves the vent am1 fires. FIVE l\IEN.-The gunner cOlllmands and points; No.1 sponges; No.2 loads; 1\0. :~serves the vent and tires; No.4 serves ammunition. 2 SiX l\IL'.-The gunner commands and points; No. 1 spong?~; No. loads; 1'\0.:~ serves tbe vent and firesj Nos. 4 and {)serve ammUl1ltlOn. () SE\'EN l\IEN.-Tbe gunner commands and points; No. 1 sp~mges; No .. "', loads; No. :~serves tbe vent and attends to the trail; No.4 lues; No.6 1:; lit the limber, serves ammunition to No.5, and occasionally changeS withbim. EIGHT l\lEN.-No. 7 assists No.6j the other numbers as before.

Tablc for thc cxcrcisc with diminished numbc'l"s.

Distribution of duties. os. rc Ulnc 7 IGUI111cr.\_l \_~1_3 _4 ~_6 I

-.., .... w ...... (.. J .••..••••••••••••••••••••••• G. 3,4 1,2,5 .. ~...... -_ , .. oo ...... (.1.• 1, ~.___ ...... _ ... G. 3,4 1 2,5 ._---- ...... - . .. - ...... __ ...... , u 1,2,:3...... G. 1 2,5 3,4 _._--- ...... , (f. 1,2,3,4 ...... '" G. 1 2 3,4 5 -_ ...... , G 1, 2, ~J, 4, 5 ...... G. 1 2 3,4 6 5 ...... ( J, 2, J, 4,;Y, G..•.••••••••.••••. G. 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... U I, 2, :3,4, 5, G,7...... G. 1 2 3 4 5 6 \ --- SUPPLY OF AMMUNITION IN ACTION.

~~.1'. ~Yhen it is li1~ely that movements m~lst talw.place on the ~c.l~~ or. the hrlllg IS slow, and It can he done without 11lCOllvell1ence, a.mll1~ll1tll 0 Will be I;eryed direct from the rear chest of the caisson, No.8 pertorlll1l1g \10 flut ies l,.n~scribcd for Ko. G at tJ~eli.mber chest. At convenient lI~omen~s~ ~. Hllllllllllltlon serVet1.out by No G will he replaced from the rear cl1l~son che~ 1 H 1110 aU:llll1uiti?ll chest at the piece is exhausted, the. limber 1S rcphL~~f by tlH~tof the CtllI;SOll,and the empty chest exchanged lor the centre oue the cal:'801l. t As a rule, the limher chests, am1 especially that of the piece, will be l(OP11 filII at the ('xpellse of the others, so that in case of a sudden lllOVClllCllt0 the field tllCre shall always be a sutlicient supply of amlllunition at hand. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

ARTICLE FOURTH .

.MECHANICAL MANCEUVRES.

J.Vomcnclaturc.

IS} 132. Before executing the mechanical manCBuvres, the instructor u;~s~ld designate the parts of the piece and its carriage, and explain their

THE GUN.

i~LA'l'ES ti and 7.) The gun for field service is made of oronze. C1U<1heboreis the interior hollow cylinder which receives the cIJarge. It in- OlJ es all the part bored out, viz., the Cl'LIXDER, tIlo CHAMBER, if there is is :' an~llll the curved surfclce connecting' them. The BOTTOM OF THE nORB tI ,

(JI' tl,~ h,t\IBASES are the short cylinders uniting the trunnions \vitll tllO body }ll;IIle~glin. 'l'Iwir I';NDS, or tllO SIIOULDEns OF TIlE TRUNNlOXS, arc in 'j'Jl~ ~~rpen~icular to Ow axis of tho trulllJions. []li'Oli"' [..N'l: IS a cyJindriealllOle, terminatiug near the bottom of tlJe bore, VI':~'I,gI~1~vIlIdlfire is eOIllIllunicated to the clJarge. It is bored through It [I,CI'; 'r 'I'IIe 11 \.1\ of wr011O'htb cOI"I)Or, wlJich is .,.. screwed into the gUll.' hey . i < UtEs in heavy field gnns are used in tho mocllaulen J mHllwnvres. llle placed with tllOir eentres Over the centre of gravitJ' of tbe picce.

THE CARRIAGE. tL (PLt\'1'J.:s 8 .1 ()gUll rests. anu 9.) The CHEEliS are two pieces of wood between which SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE.

The STOCK is of squared wood, in two pieces, joined to the cheeks, and serving to connect the two parts of the carriage together. It is used in directing the piece, &c. The TRAIL is the curved part of the stock, which rests on the ground wheD tlw piece is in battery. The TRUXNION PLATES are fastened on the cllCeks to receive the trunnions. The CAl' SQUARES are pieces of iron placed over the trunnions to keep th~~n in their phttes. They are fastened by chains, pins, and keys. 1he ELEVATIKG SCREW serves to raise or lower the breech. It has a handle with fOllrprongs. The LOCK CHAIN is placed on the side of the carriage. It serves to keep the wheel from turning. :rh~ TRAIL HANDLES are placed on each side of the stock, and serve to nuse It. The TRAIL PLATE is a piece of iron fastened at the trail, having a very stout ring, cltIled the TRAIL LUNETTE, which receives the I'INTLE HOOI{. The I'nIXTIXG RIKGS (large and small) arc on the trail i the large onc turns. They receiYe the handspike. The IJROLONUE nOOKS are placed on the upper part of the stock. They serve to secure the prolonge ,,'hen coiled.

THE LIMBER.

(PLATES 10 and 11.) The LIMBER is the forward part of the cL\rriage, and nms upon the two fore wheels. The AXLE BODY is the ~Yoouen part in which the iron AXLETREE is placed. The HOUNDS are pieces of ,,'ood connecting the body of the axle to the SPLINTER BAR, and upon which the ammunition chest rests. The FORK is a piece of wood between the HOUNDS, awl forms an opening in which the pole is placed. The SPLINTER BAIt seHes for hitching the wllCeI horses, and has for this purpose fourTIucE lIOOKS. It is fastened on the hounds and fork. The PO'l..ESTR:\PS guide the pole. They are attached to the harness of the wheel hors0.3, passing throllgh sliding loops on the breast stral)s. The BR.\NCIIES OF THE rOLE YOKE are attached by means of sliding ring's to the collars of the wheel horses, and support the pole. The I'1~TLE llOOl<, on the hind l)art of the limber ax.letree, serves to unite tho limber to tlw carriage, and has a KEY. The Al\l~IVXITlOX CIlEST servos to transport ammunition, an<1is plaee<1 all the limber. THE CAISSON.

(PLATES 12 and 13.) It consists of a fnLmo, mounted on wheels, for the transport of two ammunition chests, a spare wheel, Hud other spare parts, tools, &0. Its limber is similar to that of the piece. In case of necessity, cannoneers ma v be transported 011 the CItCHtS. The STOCK l~as an iron lunette on the fron.t eml; at the rear end it is lot in 4 inches for its ,,'hole width into tlle hOllt of the ax.le body. The AXLE BODY is notched to receive the lllilldle rail, and has tenons to fit into notches in the side rails. The MIDDLE and two SIDE RAILS, and one CROSS BAR, complete thO wooden parts of the frame. 'rhe MIDDLE ASSEMBLING BAR (iron) has two EARS in the middle, to serve as stay plates for the ammunition chest, and a SLAT for the axle blade on the right of the middle rail. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 87

The REAR ASSEl\IBLING BAR supports the spare wLeel Ilxle. It has EL slat on the left of the middle mil for carrying a pickaxe. TLe SPA!lE WHEEL AXLE consists of a BODY and TWO RIBS ; it has a ClIAIN and 'fOCGLE to secure the wheel. There are TWO STAYS for the axle, the bolt 110Iein the Lead of one of t1lCm is square, in the other round. Its. 1:110IllllLor.CAlWIAGE nOOK is intended to tal;:e a carriage which lJlay have lost

Tl1c BOLSTER for the front foot board is fastened on the middle of the cross bar. Tho FIWNT FOOT BOAllD is fttsten.ed to the rails and cross bar; the REAR 1<'00'1' BOAlW to tllC rails only. TIle KEY PLATE Fon SPARE ]'()LE is fastened on the under side of the It.lnctte. Tlw H.EY is attaclj(:d to tlw left side of the stock bya c1Jain and eye pm,by the Screwed axle strap. into tbe left sidc of the stock. The SPAHE I'OLI~ HING is held

()f TIlethe ruiddleSPARE rail. HANDSPIKE lUNG, REY PLATE, andH:EY, are on the right side

oOne tbe rio-htKEY sidePLATE rail.and HEY, for the shovel handle, are f~,stened on tbe inside ' The LOCK CHAIN BHIDLE is fastened under the front end of .the left side f1:

CHANGING AMMUNITION CHESTS.

)"o 134. In senicc, wllCn tllC limber c1Jest of the piece is emptied, tho 1/e1 and caisson exchalJge limbers; No.8, assisted by No.7, unlimbers and (j~n ers up tllC caisson, and the middJe chest is cxcbanged ,,-ith the empty l' On the limber as soon as practicable. o chuuge the ammunition chests, the instructor commands:

I. Pr€pare to change the ammunition chest. 2. CHANGE THE CHEST. o o,v~t !b first cOImnand, NO$. 5 and 6 unkey tbe empty chest, each on his IGft ~lde,e and, taking IlOld of the Landles, place it npon the ground, on the J\ of lh caisson. Nos. 7 and 8 un1wy the middle chest at the same time. tl"lidJItIe conlUumd ClIAKGE TllE CHEST, Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8, seizing the el.jd tIe chest by the handlcs, lift it on the loot board, and, turning it end for to Ctltl~l"e,shift the chest along the stock to the limber, taking great care not }losts i Ie bo.ttom on the nuts, and put it in place; Nos. 5 and 6 resume their it, au lJ~llJedlHtely; Nos. 7 and 8 key the chest, replace the empty chest, key d 1esUnlC their posts. 88 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

CHA:'JGlNG WHEELS.

13;). G-POl.)~DEn GliN AND]~~-POUNDERHOWITZER.-Thepiece being un\illloerell, to chang'e the right wheel, the instrudor commands:

]. Prepare to change the 1'ight tcheel. 2. CUANGE THE WHEEL.

~\.t t]~c first command, ~os. 5, G, and 7 dismount tlw spare wheel; No.5 ]mugs It nCit!'and parallel to the disabled onc, leaving room for the latter to lJ8 takl'n off. The gunuer passcs one end of his hundsllike to No. ], placing it nuller the axletree close to the shoulder. The gunner and number 1, }llacing thelllse,lves between the handspike and piece, amI facing the wheel, tak~ hold ot the handtipike ncar the axle; Nos. 4 and 6 take hold of the ends ot the hamlspike; No. G, assisting the gunner. At tllO command CHANGE 'rUE WHEEL, the carriage is raised; Nos. 2 aud :1 take off the disabh~ll wheel; No.2 runs jt to the rear, and Nos. 3 and 5 put on the ~pare ~Yheel, No. :J taking h~ld of it iI~ the.rear. Nos.:J and 4 attend to the Imchpms und washers on theu respective sJdes. To CHANl;E 'rIlE LEF'1' WHEEL, the gunner and No.2, assisted by No.6 and No.3 respectively, man the handsf-ike; Nos. 1 and 4 take ofl:'the wheel; Nos. 5, 6, and. 7 dismount the spare wheel ; No. 5 brings it up, and Nos. 4 and 5 put it on; No.1 runs the disabled wheel to the rear. .The men at the handspike must raise the eml of the axletree suffici~ntly lugh to throw the weirrht on the other wheel, and tllOse who talwoff the wheel must also lift it~ and not increase the weigLt by allowing' it to slide along the uxletree. ]:!-POUNDEP..GUN AND 24-POUNDER HOWITzER.-One end of a prolonge i, fastened to the axletree near the disabled wheel, the otLer ellll being passed oyer the opposite wheel and manned by four men from another piece. A. spare pole, m:.L111edby Nos. ], 2, :J, 4, 5, and (j, must be substituted for the handspike Ullder the axletree. The gunner und No.7 take oft' und put on tho wheels. \Vhen a spare pole cm~not be obtained, .the carriage may be raised by means of the ; No.2 places one Jl1 the muzzle, and No.1 crosses the other undor it; No.:3 assists at the handspike in the muzzle, and Nos. 4, 5, and G at the other, No.4 on the outside. The four men from tho other piece take hold of the cheeks on the side to be raised. All actiug tog-ether, raise the carriage at the COIllmand CHANGE THE WHEEL. The prolon~e is not required. The l~mna:uvre would be made easier by digging u trencll five or six inches deep for the other wheel. \Vhen a wheel at the piece is disabled in action, it may be rq)laced by one from its limber. The disabled wlICel, if not quite unserviceable, may 1)0 used at the limber until it can be conveniently changed; but, if entirely ull~ serviceable, oue must be obtained fi'om the caisson as soon as it is possible to bring it np. In taking' off a limber wheel the horses arc tahen out; No. G removes tbe linchpin aull washer; Nos. :3 anti 4, assisted by Nos. 7 and 8, raise tbe limber, No. :~in fr011t, anti No.4 in rear of the axletrcc; Nos. :) and G taM ofl' the wheel, aml No. [) runs it forward. The uxletrce is lowered gently to tllC ground. The wheel of the limber is replaced by Nos. J, 2, !), and G, after tho wheel of the piece is on, Nos. 1 and 2 raising the limber, assisted by Nos. 7 and 8. \\Thell a wbee111us been disabled in the carriage of eitber piece or caissOll and cannot be replaced by anotlJer, a spar 10 or 12 feet long' may be placeJ SCHOOL OF TlIE PIECE.

undo:' the axlotree, with one end resting on the gronnd, [,nd tllC ether secured to f,h? tarriage by la"hing, so that the axlotree may be supported in its proper ]JosltJ?n without the wheol. The part of the carriage thus supported should be re!lCved 0f as much weight as possible. \Vhcn a w heel La, beon so disabled that it cannot turn, a shoe of wood !Ila.y be made allt] placed nnder it. A piece of spar about ;{ f(e~ JOI:g and 9 ll1che~ in diameter, with a groove in one side to receive tllO fo11oe, will HnSWH foralll ~lll~ purpose. '1'110 eud in hont is giveu ilw proper fonD, and tile 10t:k- asCJl mUchiastened weight to as it. possible. In this case, also, the carriage should be relieved ii'om

DISMOUN'rING PIECES.

136. G.POUSDER GUN AND 12-POUXDER HOWI~'ZER.-The piece being unlimbered, the instructor commands:

1. Prepare to (ltsmOltllt tlte piece. 2. DISMOUNT THE PIECE.

At the first command, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 remove the implements and place them on the ground, olltside of their respective wheels, the bucket with ~ ~punge ancI lwudspilw all tIle right, and the worm witll a sponge and lmnd- ~lJ'k,e on the left. Nos. 1 and 2 then press upon the muzzle, and Nos. :J and ' alter remOVing the cap-squares, station themselves at the end of the cllCpk" lllld, "'ith one Land on the wheel and tllC other on tlw knob of the cascabel, prepare to raise the breech. The gunner, iirst taking out the handspike, if JI~.the trail, and passing it to No.4, raises the elevating screw to its greatest G'elg-ht,and t)JCn seizes tlw Jeft traillJl1udle: No.5 seizes the right, and Nos. and 7, after seotching the ,,-heels, go to the trail to assist in rltising it. 1StAt the second comllul,ud, Nos. 1 and 52 Lear down upon the muzzle, the ~/nlJer and Nos, 5,

}"t]JO\Vit,lli:CI' IlJayN also Le used in dismountinfrb. the 6-1Jounder gun andd 12-pounder ...~o u.uu.t: as. 1 and 52man the rODe. and Nos. 3 and 4 stea y the wheels. 1 lOUaltuen are required SCHOOL OF THE })mCE.

MOUNTING PIECES.

137. G.POUNDER GUN AND 12-POUNDER HOWITZER.-Thc piece being on the ground, vent upward:;, the instructor commands: 1. Prepare to mount the piece. 2. MOUNT THE 1'!ECE. At the first command, the implements are removed as in dismounting, excevt tl~at the handspik.cs, instead of being placed on the groUl;d, are passed bJ: ); os. 3 and 4, respectIvely, to the gUIlner and No.2; Nos. 3 and 4 tal,e oft tllC cap-s.quares; No.2 in:;erts hi:; handspike in the bore, and, assisted by};? I, ra~ses the chase, so that the gunner may put his handspike under tl~c pICce a httl? in rear of the trunnioIls. This being' done. No.2 withdmwS h~s handspJlw from the Lore, and places it under the knob of the cascabel. ~ os. I.' 3, and 4 assist at the lumdspilw of No.2, and Nos. 5, 5, amI 7 gi that ot the gunner, Nos. I, 2, [>, antI the glluner, being at the ends. The gunner then cOlUmands HEAVE, npon which the men, acting together, raise the piece upright, lUlll Nos. "1,2, :::, amI 4 :;teacly it in that positIOn. The gunner and No.;) go to the trail, and, aflsistecl by No:;. G amI 7 at the wheels, run the carriage forward within a foot of the picce. No:;. 6 and 7 scotch tho ,,'heels, if necessary, and then go to the trail to assist the gunner and No.5 in raising it. At the second command the trail is mise<.1,No.5, with the howitzer, hol<.1- ing the lock-chain, to prevent the trail from falling over to the front; Nos. 1 anu 2 push gently uo-ainst the piece and place the trunnions ill their plates. The trail is then lo~vereu carerully to the gronnd, the wheels unscotcbed, anu the implements replaced, Nos. :3 and 4 sOl:uring the cap-squares. 'Vholl necessary, the duties of Nos. G amI 7 Clm be performed by Nos. 3 and 4. The piece lllay be also easily raised by moans of a rope, "'ithout the use of lmnclspikes. Tlte gunner fixes tllO middle of the rope to the knob of tho cascabel by an artificCl"s knot, und Nos. "1, 2, :~, 4, f>, and G man the ends, ~ os.~ amI 2 being nearest the cascabel: By hauling npon the rope tbe piece IS raised. It is then lllounted ns before. 12-POUXDER GUN A~D 24-1)OU~DEn. HOWl'l'ZER.-These are mounted bY means of hands pikes in tbe sallIe lllanner as the (i-pounder gnn aDd l:2-ponnder howitzer, except that Nos. 1 and 2 make a hole in the- ground,vo one foot deep for the 12-pouuder, aud eight inches for the howitzer, to recei the muzzle, and two additional men aet at the hamlles. tcll It will facilitate the misillg of the pieee, and g'ive greater security, to fas tIle hlLlluspike to the cascabel b~r lllCtWSof a rope, ami also to fasten, by all artiticer's knot, the middle of a prolong'o or picket rope to the cascabel, [tIld man the ends of it by mon from another pieee. In this case, when the piCCO is raised as hin'h as the llleu's hips. the gunner aud Nos. f), G, and 7 quit tlto handspike, ,t\y~ at a timo, and assist at the prohmge. In placing the, pice~ 011 the carrilt"'e, N os. ;~ and 4 carry the prolollge to the rear, and aSSIst ,UJ hauling upon':h. "\Vhon the piece does not fall exaetly into tho trullnl(~~ ecr plates, the prolollge is pasi'eu round llm10r the clH'ck:; to secure the br ell. of the carriag'e; the tmil being' tlten lowered, the trUllllions slide into tu beds. CARRYING PIECES. 138. The picce being on the gTound, Yent upwards, the instl'llctol commands: ]. Prepare to carry the piece. 2. FORWARD. 3. MARCIl. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 01 At the fir'st command Nos. 6 and 7 back the limber over the breech unti1 Lho pinOo hook is just above tIle trunnions i No. :2 inserts a handspike in the ore to raise the piece, and Nos. 1, :3. and 4 stand near to assist him i the gun- ~cr, a~l)isted by No. G, pas,'>es the ring of tho prolonge through tlJe handles, ~.nd after making a turn with the prolonge rOUlJClthe pintle hook, passes the llng tlJrough tIle Imndles again and puts it on the pintJe. It' there are no ~ndJos, the prolonge should be passed round the piece, in front and rear of . ? trunnions, tho pioce being n11sed for that purpose. Nos. 6' and 7 tl18n lU1se the pole, and Nos. J, 2, :~, and 4 tho piece, if not already raised i the gunn?r tightens the prolongc, pulling on the fi'cc cnd, wh1ch 110 passes Over ;he pmtle hook and uncleI' tho limber to No.5, wlJO receives it at the splinter );11' and makes a tUfll with it round tho fork. The polo is then lowered, and ~os. 1 and:1 prel)S upon the muzzle to raise the breech. The gunner, assisted YdN~. G, lashes the knob of the cascabel to the splinter bar, fastenin~r the ZOntal.en of the prolonge by half bitches. The piece ,,'hen slung should be llori-

Us~t 1n theNo. second 115. command the cannoneers prepare to move the limber forward,

At the command MARCIl, they move the limber to the front. InenWhen ~o I;ling the horses the piece. are hitcbed ill they should be taken out, to enable the

r', A lImber, ill addition to carrying the piece, may also carry 11 disabled car- n ,lag? who it is taken apart and lashed Upon it; but as the weight, w1Ien 80 dIstributed, is too great to be carried fiw, tbe carriage should be placed upoJ.: the caisson as soon as it c.an be done. \\i hen a limber is disabled, the trail of the carriage or caisson is attached to the rear of another carriage.

DISMOUNTING CARRIAGES.

11", l:JD. CARIUAGE OF TUE 6.POUNDER GUN AND J2-POU:l'IDER Ro'w.

1. Prepare to dismount tlte carriage . .A.. 2. DISi\lOUN'l' THE CARRIAGE. :N"o, t the first command, Nos. 3 and 4 remoye the linclJpins and washers, and 1t Ji 2, :~, and 4 step inside the Wheels and take hold of the carriage. j tal t Ie seCond command, Nos. J, 2, :J, and 4 lift the carriage, Nos. 5 and 110)f'!'J Oft' tIle right w11Oel,and Nos. 6 and 8 the 10ft, Nos. 5 and 6 taking l~' 111 frOllt, and 7 and 8 in rear. 'l'lllecessary, each wher,lmay be taken off by one man.

hi th;: .~arriageL1 of the J2-poundcr gun and 24-pour;der lJOwitzer is.dis.mo~~.ted (jlet,illluge.e,' :".'. llenlUluwr, wit.h the addition of two or four men to aSSIst III hitmg l'iil(.~~l.IlJ';HS._l'llC limbers are dismounted in the same manner as the car- Ileli'o;:r;.the different nUll1bers taking hold in the same relatiye positions and ling the same duties. r 9 MOUNTING CARRIAGES. that 0/1(ISlhOunting. l'he method them. of mounting carriages and limbers corresponds to

llIGfI'l'ING CARRIAGES THAT HAVE BEEN OVERTURNED • • ,;t" t~~l. Wl,on a ""n-lago 1m, boon ov",tumed It ls bettol, If tlme pel. age ISeng the piece, right the carriage, and theu mount the piece 92 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. again in the manner already described. The piece may be easily disengaged by allowing the breech ~o rest upon the ground, or l1 block of wood, raising the muzzle by means of l1 handspike, while the cap-squares are taken off. The carriage may be righted, however without disengaginO' the piece, by the following modes: ' ,., 1st. Detach the limber, secure the cap-squares, and lash the knob of the cascabel to the stock. Place the middle of a rope over the nave of one wheel, pass the ends of it downward between the lower spokes of that wheel, then under the carriage, through the corresponding spokes of the ?ther wheel, and then upwards over the wheel. and across the top of the carnage, to the side where it was first f1ttached. The ends of the rope and the wheel to be raised arc then manned and the carritwe drawn over to its upright posi.tion. During this operation two men ar~ required to steadl the trail. It necessary, the ends of the rope may be fastened to the lImber, and borses used to assist in riO'htino' the carriuO'c. Great care must be talwn to stop t.he horses in time, abml tt{ prevent tl~em from making. any more effort than IS absolutely necessary. If the wheel-horses arc suffiClCnt, the leaders may be unhitched. ~d. Detach the limber, attach two prolonges or the middle of a picket rope to the trail, chock the wheels, and dig an oblong. hole under the muzzle about b\"o and a half feet deep. Then pass one ot the prolonges, or one en.d of the pkket rope, over the carriage to the fi'ont, and, manllin~ b~th, Huse the trail and pass it over the axle tree to the gTound on the OppOSIte SIde. Light carriages may be righted by hand without attaching a rope. SPIKING AND lJNSPIKING CANNON, AND HENDERING THEM UN- SERVICEABLE. 142. To SPIKE A PIECE OR TO RENDER IT UNSERYICEAllLE.-Driv.c in~o the vent a jagged and ha;'dened steel spike wi~h a soft p?int, or a 1l.aIl WIthout a headj break it off Hush with the outer surtace and clmch the pOInt inside by moans of the rammer. vVec1ge tt shot in the bottom of the bore 1)y wral~ping it ,,,ith felt, or by means of iron wedges, using th? rammer or a bar ot iron to drive them in; a wooden wedge would be eastly burnt by nwans. of a cbarcoal fire lighted with .the aid of a be110.ws. Cause ~hells. ~o lI bur:,;t III the bore of brass guns or tire broken shot trom them WIth 111g ehm,-ge", Fill a piece with sar;d over the charge t? burst it. Fire a -riece agamst another, Ulllzzle to ll1ullzlc, or the muzzle of one to the chase ot ~hC otber. Light the fire under the chase of a brass gun, and strike on it wltlI fI, sledge to bend it. Break off the trunnions of iron guns, or burst them bY firing them with heavy charges and full of shot, at tL high elevation. When guns are to be spiked temporarily and are likely to be retaken; [1, Sl'ItlNG Sl'IKE is used, having a shoulder to prevent its being too eaSily extracted. '~o. UNSPJ!~E A PlECE.--:If the spike is .not screwe,d in or ~linched, a.nd thi bOle IS not llnpede'd' put m a charge ot powder o.t one-tl:ml the weIght 0 the shot, and ram Junk wads over it with a handspIl;;e. laymg" on the bott(lJ1l ~f. the b?re l~ strip of wood w~th a groove on tl:e under side containing :~ stland ot llUlck match, by wlncll fire is commumcated to the charge. In 1 brass gun, take ont some of the metal at the upper orifice of the vent" an~. 1 PQur sulphuric acid into the groove for some hours before tiring'. It tll ,} ~nethod, several times repeated, is not successful, unscrew the vent piece I It ~)ea brass gun; and if an iron one, drill ont the spike or drill a new ven;. fa DlUVE OUT A SHOT WEDGED IN THE llOIW.-Unscrcw the vent pice 1 ~f there be o~e, .and drive in wedges so as to start the shot forward, then r[11~~ It back agam m order to seille the wedo'e with a hook' or pour in powc1~ und fire it, af~er replacing the vent piece.'" In the last r~sort, Lore a hole J~J CII the bottom of the breech, drive out the shot, and stop the hole with a scr • SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 93

ARTICLE FIFTH.

THE CANNONEER MOUNTED

General Remarks.

143. The object of this part is to instruct the cannoneer in the man~ ngemellt of his horse at ull gaits, and will be best attained by a gradual and constant application of the principles of the drill. All the cannoneers of mounted batteries, as well as of horse artillery, sh~uld be thoroughly instructed in this part, as it is an indispensable prepa- driver.ratIon for the duties of a non-commissioned officer as well as for those of a

144. It should be carefully impressed upon the men that the horse llIay be made gentle and obedient by patience, kindness, and fearlessness; that punishment is only to be resorted to when it cannot be avoided, and then only administered immediately after the commission of the offence; and that nothinO' should ever be done to the 11Or8ein anger. nestlessn~ss and impatience frequently arise fiwu exuberance of spirits Or PlayfUlness. When restless, the horse should be held until he becomes calm; When submissive aftel' punishment, he should be treated kindly. The cannoneers should endeavor to inspire him with confidence, and he should be gradually accustomed to the warlike sounds-firing, beating of drums, &c. sons1'he to most recruits. quiet and best instructed horses will be chosen for the first les-

a . 145. ALL MOUNTED EXERCISES should he commenced and ended at 8tWalle Horses cannot be taken witb iUIpunity from a state of rest in tho inab~e and be at once subjected to the severe and rapid exercises required I t e drills and battery manamvres. It is almost equally injurious to f.iaCe ~hem, exhausted and heated after great exertions, in a stable; cspe- paall:yIn cold weather or where the stables are liable to have currents of air SSlUg through them.

ELEMENTARY INSTRUCTION.

sin 146. This should be carefully imparted, if pr~cticable, to the men to ~ly.. Dnder no circumstances should more th:11.1four recruits be assigned threno Instructor at the same time. They will then be placed in one rank, l'h Yards apart. ltl'lllOd.horses are taken in the stables or at the pickets, the cannoneers un~

TO BRIDLE THE HORSE. e);:PJain]4713 stell'h. !he uses: instructor indicates the parts of the bridle as follows, and Of b~I?LE: crown picce,. tltroat laslt,. brow band,. clteek straps,. bit,. bar ' CUrbrein; curb chain or strap; snaifle rein. He then Commands: SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

BRIDLE.

The. reins are talwn in the right, the crown piece in the left hand j the borse 18 apP,roached on the near (or left) side; the reins slipped over his b.C[lc1, and left restlllg on Ills neck; the cannoneer then takes the crown piece 1:1 the l'lg,ht hanl!, the left side of the bar of the bit resting on the two front fingers ot the ,left hand; bring:; the bndle head in front of and slightly below Its proper posItIOn; iniierts the thumb of his left hand into the side of the mouth; presses open the lower jaw; inserts the bit by raising the crown JllCce; passeii his lefr, hand under the brow band; passes the ears under the crOWll piece, cOlllIllencing with the right ear; arranges the forelock j secures the throat lash and then the curb strap, taking care not to make them set too closely. There should be at least three fingers' breadths between the throat lash and the jaws.

TO SADDLE.

148. The different l)arts of the s(Lddle are indicated as follows: The SADDLE: pommel; cantle; seat; skirts; flaps, or inner skirts; gi1.t!ts, and straps; stirrups; stirmp leathers; CRUPPER: strap and loop; BREAST STRAP. He then cOlllmcll1ds :

SADDLE.

The cannoneer approaches the horse ou the left side, lays the blauket pro- perly foll1cd on his ba<:k, the edges on the left side; then seizes it at the \\'lther~ with left, at the lams with the right hand; slides it once or twice f:~'Olll front to rear, to ~Il!ooth the hair, taking care to mise it in carrying it fOI \rmd, so Uii not to brush bad;: the hair. . The blanket shoulU be SO arranged as to project slwht]y beyond the saddle, both in front and rear. Tho b~'east strap, crnppe~, and st.irrups being crossed ~ver the. saddle, h~ ~olze,~It at the pomlllol with the leff, hand, at the cautle WIth the nght, place:; ~tgently on the horse's back, brinn-ing it from the direction of the croup; places It a little in rear, that the crupper~nay be put on without dmwing it back,. lets down the crupper and breast strap; steps to the rear, passes the end at the crupper under the dock and buckles it, or passes the tail through the crup- per loop, takmg cme that none of the hair remains under it; steps to tlr? rIght of the horse, smzes the pommel with the right, the cantle with the left hand, raises and carries it forward without moving the b~anket, seeing at !.he sallie tllue that there are no straps caught under it; lets down the g'irtl1, rUIllulw it through the loop of the false martingale, if one is used; then lets ~own tlle right stirrup; returns to the left of the horse, ::;eesthat the blau~~ct :s sa,lOoth, and does not compress the withers, which is prevented by nL1S~11~ It slIg]u]yover this part; buckles the girth and the breast strap, and let:> down the left iitirrup.

TO LEAD OUT.

149. The horse being saddled and bridled, at the command LEAD OU"1'\ th,o ~annoneer conducts him to the exercise ground. The reins me }l~S5C( 0\ 01 t~le ~eck, and rest on the pommel of the saddle; the cannoneer 15 O~ the left 01 the .horse, holus the reins with the right hanu, (j inches froIll t~~ I3 month, the naIls uuder, the haml elevated and firm, to prevent the bO startmg. SCr:OOL OF TIm rIECE. 95

IGO. POSITIO~ TIt:l'.'ORr; MOt.XTING.-At the command STAND TO !~ORSE, given by the instructor, the cannoneer, standing opposite the lower ~aw, on the left of the horse, aSSumes the position prescribed in No. Z, exoopt. lUg that he holds the reins with the right hand, about 6 inches from the bit, nails downward.

TO MOUNT.

151. The instructor commands:

1. PREPARE TO MOUNT.

1 pause j 2 motions .

. At this command, unhook the sabre, when worn j place the right foot 3 Inches in rear of the left, make a filce and a half to the right, on both llCels, keeping the right foot in hont; let go the right rein, slide the right hand al~llg the left rein, take two steps, right foot first, and face to the left on tbe pOInt of the left foot, so as to bring the right side towards the horse's flank j Pl~ce the right foot 3 inches in rear of the left, seize the bight of the reins 1Vltltthe right hand, and place the little finger of the left hand between them, back of the hand towards the horse's headj run the left hand down the reins \~ tlte horse's neck, about 12 inches horn tl~e sad~lIe, and with the ri~'ht band (law the reins tbrollO'b the palm of the left, untIl the Imnd has a lIght and eq?alft feeling of the l~orse's mouth j then let the bight of the reins fall on the ~ide j grasp firmly n lock of the mane and the reins with left hand, and 1et faU the rig'ht by tlw side. rr\~o. Seize the left stirrup leather, just above the eye of the stirrup, with the nght hand; raise the left foot and in.~ert it as far as the ball, or about ~hue-thirde saddle. the foot, and place the right hand on the of!' side of the cantle of

2. MOUNT.

1 pause j 2 motions.

111 Atue the Command MOUNT, spring from the right foot, llOlding firmly to the toa 1 and keeping tLe sl1ddle steady with the right hl111dj bring the heels ~?t leI', the knees resting firmly against the saddle, tlw body ereet. l'i tWo. Place the right hand on the pommel to support the bodyj pass the eo\Itle leg extended over tLe croup of the horse without touching j let the body Lan l gently down into the saddle j let go the malle, take one rein in each 'rl , ~nd insert the rigllt foot in its stirrup without the aid of lIand or eye. th~ lIe,Instructor then ('unses the stirrups to be crossed over the hurse's neck, eft one over the rirrht. deta'l 15,2. Before cOI~llIanding the mount, the instructor will explain the lttl

EXERCISE AT A HALT. ing e ~,53. POSITION OF THE CANNOXEER l\IOUN'fED.-The buttocks hear- the h~r

upper part o.f t)1Obody at ease, free, and erect, shoulders equally thro,,:n lmck, arllls falllll~ naturally, head erect and easy; one rein of the snatR~ III each hand, tho fingors closed, the thumb alonD" each rein, the wrists as hJ~h as the olbow, and 6 inches apart, the fino'ors "'turned toward oach other, tho upper extremity of tho roins leaving tho hand on tho sido of tho thumb.

EYES RIGIIT-EYES LEFT.

154. As proscribod in No.4, for the cannoonocr dismounted.

'1'0 LENGTHEN THE SNAFFLE REIN.

The instructor commands:

Lengthcn [eft (or rigid) REIN.

1 pause j 2 motions.

155. At the command REIN, bring tho wrists towards each othor with- out turning them in; seize the left rein with the thumb and first finger of the right hand, 1 inch ii'om the left thumb. Two. Half open tlJO left hand, and allow the reins to slip until the thumbS touch; closo the left haml and replace tho wrists.

TO SHOR'fl~N THE SNAFFLE REIN.

156. The instructor commands:

Shortcn left (or right) HEIN. 1 pause; 2 motions.

At the command REIN, bring tho wrists toward each other without turning them in; seize the left roin with the thumb and first fingor of the right hand, so that the thumbs touch. Two. Half open tho left hand, elovate tho right hand, and suffer the rein to slip until the thumbs aro 1 inch apart; close the left hand, and replace the wrists. The right rein is lengthened aml shortened on the same principle.

TO CROSS THE REINS IN ONE HA~D.

157. The instructor commands:

In lcft (or right) hand, cross REINS.

At the command HEINS, turn in the left wrist, the nails dowmmrds; at the sa~ne time bring the wrist opposito to tho middle of the body, half 01)00 the left hand, place in it the part of tho roin that was in tho right; recJ(lsc the left hand, and let the right fall to the side. Tho reins are crossed in tho right band upon the samo ~rinciplo.

TO TAKE THE REINS IN nOTH HAND~.

158. The instructor commands:

Separate REINS. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. D7

At the COl11mand REINS, half open the hand which contains them. Hoi;.:c with the athol', nails downward, tlJat part of its rein wlJicll the mher band bad held, aud replace the wrists (J inches apart.

USE OF 'l'H-g BlllDLB RE1NS AND LEGS.

159. The reins serve tu prepare the horse fur the movements. to guide, ul?-dto halt him; their action should be gradual, and iu harulOny with that ot the legs. In using thelll, the anus should be used with suppleness, and their movements should extend from the wrist to the shoulder. In riding, tlie hand ought not to movo with the body, but should he kept steady. . The legs serve to make the llOrse advUJ.lce, to support him, and to aid him In executing changes of direction. 'Vhon the. cauuoueer wishes to make his }~orseadvance,n he should gradually close his legs behind the girth, propor. tl0 ing their effect to the sensihility of the horse. In doing this be must be carelitlnot to open out nor to raiso his knoes, wbich must bo kept supple . .As soon as the borse obeys, the cannoneer will gradually relax bis legs.

EFFECT OF THE REINS AND LEGS.

. 160. The cannoneer, in elevating t110wrists and closing the legs, ho~s h.. horse in hand ... gat"", him; t"'"" pcepo"at""y t,o"ll movemont,. By again elevating the wrists he slackens tbe pace; and by repeating tlle move- ~~nt he stops tbe llOrse, or reins him b~ck. The wrists shonld be ~'aisec1 ~\JthoutaWardscurVing the body. them. awl at the same twlC they should be drawn slJghtly

,In Opening8e the right rein and closing the right leg, the cannoneer turns h::, h"' '0 the dght. To opcn the dght rein, 'ho right wrls' is c",Tied, ~hlthout~,horse. turning it, more or less to tIle rig1Jt, according to the sensibility of 1110 horse is turned to tho left on the same principles. lOwering slightl.y tl10 wrists, tIw 110rse is at liberty to move forward. cl~,~OS1lJg the le~s determines tho mOVement.

TO MARCH.

161. The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, forward. 2. MARCH. he 'h:,t.t fl", COmmand,gather tho 1."'0. At the command llLmcH, lower \\'!'ist\IIS~S,closing tbe leg'S at the same time until the horse obeys, when the s \\"111 be gradually l~eplaced.

TO HALT.

162. The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT.

J.t~:~~:O fl,'s, Command, the horse is gathered ""ll,on' slackening his pace. tl.I bOd °1UU1andHALT, elevate the wrists by degrees, bring them towards hIs bac{! and lJold the legs near, to keep the horse straight and to prevent {jng.7 'When tbe horse does not obey, cause him to feel successively 98 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. the effect of each rein, according to his sensibility. The horse having obeyed. gradually replace the wrists and legs.

TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT.

]63. The instructor commands:

1. Oannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. ;). HALT.

At. the fi~st command, gather the horse.. At the command MARCH, open ,the nght rem, and close progressively the nght leg. In order not to turn tllO horse too short, perform the movement in a quarter of a circle of 3 yards 'rhe movement being almost completed, diminish the effect of the rein and the right leg, supporting the horse at the same time with the left rein and leg to terminate the movement. At the command HAL'r, hold the horse straight in the new direction.

TO REVERSE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT.

164. The instructor commands:

1. CannoneC1iS, right (or [eft) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT.

This movement is executed upon the same principles as the turn to the right or to the left, with this difference: that the horse should pass over a semicircle of 6 yards and halt faced to the rear. . The instructor should place himself on foot, at the shoulder of the ho~so. and describe the curves prescribed in this and the preceding number before causing the cannoneer to execute the movements.

TO OBLIQUE.

165. The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, right (or lcft) oblique. 2. MARCIl. 3. HAL'I"

This movement is executed according to the principles prescribed ~O\Ii turn to the right or left, (No. 16:3,) taking care that the movement of tl° reins and left leg are called into action in sufIicient time to prevent more tu.l1~~ ~ half turn bei~g' exe~ute~l. The object being t~ give the cannoneers ~he fIrb Idea. of the oblIque duectlOl1, great exactness WIll nut at first be req111rol1.

TO REIN BACK.

166. The instructor eommands:

1. CanlloncC1's, backwards. 2. MARCH. 3. Cltnnonccrs. 4. HALT.

At the command MARcn, keep a finl1 seat, elevate the wrists, and c1~~~ ,the legs. As SOOn as the horse obeys, lower and elevate successively SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 99 wrists. If the horse throws his haunches to the right, close the right leg; if to the left, close the left leg. If these means are not sufficient to replace the horse in his proper position, open the rein on tbe side towards which he throws his haunch, supporting him at the same time with the other rein. At the command HALT, hold a Jight rein, and keep the legs near. 16i. At first the horse should not be backed more than three or four paces. If necessary, tbe instructor, dismounted, ,vill place himself before the horse, take a rein in eaeh hand, and, by moving the wrists, cause the bit ~o act. If the horse refuses to obey, the reins being held in one hand, the lrlstructor with the other will touch his forelegs gently with the whip, and caress him as SOon as he obeys: 168. In executing tbe foregoing movements, the instructor wmnot at first require that they be performed together by the cannoneers under in- ~truction, but wi11 see that each executes his Own correctly, rectifying the POsitions before passing from one movement to another.

TO DISMOUNT.

169. The instructor causes the stirrups to be let down, and commands:

1. Prepare to DISMOUNT.

At this command pass the right rein of the snaffle into the left )land, the e.:-:tremity of the reins leaVing the lwnd on the side of the thumb; seize the l'cJUs above and near the left thumb with the right hand, the nails downward; slide the left lland down the reins to the horse's neck, about 12 inches fraIl! f.he saddle, and holdincr the reins in that hand so as to feel the horse's mouth hghtly, g.-asp with it !( lock of the mano; dmp the J,i~ht of the reins,_ and, f-lacl.ng,eepll1g the the body right erect. hand on the pommel, take the nght foot from the stIrrup, 2. DISMOUNT. 1 pause; 3 motiona.

o .At the command DISMOUNT, rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg /,\eUded over the croup of the horse, without touching him, and bring the p~? I~ heel to the side of the left, the body well sustained, at the same time ~t;~ll1gtlIC right hand on the eantle.

11 1eWo. Lower the body gently until tIle right foot toudles the ground; re- b IOlv the left foot from the stirrup, and place it by the right, keeping the tl~)( ~ erect; let go the mane; pass the bight of the reins over the pommel of l 'e~In :-;acldlewithw't} b the riO"ht'" band, which then seizes the left rein; let go the '1' I 1 t e left band, and drop the hand by the side. ala IIltFa~.e Paee to the left, take two steps, left foot first, slip the right hand Illg tb left rein, and take the position of STAND TO HORSE. the 1.1 the detail and execution of the first and second motions of the dismount, Instructor will conform to what is directed in No. 152 for mounting.

TO FILE OFF. 170. 'rhe instructor commands:

1. By tlte rigltt, (or left,) file off. 2. MARCH • .At the fi. t . lll&Ud M lS cOlllmand, hook up the sabre, when one IS worn. At the com- ~ Auell, the cannoneer on the right steps off with the left foot, leading 100 SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE.

~is horse to th~ fropt. He 1?oves four yards, turns to the right, and marches m the new chrectlOn, holdmg at the same time the hand high and firm. Each n:an executes successively the same movement when the one who pre- ce~les hIm has moved four yards to the front. rhey conform to the same principles to file off to the left.

TO UNSADDLE.

]71. .At the command UNSADDLE, the cannoneer unbuckles the breast ~trap and ~Irth; steps to the right side, frees the girth from the loop of the false martmgale, .turns up the girth and breast strap after wiping them; th!.o:vs over the nght stirrup; carries the saddle a little back, and hees the tml fr~m the crupper; throws over the left stirrup; seizes the pommel with ~he left, the cantle with the right hand, removes the saddle ane[ places it on ~ts peg; takes off the blanket, doubles it with the wet side inwards; lays ]t on the suddle, passino- the crupper over it, and attaching it to the breast strap. 0

TO UNBRIDLE.

172. At the command UNBRIDLE, loose the curb strap and throat lash; slip the reins with the right hand to the crown piece, and then with both harnds carefully disengage the ears, and let the bit drop out of the mouth by lowering the crown piece along the forehead. The munner of arranging the bridle and hal ter heads, when both are used ?'t the same time, will depend upon the kind of halter head used; the mode 111 each case will be prescribed by the captain comnHtnding the battery.

VAULTING: THE HORSE UNSADDLED.

17:3. At the command MOUNT, the cannoneer seizes the mane with the left hUlid; holUs the reins of the snaffle with the right hand, which be places OR the withers, the thumb to the left, the fingers to the right; raiseS himself lightly on the two wrists, the body straight; passes the right leg", extended over the croup of the horse without touching him, scats himself g'ently, and takes the left rein in the left hand. At the command DISMOUNT, he passes the left rein of the snaffle into tho right hand, which he then places OIl the withers; seizes the mane with the left hand, raises himself gently on 1.>othwrists; passes the right leg extell~le~ Oyer the croup of the horse without touching' 1im, brings the right tlug nour the left, the body straight, and comes lightly to the ground.

MARCHING.

Riding-house Drill.

174. The instructor may now unite eight cannoneers, but not Il1orc~ r~~l?.J"are placed on the same line, three yards apart. After. mounting, t~ :-;tll~ ups are crossed over the horse's neck. Two corporals or lUstrueted IlI\. tleslgnatcd ~onducto1"s, are placed, one on the right, the other on the let ' they nse theIr stirrups. , \\Then there is no riding-house, a groand will be laid out a~ a substitut~t It should be rectangular, about] 00 yards long by 33 broad, the entrunce the cnds. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 101 the'r!IC Ulteriorcannonc'Br of the marches nding-house.to tlte rigltt Itand when he bas the right side towards Fie marches to tlte left hand when the left side is towards the interior.

TO MARCH TO THE RIGHT (OR LEFT) HAND.

175. (Plate 19, Fig. 1.) Tbe instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, hy tlte right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FaRw ARD.

At the first and second commands tbe cannoneers turn to the right, as prescribed in No. 163. At the command FOIU\TARD, they lower tbe wrists, and, closing tbe legs, march straight torward and tallow the conductor, who ~,uters1ght the riding-house, turning, when he reaches the extremity of it, to the lL Or left, as directed. He turns at the angles without further orders. If t e turn is to tIle right, the cannoneers are llWrclling to the right lJandj if tIle left, they arc marching to the left hand. They keep the distance be- :0ween them of tour feet hom head to croup. rl'~e instructor 101l0ws, keeping on the inside of the track; observes that the S~at IS not deranged, and that the men conform with suppleness to the motions ot their horses. Passing from one to another, he rectifies their positions SUCcessively, so as to instruct without confusing them.

TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF.

theIUstructor . 176. The commands: c,a,nnoneers marching in column on one of the long sides,

1. Ca1f.nonecrs. 2. HALT.

""~tIUetor tbe secand commands: command tbe cannoneers halt. To resnme the nmrcb the

1. Cannoneers, forward. 2. MARCH. bc ",:f Ut"'en will take care not to incline the hody too mucll forward at the the;h of stopping, and not to lean back at the moment of starting. When alt the instructor will rectify their positions.

TO TROT. 77 horse ;h " .After the cannoneers become habituated to the movement of tho I e Instructor commands:

1. Trot. 2. MARCH. 'id~ o~c~ ..,t cammand, given Whcn thc colnmn is npon one of the long }\,tJ\QClJ the riding-house or ground, the horse is gathered. At th~ command Obeys' LOwer the wlists a little and close the legs gradually untIl the horse l:lIO

To resume the walk, the instmctor commands:

1. Walk. 2. MARCH.

At the command Walk, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, gradually r~ise the wrists, at the same time close the legs to prevent the horse stoppmg. As soon as he walks replace the wrists and legs. All cbang'es of gait should be made gradually.

CHANGES OF HAND.

178. (Plate 19, Fig. 2.) 'When the cannoneers have marched some ti~le to the right hand, (or to the left hand,) to make them change hands WIthout stopping, the instructor commands;

1. File right, (or left.) 2. MARCH. 3. :F'ORWARD.

At the command MARCH, the conductor turns to the right; at the command l!'ORWAR]), he moves straight forward, crossing the riding-house, and fol- lowed by the other cannoneers, until he arrives within two yards of the opposite track, when the instructor commands;

1. File left, (or right.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

At the command MARCH, the conductor turns to the left j and at the command FORWARD, follows the track. The other cannoneers turn upon the same ground. The changes of hand are executed both at the walk and the trot.

TO CROSS REINS IN .MARCHING.

179. The instructor causes the reins to be crossed and separated, as prescribed in No. 157 and No. 158. The cannoneers will avoid abruptnesS in the motions, and not change the gait. . The reins being crossed, in order to turn to the nght, carry the hand for- ward and to the right; to turn to the left, carry the hand forward and to the leftj the nails always downward.

TO TURN BY CANNONEER IN .MARCHING.

180. (Plate 20, Fig. 1.) The cannoneers marching in column, and having arrived about the middle of one of the long sides, the instructor COUl" mand:;;

1. Cannoneers, by tlte right (or left)jlank. 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARD.

At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCIl, each cannoneer executes a turn to the right, and at the command FORWAltP, moves straiO'ht to the front. When th~y arrive within 2 yards of the opposite track, the instructor commanl1s:

1. Cannonccrs, by the right (or left)jlank. 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARP'

.When each cannoneer turns as directed, and moves forward on the trtlc1'. SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. lC3

originalThe same order. movements, wIlen ropeated, bring tho cannonoers to their

MARCHING ON THE SAME LL\TE, TO REVERSE BY CANNONEER.

. 181. (Plate 20, l<'ig. 2.) The cannoneers having turned to tho right, a.s.Just explained, and being near tho opposite track, the instructor comlllands :

1. Cannoneers, rigltt (or left) re'Cerse. 2. MARcn. 3. FORWAltD.

A.t the first command, gather tho horse. .At tho second, each man exocutes tho reverse, and at tbe command FORWARD, moves directly to tho fi'ont. The column is again formed on the track by giving the command:

Cannoneers, by tlte rigltt (or left) }lank-MARCll-FORWARD.

MARCHING IN COLUMN, TO REVERSE BY CANNO:\TEER. 182. The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. :FORWARD.

'\Thieh is executed by each cannoneer, as already prescribed. 18:3. The object of the different turns and reverses being to habituate the cannoneers to tbe control of their horses, they will be executed at first at a Walk only, the turns and reverses to the right being executed during tho in- ~tructi(\'"l to tlte rirrltt hand; and those to the left during the instruction to tlte

TO REST.

th . 184. The instructor causes the turn by cannoneer to be exocuted to lie]' l'Jght or left. \Vhen the column is near the middlo of a long side of the tlis:ug-houso, gives tho command HALT; wlJCn tllCy are clear of the track, ''1~IOuntsthorn, and commands REST. ()ru Creda terminate to file off. the drill, the stirrups are let down, the men dismounted, and

TO REST IN MAHCHING.

ar 185. rrhe instructor sometimes commands REST whilst the eanlloneers th~ Juarching, in order to calm the horses after a quick pace, and to relieve

THE SPUR.

. 187. POl' the remaining portion of the riding-house drill from twelve to sixteen cannoneers may be united. '1'he horses are saddleu and in the snaftie. ,All the movements are explained in detail, and executed by thc right. 11le,.Yare executed by thc left on the sume principles. After the cannoneers he?,lll to execute them with facility. they are made to change their horses (1

TO MOUNT IN TWO RANKS.

188. (Plate 19, Pig. 3.) At the command Prcparc to mount, Nos. 2 and G and the conductor on the left of the ii'ont rank, move 2 yards to the front; Nos. 1 and 5 and the conductor on the left of the rear rank, move 2 yards to the rear, keeping opposite their intervals, and l'egulating by the right. All unhook their sabres when they are worn, and the mounting is th.en completed as prescribed ip. No. 151. The instructol' then causes the silrrups to be crosseu, and commanus:

Form RANKS.

At the command RANKS, Nos. 2, 3, 6, and 7 stand fast, and the con- ductors form on them. Nos. 1, 4, 5, and 8 enter the intervals of their ranks without jostlinO' and without precipitation. The rear ,rank being formed, closes to the di~tance of 2 feet from the front. 189. The instructor then explains the use of the spur. H the horse does not obey the legs, the spur should be employed. It is only necessary to use it occasionally, but always vigorously, and at the mOlllent the horse commits the fault . . To use the spurs, hold firmly to the horse by the leg's; turn the toes lJ, h:,tle out. j g'ive the rein slightly, an<;lpress firmly with the spurs behind the g'llth without moving the body, until the horse obeys. He should never be made to feel the spurs unless there is a necessity for it, and then both should be applied at the same moment.

TO CONDUCT THE CANNONEERS TO THE RIDING-HOUSE.

190. (Plate 19, Pig. 4.) The instructor commands: 1. By thc right (or lcft) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. PORWARD.

At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, thO cannoneer on the right of each rank executes a turn to the right, and DlO,,"cS SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. le5 !orward at the third command, the one of the rear rank approaching, in march- wg', to within 1foot of the one in the front rank. This movement is executed Dj' all the other files in succession. (Plate }9, Pig. 5.) In entering the riding-house, the instructor marches eonullands:the column parallel to the long sides; and when its head is near the middle,

1. Byfile right and left. 2. MARCH. 3. PORWARD.

The conductor of the front rank turns to the left, that of the rear rank to the right; whell they are within 2 yards of the track the instructor Com- lJ1andl;: File riffltt-JIAIlClI-FonWARD. The two columns then march to tl~e right hand l~nd at the same pace; the cannoneers preserve the distance ot 4 feet from head to croup . .TIle conductor of the rrar rank regulates his pace by that of the conductor ofd .tho front rank, so that they shall arrive at the opposite angles of the rl l1lg-hollse at the sallie time. '1'110 instructor sees that the cannoneers lJ10ve at a hee and even pace; that they keep their horses straight; that they preserve their distances, and recover them gradually when lost; that they gather their horses a little be10re arriving at each corner, and excute a turn to tlte rigltt or to tlte left, according as they are marching to the right hand 01: to the left hand. The movements of each should be independent of those of the one who precedes him, and sllOu1d alone controllJis llOrse. are npon191. theA same horse line. is said to be straigltt when his shoulders and haunches If in marehiIlO' to the right tllO borse carries llis shoulders to the right it is ~e~~SSllry to OP~l a little th~ left rein and t~ hold the rigl!t Ie€?near. If h~ CU.Il'ICSlIl his Launches to the nght, close the nght leg and feel lIghtly the left to . If he casts himself towards the interior of the riding-bouse, place him °11 the track by opening the outer rein and closing the inner leg. ,. I ] 9~. 'rhe instructor will cause the men to pass fi'equently from the k to the trot, and from the trot to the walle Tbe changes in the gait ':11 1 be effected graduuJJy. e. 1£)3. Changes of direction in the breadth of the riding-house will be lxeClltodlU1 so us neither to stop nor check the rear of either column; for this e Pose the change will be commenced soon ufrer the heads of columns h[LYe Utorcd upon the long sides of the riding-house. rj]' ]94. (Plate 2U, :Fig. 3.) Changes of direction in the length of the e: ~ng.llOuse will be executed upon tllO sallie prineiples as those in the breadth, ll~ ~lPt that the command File rigltt (or left) will be given by the instructor 1\] 10 heads of columns are entering Upon tl10 short sides, and the command So~~tCII, When the conductors are within 3 yards of the middle of their sides, lat the columns will pass near each other.

CHANGE OF DIRECTION OBLIQUELY BY CANNONEER.

ll ritli .] 0nseU5. (~Iate 21, Fig. 1.) A ehange of direction in the length of the tho illistructor g 11 lS commands: commenced, and as Soon as all the cannoneers have turned,

1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT. to~~l~"'00 holt 0' tho;, prop" distonees; tho instructo, then OOosesthom tion, i~quo to tlte rig/It (or lcjt) as IJrescribed in No. 165; rectifies their posi necessary, und commands: 106 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

1. Cannonccrs. 2. MARCIl.

V!~lCn all move directly ~o their front, retaining their direction and relative posItlOns. .When they arrIve near the tra~k, the instructor commands:

FomVARD.

At this, command ea~h cannoneer executes an oblique to the left, (or right,) so as to follow the truck, and moves forward To execute these movements without halting, the instructor, us soon as the two ranks are in colullln in the length of the riding-house, commands:

1. Cannoncc1's right (or left) obliquc. 2. MARCIl. 3. :FORWARD.

At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, each cannoneer executes the oblique and keeps dircctly to his front. At the com- mand .FORWARD, given whcn the cannoneers are near the track, the.r exe- cute an oblique so as to .1110VO in the original direction. 196. ln all the pre~eding changes of direction, the instructor is governed as to time in giving his commands by the lllOSt advanced conductor, and will then rectify the pace of the other.

TO MARCH IN A CIRCLE.

197. 'Vhen the conductors have passed over about a third of the long sides, the instructor commands:

1. In circlc, to tltc rigltt (or to the lcft.) 2. MARCH. (Plate 21, }~ig. 2.) At the first command, gather the horse. At the com- mand MARCH, the conductors, followed by the cannoneers, describe circles between the two tracks. Each horse is kept on t}le circle with the inner rein, supported at the same time by the leg on that side, the haunches, when necessary, being lwpt in by the outer leg.

TO CHANGE HAND ON THE CIRCLE.

198. The instructor commands:

1. By file right (or left.) 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARD.

(Plate 21, }-'ig. 3.) At the command MARcn, the conductors turn to the right, and, at the command FORWARD, pass through the centre of the cir~le tow~Hds the opposite point of the circumference. 'Vhen they arrive near It, the 1118tructor commands:

1. By file left (or 1o ight.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. al1d At the first command the conductors turn to the left, and at the COlIlIU FOJlw AUD resume their movement in circle. They are followed successivelY in these movements by the cannoneers. The exercise on the circle and changes of hand are executed at a tt.?t, Il according to the same principles. The instructor will see that the men nll11 - tain themselves in the direction of their horses, and sit squarely. SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. 107 When the instructor wishes to resume the exercise on a right Hne, 116tah-s care that the conductors are at opposite POillts of the circumferellco; and whell they arrive on the track of the long side,q, he commands FORWARD. Atthe this track. Command Ihe eOlldllel","s,'"Uowed by tbe cannone"",, m-ent,," upon

199. (Plate 21, Fig. 4.) To 1"ennite tlte cannoneers, the inst111ctor ~auses them to close to a distance of 2 feet, then orders a change of directioll III the breadth of the riding-house at the momellt the conductors are opposite to each other, the even numbers marching towards the entJ:ance. vVhen they arrive near the middle of the Jic1ino'.llOuse, the instructor cOUlmands : Pile lift and rigltt-.MARCH-FORWAIW~ TllO conductor of the fi-ont nmk turns to tl10 left, that of the rear rank to the right, followed by the CUll- noneers, who approach within 1 foot of each other. Instructor. 200. communds'Vhen the : colullln reaches the stuble ;yard, or parade, the

1. Cannonee1's, left into linc. 2. MARCH.

(Plate 21, Pig. 5.) At the command MARCH, each of the two leading cannoneers turns to the left, moves forward 5 ;yards, and halts. The other cannoneers execute the same movement in succession, and take their plaCES, each in his own rank, as prescribed in No. 187. They do not execute the tttrn Until nearly opposite their places.

TO DISMOUNT I~ TWO RANKS.

201. (Plate 19, lTig. 3.) At the command PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, }fos"2 alld 6, alld Ihe eonducto<"on the lell of the front rank, move 2 ym"ds ~o the front; Nos. 1 and 5, and the conductor on the left of the rear rank, move . Yards to the rear; the cannoneers of each rank keeping opposite their InN'0.169~nterYals, and . dressing by the right. They then complete the dismount as

.As saon as tllOY are dismounted, the instructor commands:

Form RANKS.

th~~ this Command Nos. 2, 3, fi, and 7, c1~vate the right lland, so as to bold adell horses firmly, and the conductors form on them; the other numbers <.:1vance and take their proper places in the intervals, and the rear rank then 1] oSes .to 2 feet. The cannoneers file ofr as prescribed in No. 170. Each fi~nfit ofrank the man. real' rank follows, and conforms his movements to those of his

EXERCISE WITH THE STIRRUPS. ris "202. '1'110 stirrups should be of such length that when the cannoneer ":0~8"h"them thom shonld he a space of not om 4 or 5 inehes belween hIs leg -\1 and the saddle. The stirrup should support only the WCig]lt of the higi .le foot shonld be inserted one-third of its length, the heel shOUld be no 1Iorsl01.. e Inthanthe movements. the toe, and in such position that the spur will not touch the

'r0 'rUn",

<~ To THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEF'r BY CANNONEER IN MARCHING. / 203. (Plate 20, Fig. 1.) The inst111ctor causes the movement to loq 108 SCHOOL OF TilE PIECE. executed as prescribed in No. 180. As the cannoneers are marching in two columns, the command MARCH will be given when the leading conductors arrive opposite to the last man but one of the other column. At the command FORWARD, the cannoneers move straight forward and pass through the intervals of the opposite column, keeping their legs near to prevent the horses slackenin.g the gait. The instructor should attach less importance to the uniformity of their movements than to the manner in which each cannoneer manages his horse. ~04. (Plate 20, Fig. 2.) The REVERSE BY CANNONEER, in line and column, are executed as prescribed in No. 181 and No. ]82, the instructor r~quiriDg more regularity as the exercise proceeds, and steadiness in passing through Lhe intervals in line.

TO PASS FROM THE HEAD TO THE REAR OF THE COLUMN.

205. To make the cannoneers masters of their horses, and to force them to use both reins and legs, the men will be required to pass in succes- sion from the head to the rear of tllO column; each becoming in his turn conductor, will regulate himself accordingly. The movement is executed .ill each column at the command Leading cannoneer to rear of column.. The leading cannoneer leaving the head of the column by a 1'igltt or left reverse, as indicated by the instructor, moves parallel to it, and again enters it at the rear by another reverse. He leaves the column so as not to retard those behiud him, and, on re-entering it, closes to four feet ii'om the rear horse.

FROM A HALT TO MOVE AT A TROT.

206. The cannoneers being in column, on the long sides, the instructor commands: 1. Column forward-trot. 2. MARCH.

At the command trot, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, lower the wrists and close the legs progressively nntil the horse obeys. '1'0 HALT, the instructor, when the columns are on the long side, com- mands: 1. Column. 2. HALT.

The instructor requires all the men to set off freely at a trot at the com- mand :MARClI, and to stop together at the command HALT.

TO PASS FROM THE TROT TO THE TROT OUT, AND TO RESUME THE TROT.

207. The cannoneers moving at a trot on the long sides, the instructor commands: TROT OUT. At this command the wrists are lowered, and the legs closed progressive~y until the horse obeys. \Vhen the proper gait is assumed, the instructor WIll see tha.t the men keep tlll:'ir h0rse~ up to it. . . PartIcular attention will be pmd to the pOSItIOn of the cannoneers; they must hold the body erect and easy, the legs falling naturally, and hold the reins with a li~ht hanc1. This will enable them to conform readily to tho motions of the horse. The lengthened gait will only be maintained for onO or two turns towards each hand in the riding-house. SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. 109 crossed,If a horse to correct overreaches,it. the wrists must be more or less raised and the legs To resume the trot, the instructor commands:

SLOW-- TROT.

. At this command elevate the wrists by degrees until the horse obeys, cIos- lUg the legs to prevent his taking tlte walk.

TO PASS FROM THE TIWT TO THE GALLOP.

208. "Vhen the cannoneers have acquired some suppleness and con fidence at the trot and trot out, they take a few turns at the gallop. The 111echanism of the gait is not at first explained, but each man accommodates hunself to the motions of his horse without losing his seat. The rear rank, when on one of the short sides, is formed in line, as pre- Scribed in No. 180, and halted at G yards from the track; the hont rank Continues to march, takmg distances of 3 yards between the horses, pass to t!lell trot, and the cannoneers successively COlllmence the gaJJop at tIle indica- 110 of the instructor, as iollows : On approaching the corner, trot out, feel slightly the left rein, so as to k~ep back the left shonlder, and leave t110right one ii'cc. At the moment ot passinO" tIle corner close tll() legs equally, but not suddenly; when the athorse the ga!l~ps, gait. hold a Jig'ht rein, and the legs closed SUfficiently to keep him

Atter One or two turns, pass from the gallop to the trot, and walk; change hands in the breadth of tIle riding-house, and gallop to the left hand. 'fhe ii'ont rank is then formed in line on the other short side, and the rear rank carried through the same exercise.

TO PASSAGE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT.

, 209. The two columns marching at a walk upon the long sides, the ~structor causes them to execute the turn by cannoneer, as prescribed in J., o. 180, and halts them, head to the wall, w1len they arrive near the oppo- Site side. He then commands:

1. Right pass. 2. MARCH. 3. Cannoneers. 4. HALT.

1" .l\t the cOlllmand MARCH, opcn the right rein to incline the llOrse to the ,J.'?,ht,Closing at the same time tlw left leg, that the Launches may Jallow 1;"/'ont lenning U>o body to tho loft; make o"e of tl>o left "ein and right g to :support the horse and moderate his movements. ", frt tbe eommand HAL'l', given an" a tow step, have been talmn, grad- 1'e'1 y Cease the effect of the right rein and left leg, employing the opposite '1~and leg; straighten the horse, and replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 'l'f l'ASSAGECSC 'ro 'rUE LE.wr and to HAL'!', employ the same means. too-",e tlL er movemcnts are at first executed by tlw men separately, and then ",~~l,o c~nnenoe, '!wnld hold hi, hm'se obliquely to tl,o ''''ok, '0 mndm'!,;, gellt~:ll()nt more easy; the horse haVing obeyed, the effect is 1,ept up by tile l)~'lllCJplesll1~ans, laid and down. the motions and positions of the horse are regulated upon no SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

210. The passage to the right or left in column is effected on the same principles. For this purpose a change of directIOn in the length of the ndmg--house is commenced, and when the columns are parallel to and oppo- Site each other they are halted, and the passage ordered, so as to separato thc21 until each is again on the track, when they march forward, and the mOH,ment is repeated, which causes each horse to passage in a duection op- POSItC to the first one. 211. During the last days of instruction with the stirrups, the in- struct(ll', in order to preparc the cannoneers for the use of the curb bridle, "'ill cause them, from time to time, to cross reins in the left hand, so that they will conduct the horses with this hand alone. He will see thttt each man sits squarely on his horse during such exercise.

THE CURn DRIDLE.

212. The horses are taken saddled, and in both curb and snaffle. In tllC first lesson they condud the horse to the riding-house with the snaffie, which is held in the right hand, tllO reins of the curb being in the left.

POSITION OF THE DRIDLE HAND.

213. The reins, ,,-ith their slide, in the left. hand; the little finger between the reins, the otber fingers well closed; the thumb upon the second joint of the first finger: the elbow slightly detached ti-om the body, the hand 4 lllches above the pommel of the saddle, the tingers (j inches from and turned towards the body; the little tinger a little nearer the body than the ul'lwr part of the wrist: the right hand at the side. To ,\D.TUST THE REI~S, the cannoneer seizes them with the thumb and fo:'eringer of the right llaml at the button or centre, partly opens the left hand ~o as to let them slide throug-h it, ('levates the reins untIl they bear equally, closes the left hand upon them, and lets fall the end of the reins amI the right haml. To TAKE TIIG S~AFFLE l~ TIlE RIGHT HAND, the instructor commands, S~L\.FFLE l~ nIGII'r llA~D; the cani10neer grasps the snaHl.e with the right lIand, nails downward, holds the reins of the snaffle over those of the curb, and lowers the left hand so as not to bear upon the bit. In using alternately the curb and snaffle, the bars of the horse's mouth are relieved. Both should never be used at the same time. The cannoneers arc required to take the snaffle in the right hand during the first exercises with the curb bridle, in order to keep up his right side. which is apt to remain in rear. . At the command DROP S~AFFLE, tho loft hand is replaced, and the roIIIS of the snaffie allowed to fall so that they will be under those of the curb, tllc right hand at the side.

l\IOVEJ\JEN'l'S OF THE DRIDLE HAND.

214. By raising the hand slightly, and drawing it tov,'ards the body, the horse is gathered; by raising it still'more, the gait is made slowerj b); l increasing the effect of the hund, the horse is stopped; if increased stl ClOre, the horse is moved backwards. By lowering' the hand, tho horse is permitted to move forward; by eM,ry' ing it forward, and to tho right, the horse is turned to the right; by carrYI~I.g it forward, and to the left, he is turned to the left. As soon as tho hope obeys, the hand should ue replacod. . SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 111 III allmQvements of the hanel, the arm should act freely and without con. st~int to the body; anel as the effect of the curu is more powerful than that reiningof the snaffle, back. it should be used progressively, particularly in stopping and

215. To apply the foregoing principles, the instructor should nrst take tIle cannoneers through the EXERCISES A'I' A HAL'!', (Nos. 153 to 169,) a~d then through the lVfAIWIIINGS, (No. 174. etc.) He will not require tho ~lfferent movements to be executed simultaneously, but Observe the manner !ll wllich eaell man employs his bridle hand. .When SUfficiently advanced 1U the different movements with the curb. he will cause them to march upon the track, nrst at a waLk, then at a trot. TIle habitual fault with riders being to carry the left hand iorward, and to throw back the right shoulder, the instructor is particular in requiring them to keep that hand above the POlllmel of the saddle, without deranging the position of the body. COll1lllands:216. '1'0 '!'AI{E BOTIl REINS IN. TIlE BRIDLE IIAND, the instructor

SNAFFLE IN LEFT HAND. '1.'he cannoneer theu passes the reins of the snaffle between the forennger band thumb of the left hand, nails under, and draws in the hand towards the ody Until the reins of the curb bridle cease to act upon the bit. 1'0 DRop TIlE SNAFI"LE, the instructor commands:

DROP SNAFFLE. 1'he cannoneer lets go the snaffle without inclining the body, retakes the POsition of the bridle hand, and acljusts the reins. h 'rhe snaffle is not tali.en in the lelt hand until the men have acquired the aLit of conducting their horses with the curb bridle. '1'0 PASSAGE TO TIlE HIGH'I' with the curb bridle, or with both reins in tho 'ight hand, hea' the ,honldill-, of 'he I'ome to the dght by inclining tho I'and j'>nva,d and to tho 'ight; do'e tho 101\log, that the Im"''''hos may Jol. loWj keep the right leg near, to sustain tllC borse. In order to cease the a11rC~Passage,leg uy straigllten degrees. the horse; lwld the right leg near, and replace the hand I he passage to tile left is executed according to the same prineiples.

PRINCIPLES O~' THE GALLOP.

1 217. A 110rse gallops on tlte riglttfoot wIlen the ricrht fore and hind (lg8 l1~Ovein adnlllce of those of the leftj he gallops on lIte left foot .when o~o ~Cltto'e and hiad legs am in advance. He gaJJop, t,uo when he gallop, cx,~ : .nght 100t in exercising or turning to the right, or on the left foot in to :' "s>ng odnmi ng to tl>o Jolt; and gaJJop, false, if in exerei,ing m- tarning lie l"lght he galJops on the left 100t, or conversc>ly. thc ~o",_ois di,uuit"l whe~ he gaJJops witl. the no",- fo~e log foJJowod hy \\? hlIld leg, or tbe oft fore leg followed by (he near lund leg. 1110 ' hell tl~e horse galJops on the left foot, tIle rider experiences a sensible Joo;O,,,nl m hi, po,sition J,om 101\ '0 "ig1>t. When 1>0gaJJop, on Iho .ight llllit'e tIe 1l10:,oment of.the rid?r i~ hOlll.r.igh~ to len. .When the horse is elis- Of rr .?, .tho nder expenences III hIS POSltlOUIrregular movements; the centre ~IUVlty of the horse it; deranged and his strength impaired.

EXEnCI::-'h AT A GALLOP. ~o .. 20 ~18. 1'he cannoneers of the rear ranii being formed, as prescribed in b, the instructor causes those of the ii'ont rank to take distance of 3 112 SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. yards; and ,,-hen they arc march:ng at a trot, and to the right hand, on one of the long sides, he commands:

1. Gallop. 2. MARCH.

At the command Gallop, gather the horse, keep him perfectly straight; and at the command MAUCIl, carry the lmnd slightly forward, and to tlw left, to enable the right shoulder to move in advance of the left, and close the legs behind the girth, in order to urge the horse forward, causing him to feel lightly the effect of the left leg. The horse having obeyed,. hold a light hand, and the legs ncar, to keep him at his gait. The lUen must conduct their horses steadily and quietly, I1nd keep a light hand, that the gallop may be free and regular. At first they will take the reins of the snaffle in the right httnd, to calm their horses; arterwards they \yill gallop with the curb bridle alone. To keep the horse true, the rider should accommodate himself to all his motions, particularly in passing the corners. \Vhen the horse gallops fttlse, or is disunited, the cannoneer is ordered to take the trot und pass to the rear of the column, takmg care not to interfere ",eat a slow gait, whIch \"ill not be increased until the horses oecome perlectly calm.

MANUAL OF THE SABRE.

221. The cannoneers marehing by flank, as in No. 190, the instructor halts the front rank, and whell the rear mnk is disengaged, forms it to the left in line as directed ill No. :.:;UUj after which the fi.ont rank is formed OIl its left in the same manner. The instructor then cOlllllHlnds :

DratC-SABRE. 2 motions. At the command Dralo, incline slightly the head to the left, carry the r!gh~ haml above the reins, engage the Wl'lst in the sword knot, seize the grIpe, draw the blade G inches from the scabbard, and tnrn the head to the front-. , . At the command SAmm, draw quickly tbe sabre, raising the arm to ~.~ full length j hold the sabre in tdJis position an instaI~t, then carry it t

Present-SABRE.

222. At the command SABRE, carry the sabre forward, the thumb opposite to and 6 inches from the neck; the blalle perpendicnlar; the edge theto the otl18rs. left; the thumb along the side of tllO gripe; tbe little finger joined to

Carry-SABRE.

223. At the command SABRE, carry the back of the blade against tlJQ tinger~OlIow outside of the shoulder,the gripe. the 'wrist upon the upper part of the thigh, the little

Inspection of SABRE. 2 pauses; 3 motions.

224. At tbe command SABRE, present the sabre. tUrnTWo. the wrist Turn back. the wrist inwards, exhibit tbe otber side of the blade, and 'l'IIREE. Carry the sabre to the shoulder.

Return-SABRE. 2 motions.

225. At tbe command Return, present the sabre. tt;At the Command SABRE, carry tbe wrist opposite to and 6 inches from the l1 shoUlder; lower the blade nlang the left nr111,the point to the rear; in- e IUe the head slightly to the left, nnd fix the eyes upon tbe mouth of the ~caLbard; return tbe blade, disengage tho wrist from the sword knot, turn he head to tIle front, and adjust tbe reins.

1) , .226. The cnnnoneers wi11 be required to draw and return sabre whi~3t s~Ulclllng at a ':~lk in, colunn:, t110 ins~ructor taking care th~t neither the is at liar the pos1t1On at the bndlo 1tand IS deranged, that the nght shoulder s't~~~ thrown back whell the sabre is drawn, and that the llOrse is l,ept .

SABRE EXERCISE.

CUllS 227. The cannoneers marclJing'llt a v:alk in two columns, tll" illstl'l~(,i('\' C

1. By tltc right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. HAL'!'. lIe Cn 1-'01' ti Uses them tIlOn to execute tlw sabre exercise, as taught on foot. to lllal.o lOI eXorcise at a halt, the instructor employs only the time necessary 'I'ho' / le caunoneers comprehend the details. .

~U.bre,~a 1~1.01l execute progressively, at the different gaits, the exercise of the "lJlg care to preserve between each other tho distance of '2 yar ", 8 /1 SCHOOL OF TliE PIECE. 114

TO LEAP THE DITCH AND THE BAR.

228. For this exercise the width of the ditch should be from 3 to 5 feet, and the height of the bar from 1 to 3 feet. The width and heiO'ht ot each should at first be the minimum j they are increased as the me~ and horses become more habituated to leaping. The instructor forms tbe cannoneers in one rank, 30 yards in rear of the

obstacle.At th#3warning of the instruetor each man moves off at a loalk, directs his march towards the obstacle, and at a third of the way COll1mencestlte trot.

TO LEAP THE DITCH.

229. On arriving near the ditcll, give the hand and close the leO's, to force the horse to ~nake the leap. . 'I'h? moment he reaches the ground~raise slightly the hand III order to sustmn hIm.

'1'0 LEAP THE BAR.

230. On arriving near the bar, rein up the horse slightly, and ClOse the legs. At the moment of making the leap, give the hand, and elevate it slightly as soon as he reaches the ground on the other side. The cannoneer, in leaping, should cling to the horse with the thighs and calves of the legs, taking care to lean a little forward as the horse is in the act of springing, and to scat himself well, by leaning to the rear, at the moment the horse reaches the ground. Each man, after having made the leap, continues to move at the trot, and takes his 1)1acein the rank which is formed 30 yards beyond the obstacle,

taking care to pass to the walk just before halting. 1S During the first days of this exercise, the cannoneers leap without arn , the instructor causing them to take the snaffie in the right hand. Afterwards they repeat the same exercise with arms, and finally with the sabre drawn. u Horses should Lot be made to leap more than two or three times in 6 j one day. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE • 115

.A R TIC J.I E S I X T H.

'l'HE DETACHMENT.

I-Iorse A1.tillery.

231. The detachment is formed in two ranks, with closed intervals; the distance between the ranks 2 feet, measuring from head to croup. It is tolds ofr as in mounted artillery, exceptmg tbat two additional men, required 1horse holders, and numbered 9 and 10, are posted, No.9 in the centre of t Ie.rear, No. 10 in the centre of the fi'ont rank. The gunner, when not him- self the instructor, takes his place on the right of the !i'ont rank. . In BAT'l'ERY MANillUVRES, No.8 is posted with the caisson, of which he gunner.IS chief, and manoouvres with it.. He is replaced in the detachment by the

TO .MOUNT AND DISMOUNT IN TWO RANKS.

232. To MOUNT.-The instructor commands:

1. PrepaJ'e to mount. 2. MOUNT.

6 (Plate 22.) At the command Prepare to mount, the gunner, No.4 and No . .' 1110ve2 yards to the hont, Nos. :3 and 5, 2 yards to the rear, covering the11' Intervals; the mounting is then completed. The instructor then Commands:

Form-RANI{S.

fo ~t this command, the gunner and Nos. 4 and 6 stand fast, and the others 2 l~,nleet,On them without jostllllg or precipitation, the rear rank closing IIp to

233. To DISMOUNT.-The instructor commands:

1. Prepare to dismount. 2. DISMOUNT.

'Vl~~late 22.) At the first command, the gunner and Nos. 4 and 6 move for- l'ho(~ and .Nos. 3 and G rein back 2 yards, and the dismount is completed. CHInInstructor then commands Form-HANKS, which is execut?d by the l"alllloneer~ leading their horses into the proper intervals, and closmg up tIle (S, as 1ll the directions for mounting. .

TO FOIL'\! I:J ONE RANK.

23,1. The instructor eommands :

1. Left into single rank. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Right DRESS. 5. FRON'l'. 4t the 8 ol11 tlll"lls C' mand l\.LmcH, the gUilner advances 5 yards, and halts. No. ' shQrt to the left, and 1l10yes forward; he is followed by the other 110 SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. cven numbers, who cxecute successively the same movement. At the com- mUlldl-L\LT, given in time to enable him to take his proper distance, No.8 tnrns short to the right, and moves forward, until on a line with the gunner. The other even numbers turn in time to place themselves in ranl~ succes~ sivc1y, on the right of the cannoneer, who precedes him. At the conu11an<1 Right DRESS, the odd numbers move to their front, and align themselves on the gunner. At the command FRONT, all cast their eyes to the ii"ont.

ALIGNMENTS.

235. GENERAL PRINCIl'LES.-The cannoneers in dressing must square their shoulders by those of the man next to them on the side towards the guide, and cast their eyes in that direction, until they see the breast of the second man from them, feeling lightly the boot of the man on that side, and keeping their horses straight on the line. \Vhen there are two ranks, the rear rank men cover their front rank men accurately, preserving the dis- tance of 2 feet from head to croup. 23G. SUCCESSIVE ALIGNMENT OF FILES-TO THE FRONT.-Two or more files of the right are moved forward, and aligned by the commands Two (or -) right files jorward-MARCH-HALT-Right DRESS. The in.~ stJ'uctor then commands: 1. By file, Right DRESS. 2. FRONT.

At the first command, the files move forward successively j the cannoneers turning the head to the right, and taking the last steps slowly, so as not to pass the line. Each file moves when the preceding one arrives on the base of alignment. \Vhen the la,;t file is aliglled, the instructor conmlUnus :FRONT, and all turn their heads in that direction. 2:37. To '1'118 REAR.-Two or more files of the rio-ht are made to reio back 2 yanIs, and align themselves opposite their place~, by the commands Two (or _) riglttjilcs backward-MARcn-IIALT-Right DRESS. The iu' strudor then commands: 1. By file, Right backwa1°d DRESS. 2. FRONT.

At the command DRESS, the tiles rein back in succession, keeping perfectlY straight, The cannoneers turning their beads to tlJc right, pass a little the files already formcLl, and then dress up. . ot l" The cannoneers rein back slowly. 'Vhen there are two ranks, the r : . runk men regulate tllCl1lsclvcs on their file leaders, preserving always tbe!~ proper distance. \Vhen the last iile is aligneLl' the command :Fn.oN'r I:> given, of 238. To ALlGS TIlE DETACIIl\IENT.-The instructor places the file>. the fluuk on which he .wishes to align it in such position that no cunnoucel will be forced to rein back, and commands: 1. Right DRESS. 2. :FRONT. M At the first command, all the cannonecrs align themselvcs promptly. the second, they cast thcir eyes to th? front. .. The alio"nments are made to the lelt on the same pnnCIples. It The [l.li;';.llment to the rear gives the meallS of returnillg to the aligul~n~.. WLOllit h~lS been passed moor, but it shonld be avoide(l us much as pOSSl )",l 1e The t:annoneers should always align thcmselves on the breast of t: SC~(~lllJ man towards the side of the alignment, and not lip on the extrenIlt)' 01 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 117 ~ank; the rear rank men being cmeful to cover accurately their file leaders. longThe Illen time will gathered. align themselves promptly, that the horses may not be kept a 239. \Vhen the cannoneers are not aligned, it is generally because tho horses are not straight in the ranks. In dressing to the right, if tllO men on the left of the detachment are in rear, it is presumed tlwt most of the 11Or60s are turned to the left. If this is the case, tbe horse is placed on tho align- lllent by carrying the hand to the right and closing the right leg. If; after forward.squaring his horse, the cannoneer finds himself bebind the line, he moves It;. in dressing to the right, the cannoneers on the left are in advance of th?s hne, it is presumed that the horses are turned to the right. To rectify tLl , carry the hand to the left; closing the left leg; those who are still in ad vance will then rein back. In dressing to the left, the same faults are corrected by inverse means. 240. During the alignments the instructor places himself in ii'ont of the cannoneers, to see that they move steadily, and do not turn the llCad too Inuch; that they do not open tbe knee in order to feel the boot j that tlwy Erevent tbeir borses ham crowding those already formed; that they take the at,o.st once. steps slowly; align themselves without losing time, and give the band

cabu'1.'he the alignments horses. will be occasionally interrupted by marches, in order to

TO FORM IN TWO HANKS.

1l:lands:241. The detachment being formed in one rank, the instructor com.

1. Rigltt into two ranks. 2. MARCH. 3. Right DRESS. 4. FRoN'r.

tll ~t the Command MARCH, the gunner advances 5 yards and halts. No.2 to I:L8 to the right, moves along the front of the odd numbers, and turns short fOlI e left in time to halt sqnare in front of No. 1. The other eyen numbers Po ?~v his movements, and form on his left. As soon as the fi'ont rank is in l'ols~~lOl1,the rear rank takes the distance of two teet, and at the tbird and \V- I Command the detachment is aligned to the right. fOte h?n formed in two ranks, the detachment will be taken through the gOIng movements together.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS.

242. To OI'EN THE RANKS.-The instructor comme,nds:

1. To tlte rear, open order. 2. MARCH. 3. Right DRESS. 4. FRONT. tll,~ .t~e COmmand MARCH, the front rank remains immoYable; the rear lea

1. Close order. 2. MAUCH. 3. Right DRESS. 4. FRONT. 118 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

At the command MARcn, the rear rank closes to the distance of 2 feet from the front, each cannoneer accurately covering his file leader. At the third command, the detachment is aligned to the right.

TO REIN DACK THE DETACHMENT.

244. The detachment being at a halt, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment, backwards. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide IUGHT.

At the command MARCH, all the cannoneers rein back at once, following the principles already prescribed for the movement, and regulating them~ selves by the guide. After they have reined back some steps, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment-HALT. 2. Right (or left) DRESS. 3. FRONT.

TO MARCH THE DET ACHl\1ENT BY FILE.

245. To THE PRONT-(Plate 22.)-The detachment being at a haIt, the instructor commands:

1. DoublQ.files front the right, 2. MARCIl.

At the first command, the cannoneers .of the right file gather their horses, as do the others, in succession, as soon as the file on their rio-ht is in motion. At the command MARCIl, the right file moves straio-ht to the front. Each of the other files move as soon as the rCl1rrank man ~f the file on its right is on a line with its front rank man. These two cannoneers advance G yards abreast, oblique to the rightj march in a new direction until nearly opposite their places, when they olJlique to the left, so as to enter the column; tbe rear rank man then quickens his pace, and takes his position at the side of his proper front rank man. To break the detachment by tlte [pft the movement is executed according to the same principles, at the commands:

1. Double files from tlte left. 2. MARCH.

246. To THE RIGHT (or LEF'l'. )-The instructor commands:

1. By tlte right (or lift) flank. 2. MARcn. 3. FORWARD.

(Plate 19, Fio-. 4.)-At the first command, gather the horses. At tbe command ~L\RC'lI, the cannoneer on the right (or left) of each rank executc~ 11 turn to the riO'ht, (01' left,) and moves f01'\\"ard, the one in the real' ran ~ approaching hi~ fi'ont mnl~ man. This movement is executed by all the other cannoneers in succeSSIOn. "Vhen the o-unner is in the ranks, he constitutes a file; all the movcmcnts are made as it. he were an even number, and the file complete. 247. To form a detachment by file when it is in march, the samC cor: mands arc given as if it were at a balt. At the commal1l1 MARCIl, all r~ cannoneers except the file which commences the mOV6ment halt, if the (e SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 119 htclll11cnt is at a walk; or walk, if it is at a trot; and the moyemeut is executed as already directed, inl'esuming the original gait.

DIRECT MAltCH IN FILE.

248. The even numbers are guides; they preserve the distance of 2 feet frOIll bead to croup, move steadily, and regain the distances gTadually tOUch'vhen of lost. the boot.The odd numbers dress on their guides, keeping up lightly tho

CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE.

249. The column marching, the instructor commands:

1. By file, lrft (or right.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

At the command M~;\RCH, the left (or right) cannoneer at the 110ad of the ColUmn executes the turn; the Calmonecr abreast of him conforms to the lnovement, increasing bis gait and keeping up the touch of the boot. At the COlnmand ]<~OInvAIw, both move to tbe hont at the original gait. Tbe other cannoneers execute the same movement on HlO same ground.

TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF.

250. To halt the column, the instructor commands:

Column-HALT. '1'0 resume the march, he commands:

1. Colunin, forward. 2. MARCH.

OBLIQUE IN FILE.

251. The column marching, the instructor commands:

Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. MARCH.

~l~t the Command ~f~R~H, each ~ann~neer obliques to the left; the. leading 'va ,~O~leerof the lelt 1lle IS the gUIde ot the column, and moves straight for- 8'l~I In the new clirc<.;cion: the other cannoneers of that file move in the

POIlWAIW. e '1'L ~~liquG2 to the right is executed ou the same principles. 'vhich tt . Ii! the oblique march, the guide is always on the side towards Orig'h.l'IIC.obhque is made; and, at the commandl<'oRW1\Iln, returns to the C01.l11l1~ n\.llS.,~<;~de. The chauge of guides will be made without any special [20 SCHOOL OF 'rIlL; PIECE.

If the guide of allY rauk ceases to he all the line of the guiL1cof tIle column, llC quickens or shortens the pace without dutllging direction, in order to recover his place. If the other cannoneers become c1isuuited, they rejoin the guide of tllCir rauk, takiug care liot to lose their aligmucnt, nor to retard those who man:h Lehiud them.

TO BREAK INTO SINGLH FILE.

253. The column marching' iu double file, the instructor commands:

1. In single file. 2. MARCIl.

At the command single file, all the cannoneers, except the even number at the head of the column, prepare to halt. At the COllUlH1Dll M.'\ItClI, tilCy halt. As soon as the odd Humoer of the first mnk is passed by the horse of the evcn munlJer, be enters the colulllH by two successive oblique 1l10VC- meuts. Each nmk of two executes in succession the same movement, the even lllllubers breakiug as soou as tl;e odd uUllloer of the rank in hout C0111- meuccs obliquing to euter the colulllll. The gait is regulated so as to kecp the distances. "When the column is at a trot or gallop, it is Lroken into single files accord- ing to the sume principles and by the same commands; the even number of the leading rank continues the gait; the others coming- to a walk in case tllC column is at a trot, or a trot in case it is at a g'alIop, as soon as the command ~LUlCII is g'iven, and resuming the original gait to cnter the column. 254. The column by single file may be formed from the detachment when in line, by the commands:

]. flingle file j1'01n the right. 2. MARCH.

At the commandl\IARCII, the file indicated moves to the front. When the tXOUP of the rear rank horse is opposite the head of the leading horse of the next file, that file puts itself in motion, advances 5 yards. obliques to the right, and agaiu to the left, so as to cnter the column. Each file takes up the movement in succes:.;ion. governing itself by that of the file on its right. The column is formed in sing'le file from the left Oll the same principles. The movement in single file will never be used in the artillery except when unavoidable. TO :FORM IN DOUBLE FILES.

255. The column being in single file, marching, or at a walk, tho instructor cOllllllunds : 1. Double files. 2. MARCIl.

At the first command, all gather their horses. At the command MAReI,I! the odd munbers oblique to the right, if the right is in front; to the left, It, the left is in front j and, by another oblique, pluce themselves at the sidc~ ?f their even numbers, quickeniug' the gait for the purpose if the columlllS III march. All close up to 2 feet from head to croup.

TO FORM THE nH'l'ACHMENT IN LI:'ilE.

256. To THE FRONT.-The detachment marching in double :files, right in front, the instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, into lint'.. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide RIGHT. SCHOOL OF TIlE PIECE. ]21 ~t th.e first command, all gather their horses; the odd numbers slacken tlleu' gaIt until they are on a line with tllO next even number behind them. At the cOlllmand MARCH, the guide of tlw column continues to advance; tile, other cnnuOllccrs oblique to the left, qUickening their gait, until opposite ~ lel.r places in line; then they oblique to the right, and form in succession In ~llJe, each in his proper rank. Tlw instructor gives the command for the gUIde immediately after the command l\fARClI. v\Theu tIle detachment is at a llult, the leading guide, at the first command, ~~oves lorwurd 5 yards and llalts, and the movement is executed as already cOmmands:Irected, except that instead of the conlluand for the guide, the instructol'

3. Rig1lt DRESS. 4. FRONT.

257. To THE RIGHT.-The instructor Commands:

1. Cannoneers, on right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Right DRESS. 4. FRONT.

~t the first command, the odd numbers slaeken the gait until they are on a IllJe with the next even number bellind them. At the command .MAltClf, tllO guide of tbe column turns to the right, ~dvauces 5 yards, and halts; the other cannoncers continue to advance, turn In succession to the right, and form in line; each in his proper rank.

258. To THE LEFT.-The instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, to tlte left into line. 2. MARCH. 6. Right DRESS. 4. FRON'f.

f Atthe the first command, gather the horses. At the eOlllmand MARCH, eaeL 1.1I two leading cannoneers turns to the l(.ft, moves forward 5 yards, and ,1: ts. The other cannoneers execute the same movement in succession, l~hell11Ie; each tlJey inare his nearly own opposite rank . their places, tLlllI take their proper positions in

• ~1} foruling line to the right, and to the left, the command Rigltt DRESS is Cn "'he'n the leading cannoneer halt.'3. The COllllIland .FRON'!' is given ~'b011 the last file is alio'ned.

t1l. r,o25£). vVhen the ~olunlll is moving left in front, the line is formed to C J1" nt, left, and right, on the same principles.

DIRECT MARCH IN LINE.

tlIC. 260. It is important in the direct march to keep the horses straight in tile . To keep themselYCs aligned, the eannoneers should feel lig .r lr lltl 1 es ~ot of tIle llJan 011 the side of the guide, nwreh at au equal g'ait, and /Sid~CI ~'e the head direct. TIte)' SllOUld yield to all pressure eomillg fi'om the 'l~Iat tb~ gUide, and resist that eoming hom the opposite side. stea jl?1UegUl(~es should lllardl at a free and steady gait, and change it with 1/ >5 , 11l order to avoid irregUlarity in the ranks. t~ll' f.l tlle caunoneers are in hont or in rear of the alignment, too near or too grad ~llltbe llJan on tllO side of t.he guide, they move Ji"om or approach him \V11

The cannoneer of the flank opposite the guide is not required to preserve the head direct. He aligns himself on the general front of the detachmen.t, and on the guide, which is commanded altel'lmtely to the right and lelt. When halted, the alignment is ordered towards the side of the guide. 261. The detachment being in line, the instructor commands:

1. To the l{'ft, (or right,) open files. 2. MARCIl. 3. Right (or lGJt) DUESS. 4. FRONT.

At the command MARCTT, all the cannoneers, except the right file, passage to the left. The nex.t cannoneer straightens his horse, and halts as soon as he has gained an interval of 1 yard. Each of the oHwr cannoneers executes the same movement, regulating the interval by the Blall 011 his right. The cannoneers of the rear rank follow their file leaders, and keep their proper intervals. The instructor orders the alignment as soon as the second mall from the right has attained his interval. \Vhen it is completed. the instructor indi- cates to the guide of the right, or of the left, a fixed point, in a direction perpendicular to the front of the detachment. He instructs him to take all intermedmte point; never to lose sight of these two; and to select a more distant point as he approaches the one nearest to him. '.(0 give a point of direction, the instructor places himself exactly be~iDd the right file, or the left file, and indicates to the cannoneer of the front rank an object on the ground, which is immovable, and can be distinctly seen; such as a steeple, a tree, or a house. The cannoneer of the rear rank keeps himself always in file, and at his proper distance. 262. '1'0 march the detaclllnent forward, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide RIGHT, (or LEFT.)

At the command MARCIl, which is immediately followed by that for tho guide, all the canIlonccrs move straight forward, at the same gait with the lllen on the side of the guide, towards whom, as they are not boot to boot, they should give a glance from time to time. Durin

1. Detachment-HAl.T. 2. Right (or leJt) DRESS. 3. FUONT.

263. The cannoneers having' been sufficiently exercised in marching with open files, the instructor halts the detachment, and cOIllmands :

]. To the right, (or /rift,) close files. 2. MAllcn. 3. Right (or l{'ft) DRESS. 4. :FRONT.

At the command MARCIl, .all the cannoneers, except the right file, passage to the right, and resume thOlr places, boot to boot. 2\i4. After the files arc closed, the detachment is put in motion by the commands prescribed in No. 262. . The cannoneers move straight forward, feeling lightly the boot towards the side of the guide. .' 265. .When the llIen begin to manage their horses properly at the wul1~, SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 123 tllCy Me required to open and close files whilst marching at the same gait, the instructor taking care not to repeat these movements too often, but to make them march some time after having opened the files before closing posethem, he and cOlllmands after having : closed the files before opening them. }~or this pul'.

1. To tlte left, (or right,) open jiles. 2. MARCH.

At the command MARCIl, all the cannoneers, except the right file, oblique to the left, qUickening the gait so as to preserve their alignment. When they forward.~re 1yard ti'om the lUan on the right, they straighten their horses, and move To close files, the instructor commands:

]. To tlte right, (or left,) close files. 2. l\-.LmcII.

Each cannoneer, except the guide, obliques to the right until closed, pre- Serves the alignment, and resumes the march to the hont, witllOUt pressing On the man towards the side of the guide. guide.The files are always opened hom and closed towards the direction of the

266. These movements having beell executed to the right, and to tho l.eft, in marching at the walk, are repeated at the trot, in passing frequently ~rolll the walk to the trot, and fi'om the trot to the walk The detac1J111ent lllUrchingIS then exercised at this gait. in commencing the trot fi'OIll a lwlt, and in halting whilst 207. To exercise the cannoneers in the direct march at the gallop, tho SilaneproO'ression is followed as at the walk and trot, except that the ranks ILreueithgrll openeduor closed. The rear rank preserves exactly its distance. ;Yhe exercising at a gallop, the detaclllncnt should 1labitually pass to t.110 thO~aud the walk before being 11altecl; but when the cannolleers are masters of ell' horses, it may be halted sometimes without changing the gait.

WHEELING.

11 .268. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.-In executing a wl10eI wllilst 1110 detac1l- g-~~ntIS in march, the condnctor of tllO marching flank should iDcrease his 1'~lt, a.llll describe his are so as to cause tllC iiles neither to open nor closo. n., ~et PIVot describes an arc of a circle of 2 yards l'allills ill slackening tlJQ U'll . .'rhe cannoneers ham the centre to the marching flank increase, and c ~OS~ from tho eentre to the pivot decrease the gait progn>ssivel.y, so that tIlo tlCl.ltJCI1lan preserves the gait at which tllC detachment "'as marching'. At '1,,"<1 vI' the w lwei nil "OS "me 'he ""igiual gait, and "mig h'on tlwi,' 1'0'"0'. ot' tll~ c.ollductor of the marching flank .shonldmeasure with IIi" ?yo tIle !tre CitJ1elI: CIrcle he is to pass over, so that It may not be necessary tor tlle flles if 1 to open or close. He turns llis llCad occasionally towards the pivot; lIe /e perceives tlmt the eannoneers are too much crowded or too open, RI'o llcreases or diminishes gradually the extent of his circio in gaining more :;ho~~fldto the hont than to the side. Each cannoneer of ~he hOllt rank li'OIIId1des?ribe his circle in tho ratio of the distance at wl~lCh ~le may Le dilllil/,l~ pIvot; when opened, they should approach the prvot lllsellsibJ;y, irlel'ca~SllJlJgtheir circle by degrees. \Vlwn too much closed, the.y slJOuld At tl e the circle gradual1y. llltll'cl Ie COlllmand PORWARD, they cease to wheel, and resume the direct Leeoll:~ a~ Whatever point of the wheel they may be. The flanks whieh the cVlllPI vots or mal'c11ing flanks, do not Sh\ckcn or augment the pace until. llland of execution is given. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 124

2(>9. The wheelings are executed at first in sinO'le rankj for tlois pur. pose the detachment is formed in one rank, and, being ~tligned, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment in circle, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH.

At the command MARCH, the cannoneers put themselves in motion, tho pivot describing the arc of a circle of which the radius is 2 yards, at a slow gait; the marching flank moves briskly aml regulates itself by the pivot, avoiding all pressure in the ranks. :'>'70.""Vhen the detachment has executed several wheels, to halt it, the instructor commands:

I..Detachment, HALT. 2. Left (or right) DRESS. 3. FRONT.

At the command HALT, the cannoneers straighten their horses and halt with steadiness. Before dressing tlle detachment, the cannoneer on the marching flank is made to come up abreast of the pivot man, so that tho others will not have to rein back in order to align themselves. 271. The detachment is then marched forward, and made to recom- mence the wheel whilst marching, and by the same commands. At the first command the pivot man prepares to slacken, and the marching flank to quicken the gait, so that the centre man will preserve the gait at whi<.:h ho ,vas marching; the wheel ~s then executed as prescribed. ""Vhen the in- structor wishes the detachment to take the direct nutrch instead of halting, ho commands: 1. :FORWARD. 2. Gltide right (or left.)

At the command FORWARD, the pivot resumes the gait at which it was previously marching; the otller cannoneers straighten their horses, and th~ two flanks move forward at the same gait, confol'llling to the }H"inciples ot the direct march. \Vhen the cannoneers have executed several wheels to the right and to the left, iuterrupted occasionally by direct marches, and when the horses becOlUe calm, the instruetor causes them to pass to the trot. After several wheelS at the trot they resume the walk. . 272. vVhen sufficiently exercised in single rank, the cannoneers :\1'0 formed in two ranks, and the w heels executed in following the same grada- tion. The instructor commands:

1. Detachment in circle, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCil. Cut At the command MARCH, the men of the front rank execute the moycll1 as prescribed in No. 2GD, the cannoneers of the rear rank turn the head an~ carry the hand towards the marching flank, so that each one may be out ot the direction of his file leader by two men. For this purpose, the moment the wheel COllllllences, each rear rank man executes a quarter turn to the left if the \v heel is to tlle right; to the right if the wheel is to the left, keep' ing, durin'" the wheel, in the direction of his new file lmtder, and rmllaining' at the dist~nce of 2 feet from the h'ont rank. The two rear mnk men on tboo marching flank, who are without file leaders, should describe their eird without being further outside of the front rank than is necessary, and b~ able to reSUllle their p1ace~ bel~ind their tile leaders easily. During tlle ,~h~cfel they should regulate theIr gaIts s? that the nmr rank, which aligns It5 upon them, may be at its proper distance. 273. To stop the wheel, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment. 2. HALT •. 3. Left (or rit!ltt~ DRESS. 4. FRONT. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 125 At the command Detachment, the rear rank men straighten their horses theand cannoneers return to theImlt. direction of their file leaders. At the command HALT, all

movement.The detachment is then marched to the front and made to repeat the same

n1arch274. he commands: When the instructor wishes the detachment to resume the direct

1. FORWARD. 2. Guide left (or rigltt.)

At the command FORWARD, the rear rank men replace themselves behind their file leaders and march straight forward . . .When the cannoneers have acquired the skill necessary to avoid confusion 111 the execution of the foregoing movements, they are repeated at tlte trot. . 275. The detachment being in ]jne, at a haIt, or in march, to place it In a Position perpendicular to the orig"inal hont, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment, 1'igllt (or left) wlteel. 2. .M"mcH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or rigltt) DRESS. 5. FRONT •

. Which commands are executed on the same principles as the wheel in C~rcle, a quarter of a circle only being described, and the command HALT gIven When the wheel is nearly completed. . 276. l'he detachment being in line, at a balt, or in march, to place it In a direetion oblique to the orig'inal front, the instructor commands:

1. Detachment, rigllt-IUllf (or left-half) wIled. 2. .MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or right) DRESS. 5. FRONT •

IS.PaSsed Whichover. is executed as in the wheel, except that the eighth of a circle only . 277. The detachment being in line, at a 11alt, or in march, to place it In a Position fitced to the rear, tbe instructor commands:

1. Detacltme;'t, right (or left) reverse. 2. .MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or rigltt) DRESS. 5. FRONT.

senllclrcle'':hich Commandsis described. are executed as prescribed in No. 275, except that a

£," 278. In all tbe wheels, when, instead of halting, it is desired to move C~I Wardl1 at their completion, instead of the commands 3. HALl', &c., the l' !Il! anc1s will be: :3. 1.'OH W"lRD. 4. Guide right (or left.) The command tl ORWA1{D is given as soon as the detachment is in the new direction; all julOocanr~oneersresume the march to the hont, and the command for the guide '1' Ws nnmediately. '\'al~e foregoing movements being properly executed from a halt and at a ' are repeated at a trot.

OBLIQUE IN LINE.

to\ra" ~79. TIle detachment marcling in line, to cause it to gain ground l!lall.~

1. Ca1l'1lOneers,right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 126 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At the command MARcn, the cannoneers execute an oblique to the right so that tile head of each horse may be opposite the shoulders of the horse on his right, and that the right knee of each cannoneer may be in rear of the left knee of the man on his right. The men then move in the new direction, regulating upon the guide. \Vhen the detachment has obliqued sufficiently, the instruetor commands:

FORWARD.

The cannoneers straighten their horses and move forward. \Vhen in the execution of an oblique march, the guide is always on the flank of the detachment towards which the oblique is made; and after the command FORWAItD, the guide returns, without a command, to the side on whic11 it was when the oblique was crdered. This rule is general. \Vhen the cannoneers are not closed they increase the gait; when too much closed, or more advanced than the guide, they slacken the gait. 280. The detachment marching at a walk, to execute the oblique at a. trot, the instructor commands:

1. Cannoneers, right (or lcft) obliquc-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

The guide commences the trot without precipitation. The same principle is applied when the detachment is at a trot. and the object is to oblique at a gallop.

CHANGES OF GAIT.

281. \Vhen the detachment has been sufficiently instructed in the dif- ferent movements at a walk, the gaits lllay be changed during their execu- tion at the command of the instructor. To pass from one gait to another, the instructor commands:

1. Trot, (trot out, or gallop.) 2. MARCH.

And the cannoneers pass to the gait indicated, the instructor seeing that they conform to what is prescribed in Nos. 206 and 207. To move at the rapid gaits from a halt, in executing the foregoing move- ments, the instructor adds the command trot, trot out, or gallop, to the command of preparation, immediately preceding that of execution, as in No. 280, for obliquing at a trot. . 282. All changcs of ga~t must bc made gradually, and care must .be taken never to check a horse so suddenly as to injure his mouth or throw lUll1 on his haunches.

THE PLATOON.

283. The principles of the. instruction as laid down for the detachment are applicable to the platoon, the word Platoon being substituted for Dctach- mcnt wherever the latter occurs in the commands. The platoon is divided into detachments of eight men each the horse~ nel holders being left out, and the mon arc told off as in No. ] 87. The gun n f is on the right of the platoonj tho chief of caisson is the front rank lllfl ~, the left file. The mounti.ug at~d dismounting ~re executed as in Nos; J~ and 201; the gunner takmg hIS place on the right at the command ~ Olt. RANKS. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 127

A.RTICLE SEVENTH.

THE DRIVER ..

284. The value of horses depends greatly upon the management of the", and the eam bes'owed upon them. A man. the,etom, who wonld helikely W1thto. treat the them charge with of neglect,a pair. cruelty, or harshness, should never be intrusted 'rhe men selected should be thoroughly instructed in Article Fifth, and, t?gether with a sufficient number of cannoneers to provide against casual. bOl<,bee",etully t"ugbt in "Ii tbe dnties of ddve", A. Oppm'unity oeeo>'s, the other cannoneers shonld be instructed, until all are familiar with at least So mUch of the duties as are included in the School of the Piece. t POur drivers, with their horses, am united for instruction. 1'l'nehorses are . akeu in the stalls, which are supposed to be separated by SW1l1gbales, or at the pickets; the drivers are in boots and Spurs and sabre-belts. .When pra~hcaJ)le, a well-instructed driver should superintend each man who is takmg his first lessons in harnessing. 285. (Plate 18.) A pair of horses, properly harnessed, should be Paraded; the difrerent parts of the harness indicate~l, and their. nses explained to the meu iudividually, DRrVEns' SADDLE; VOl,LAn, n"" belly pad, ~traps, and billets,. HAMES: branches, togg.fes, loops for trace tugs, links J.or brea~t straps, rings, trace tugs, truss~llg straps, flame straps, collar IJtraps,. TRACES: trace chains, trace loops, trace hooks, belly band, loin 7'ap; Crw,. l'ER; HRE ECHl~ G, had, st ""p, I,;p "rap, breast strap, loop i Or pole straps ,. VALISE SADDLE: hook for reins ,. VALISE; 1-VIIIP: stock, 1l~/~,. LEG GUARD: hod!/, under strap, leg straps, plate. 1he harness, in its store-room or in the stable, is placed on its peg; the r~ll.J.lnlelof the saddle next the heel post; the breeching llangs over the tl HIe; the breast strap and hames over the pommel; the leg guard nnder c~evers saddle of the near horse; the collars hang Over the cantles; each blanket Pe i~s own saddle; the harness bridle, properl.y secured, hangs on its Co go, Which shonld be short, and placed under that of the llarness; the whole vered by the harness sack, properly secured.

TO HARNESS.

each 286. The instructor causes the harness sacks to be taken off, places lllan at the heel post, between his horses, and commands:

HARNESS. 5 pauses; G motions.

eoft:,"', '"''''moud HARNESS,eoeh wheol d"iver puts OR "nd buekles the arr::n Ofs IllS ofr horse, or passes it, bUclded, carefully over the horse's head, thel' 8}led ( Ie.and puts on the saddle blanket, then places himself on the left of "onJ~o,,Ife. seizes the pommel with 'bo left ond the coutle with tbe dght Jll,~tstle sups 1t off the peg; approaches the near SIde of the horse, and ad- get de/ 'llig-edsaddle nor in creased. its proper position, taking care that the blanket does not 128 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. THREE. He passes to the front of the horse, pulls ibe breast strap care- fully over his head; adjusts the hames to the collar, connects the lower part of the branches, and tightens the hame straps. FOUR. He passes to the near side of the horse, disengages the breechiug j then moving to the rear, draws it over the horse's haunches; arranges tho crupper and loin strap. :FIVE. He sees that the harness is properly arranged, tightens anti buckles the girth, and buckles the belly band. SIX. He bridles the horse, and secures the end of the check rein over the left head post, or to the picket rope. The near horse is harnessed in the same manner and by the same com- mands, with this exception: SIX. At this command the driver puts his leg guard on the right leg, plate outwards; bridles the horse j looses the check rein of the off horse, and, facing towards them, seizes the reins of the near one with his right, and of the off horse with his left hand, near the bit; backs them into the g'angway, faeing them towards the door, and takes the position prescribed for leading to the exercise ground. In harnessing and unharnessing the lead horses, the instructions as laid down for the wheelers apply, with the modifications required by the nature of the harness. 287. LEADlXG TO TIlE EXERCISE GROUND.-The driver, with sabre, when worn, hooked up, assumes the position of STAND TO HORSE, holdin~ at the same time the coupling rein of his off horse, thrown over the neck at his near one, in his right hand, so as to lead both. At the command LEAD OUT, all conduct their horses to the exercise ground, and form in one rank, 4 yards apart, with their horses on their right, the traces trussed up to the hames. TO COUPLE.

288. At the command COUPLE, the driver goes in front of his horses, faces towards tllCm, passes his right hand through the reins of his near horse, and uoubles the coupling rein :3t feet from the bit. 'With his right hand he passes the doubled par~ from below through the ring on the right hame of tl.1e near horse, inserts the running end of the coupling rein-which is ag-IUD doubleu so as to be readily uncoupled-through this loop, makes it fast of pullmg with his left hand, and then resumes the position of STAND 'fa HORSE. 'When the oft"horse has a curb bridle, the rein of this brIdle is held in the hand without being coupled.

TO MOUNT.

289. The instructor mounts the drivers by the commands and m~un~ vC1 prescribed for mountin.g t~e cannoneer. The reins being adjusted, the dn . seizes the whip with Ius nght hand, and fastens it to IllS wrist uy meallS ot 1110 the loop; then takes hold of the couplinn' rein ~O inches from the lla ,. closing his hand ancl pressing his thumb strong'ly against the second joint ot his forefinger, nails downward, the arms falling llatumlly.

USE OF THE COUPLI;\TG REIN AND WIIlP. 11c 290. The coupEng rein and whip are for the off horse ,,,hat the bril reins and logs are for th~ near. ~f tho off hOl:S0moves. too far for\\"a,rd, 1.I:li~ gently checked by carrymg the nght hand w1th the rem nearer to IllS 1l.C~IJo if he keeps behind, make him feel the whip on his right haunch; 11 SCHOOL OF 'fIlE PIECE. 129 t~rowss his shoulders in or hauncllCs out, touch him gently with the whip on hl right haunch. The driver should be careful not to use the coupling rein abruptly, especially in halting and reining back, otherwise he will throw the horse sUddenly and too llluch upon his haunches. 291. ',1.'0GATHER 'rIlE HORSES, the driver raises his right hand, and tnoves it towards the neck of the off horse, at the same time executing for the nfar horse what is prescribed in No. 160.

TO MAlleH. 292. The instructor commands:

1. Drivers, forward. 2. MARCH.

;At the first command, gather tbe horses. At the command MARCH, the dn"" st",ts offhis ho,"c by Iowm-inghis ,ight hand and moving it {mwa,.d, 1eplacing it as soon as the horse obeys j at the same time he moves the near orse as prescribed for the cannoneer. 293. To HAL'l'.-l'lw instructor commands:

1. Drivers. 2. HALT.

, The near horse is halted as prescribed for the cannoneer j the driver at the sanle time halts the off horse by gradually carrying the reins towards his heck, raising the rig1Jt hand so as to make the bit bear. He replaces the and as SOon as the horse o1.>eys.

TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEFT. 294. The instructor commands:

1. Drivers, right whccl. 2 MARCH. 3. HALT. ",t\teelsthe fl"t command, tI,. d,.ive, gath." his horn". At the se'ond, he \\'h them to the right, making the oft. horse describe a quadrant of a circle f:Sa.~seradius is 3.25 yards, or lu teet. The off horse moves at the ordinary 01/ h the near horse quickens his movements to correspond with those of the l' .Ol'se. At the third command he halts and holds the horses in hand. the lIE TURN TO TIlE LEl~'l' is executed accordiug to the same priuciples at hOl'SCOll1ll1

TO REVERSE. 296. l'he instructor commands:

1. Drivcrs, rigltt (or lcft) rcvcrse. 1'h 2. MARCH. 3. HALT.

e lllovelllent9 is executed on the same principles as the WIleel, the inner SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 130 llOrse c1escribinn' a semicircle of 10 yards, and the outer one of 12 yards, with 8tlCh an incretLs~ of gait as will make his movements correspond with tho~ of the inner horse. '1'0 OI3LIQUE.

297. The instructor commands: 1. Dr.ivcrs right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3.HAL'r. 'Vhich is executed according to the principles of tho 'wheel, observing that the oblique is one-eighth of a circle, and that the inner horse passes over au arc of 2.5 yards, the radius being' 3.25 yards.

'1'0 REIN BACK.

298. The instructor commands: I. Drivers, backward. 2. MARCH. 3. Drivers, IULT.

The movement is executed accorcling to tho principles presclibed for halt- ing, tho driver alternately raising and lowering the wrists as the horses obey, and taking earc to move both horses equally. '£hey should at first ~c backed but a few paces, and the aids prescribed in No. 167 may be used if necessary. At the cOlllumnd HAVl', slacken the reills and dose the legs; when the horses obey replace them.

TO DISMOUNT.

299. The instruetor commands: 1. Prepare to disJnOlmt. 2. DISMOUNT.

At the first command, the driver lets go the coupliuo- rein, and hangs the whip from the hook of the valise saddle. He then finislJCs the moYement, as prescribed for the cannoneer, and, when it is worn, hooks up the sabre.

TO FILE OFF.

300. The instructor commands: 1. By tlte 1"igltt, (or left,) file o.ff. 2. MARCH.

At tho ~rst C?ll1111~,~1(~, ~he driver u~couples by pul~ing the r~nning el1~ o~ Il the couplmg r?1ll undllt IS detached lrom the lIallle nng, pl1.ssmg to the flO of the hor:,;es lor the purpose. l~e then passes the coupling rein over tll.~ neck of the neur hor:,;e, and, holdmg it with the reins in the rio-ht hand, 11~

SUl:ICS the position of S'l'A~D TO HORSE. 0 At the cOlllmand MARCH, the drivers file oft', as alreudy directed for the cannoneer. TO UNHAR~ESS.

301. The horses having been returned to their stalls or the picl(et5~ the oft' horse is secured by Illeans o'l' the check rein. The' insj,:'uctor the .commands: UNHARNESS.

4 pauses j 5 motions. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 131 At. this command, the driver takes off llis leg guard, and hangs)t up; u~bndles the near horse, and puts up the bridle. ,ump l'Wo. He unbuckles and frees the crupper; slips the breeching over the tIh ~,seat., and places it over the cantle of the saddle, resting the middle of it on th~ UI~EE. He goes to the front, draws the breast s~raps weU forward through eu'e lInks; loosens the Lame straps at the top; (hsconnects the branches at tLh bottom; passes the breast strap over the horse's head; laying it, and l en the hames, over the pommel of the saddle. d1l!'oUR. He loosens the beUy band, and then the girth; strips off the sad- e; places it properly on its peg, and COvers it with the blanket. ~~IVE. ~Ie removes and puts up the collar, and secures the horse by his halter. :munds.-l he off horse is unharnessed in the same mannoI' and by the same Com-

. 302. Before removing the harness from the horse, it should be wiped olea? and dry, if practicable; if not, it should be put in good order at the eurlIest convenient moment, and covered with its sack. . 303. After the drivers have learned to execute properly each motion ?f harnessing and unharnessing, ,,'hich should be done under the eye of the ~hstructor, or other non-commissioned officer, or a well instructed driver, toy sh~uld be made to execute the moveme~ts in two motions. Aftenyard~, a, .tbes SImple Command HARNESS, they WIll harness both 110rses at thOlr F'tlrcrent, numbers.taking care to follow the directions iu the order laid down in the dif- 304. To HARNESS IN TWO MOTIOXS.-The instructor commands: 1. In two motions. 2. HARNESS. !tt tbe command HARNESS, they execute tIle first three motions of No. 286. }'\\,o. The drivers execute the last three motions of the same number. 305. To UNHARXESSIN TWO l\lO'l'IONS.-At the command:

1. III two motions. 2. UNHARNESS,

~\~ drivers execnte t.he first two motions of No. 301, and at the command 0, tbey execute the remainder.

MARCHING.

llart ~?6. Not more than eight drivers, w}th their horses, are united for this for' ~he men are in spurs and sabres. The horses are harnessed, led out, ,Bled.In line, as prescribed i~ No. 287, and coupled... ,. the .IeIn~tructor causes the dnvers to monnt, and agam oxplams the uses or iUg ~hu'phngell' horses. rein and whip, and the manner of gathering, moving, aud baIt-

TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT. 307. The instructor commands:

1. Drivers, from lite 1'igltt, front into column. 2. MARCH. "i~f.~~t.c23, }'ig. J.) At. the fi..,t comm.nd, tlw ,1>;,-.,- on tho ,'igl,t gatl,.., /Soon' I~es; and at the command Mc\HCH, moves directly to the front. As hlLlI!l~\<;he r~oves, the next driver gathers his horses; and so Soon as the les of the first pair are 011 a line with the lwads of Ilis own, Iw moves J32 SCHOOL OF TilE PIECE. fonvnrd ;) yards, obliques to the right, anc1again to the left, in time to enable Inm to entor the collUlln. He then follows in the tracks of the pair tlmt IHceedes linn, preserving' the distance of 2 yards from head to croup. Each of dJe other drivers executes the movement in succession, as 1)1'escribed for the second. The column is formed from the left on the same principles, the commands being: 1. Drivers, from tlte left, frO'lzt into column. 2. MARCH.

CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN COLUMN.

308. The drivers marching in column, to execute a change of direction to the right or left, the instructor commands:

1. Head of column, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

At the first command, the leading driver executes the wheel, and moves directly to the front at the command FORWARD. He is followed by the other drivers, who wheel in succession on the same ground. A change of direction, diagonally, is executed at the command:

1. Read of column, 'right (or left) half-wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

The leading driver making a half-wheel, and moving to the front.

TO HALT THE COLUMN.

309. The instructor commands:

1. Column. 2. HALT.

At the first command, the driver gathers his horses j at the second, he hiIliS. To resume the march in column, the commands are:

1. Col1tmn, forward. . 2. MARCH.

TO OBLIQUE IN COLUMN.

310. The instructor commands:

1. Drivers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. ll Which is executed as in No. 297, except"that when the drivers have Illsd a half-wheel, they move directly to the front, until the command

FORWARD

is given, when they resume the primitive direction. . s . Whilst obliquing, the drivers .may be h~1ted br tll.e command DT'lvri~ HALT. To resume the march 1Il the obhque du'ectlOn, the conllual1 g'iven; ]. Drivers. 2. MARCIl.

The drivers will keep their relative position, so that at the command foil' ward they will move accurately in column in the primitive directioll. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE.

TO FORM LINE.

.Instructor 311. commands: To THE FRONT.-The column being in march, or at a halt, the

1. Drivcrs, forward into linc, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Lift (or right) DRESS. 4. FRONT.

At the command ~.fARCH, the leading driver advances 5 yards and halts; ~~e other drivers oblique to the right (or left) until opposite their positions in lIne, t~en move forward and form at the proper distance, on the right (or eft) of the preceding- drivers, and dress.

La1 t, the 312. instructor To THE commands: RIGH'!' OR LEFT.-The column being in march or at a

1. Drivcrs rigltt (or lift) inw linc, wlwel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT.

h Eachlts driver wheels to the right, (or left,) as prescribed in No. 294, and ?'t the command, which should be given when the horses are in the n:W dll"ection. The instructor then aligns them. 313. ON THE IUGH'I' OR LEET.-The instructor commands:

1. Drivcrs on lite 1'igltt (or lift) into line. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Right (or left) DRESS. 5. FRONT.

f, At the COmmand MARCH, the leading driver wheels to the right, moves ~hward, and halts at the command of the instructor, which should be g'iven ~n he has unmasked the column. as ~he oth-or drivers continue to advtmco, wheel to the right in succession, so 1,0het~ke tlJeir places in line on the left of the preceding' one, and dress. balt Instructor gives the eommand Right DRESS, as soon as the first driver s. As Soon as the last driver is aligned, he commands FRONT.

TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 314. The instructor commands:

1. Drivcrs,forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide RIGHT (or LEFT.) e pr~ th. first command, gather the horses; at the second, move forward, 'l..'ol'Vlngthe intervals, and dressing on the guide. IlA.LT._ 'Vhen marching in line, the instructor commands:

1. Drivers. 2. HALT.

TO OBLIQ,UE IN LINE.

315. The instructor commands:

1. Drivers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. '''hieh' t~t the :t.executec1 i~ the same manum: as the oblique in column, except lIvers, drcssmg towards the nght, (or left,) and moving in tho SCIIOOL OF THE PIECE. 134 same dircetlOn, lwep in snch position with respect to each other that, at the command :FOInvARD, they will move to the front in a line parallel to the primitive one.

TO MARCH TO A FLANK.

316. TIm DRIVERS TIEING IN LINE, in march, or at a halt, the irr structor commamls: 1. DTivers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD.

Each driver wheels to the right (or left) at the command MARCH, and at the command FORWARD moves to the hont. The drivers being in column, the commands are:

1. Column by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCIl. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide RIGIlT (or LEl~T.)

TO REVERSE IN MARCHING.

317. THE DRIVERS TIEINGIN LINE, tbe instructor commands:

1. Drivers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide lUmIT (or LEFT.)

The movement is executed as prescribed in No. 296, except that at the third and fourth commands the drivers move to the front, dressing on the guide. The drivers being in column, the commands are:

J. Drivers, right (or left) revm'se. 2. MARCIl. 3. Column-FoRWARP,

CHANGE OF GAIT. cnt 318. "When the drivers have become accustomed to the manaO'em of a pair of horses at a walk, they will be practiced at a trot, and occasionallY at a gallop. To TROT, the instructor commands: 1. Trot. 2. MARCH.

At the first command, the driver gathers his horses. At the commando MARCH, he takes the trot gradually, using for the near horse the means P:tb- scribed for the cannoneer, at the same time advancing the coupling rein ,n the right hand. If the otl' horse does not obey this, the whip may be throat- ened, and, if necessUl7' used. "\Vhen the horse obeys, replace the h~nd .. t At the command '1rot ont-MARCII, the horses are urged to a rapid tl° , and the gait maintained, if necessary, by the whip and spur. .c b At the command Gallop-MARCIl, they are urged to the gallop, wbi gait is maintained until ordered to be changed. To pass from the gallop to the trot, the commands are:

Trot-MARCH.